100+ Easy Thanksgiving Recipes: Turkey, Sides and Desserts https://foolproofliving.com/category/holidays/thanksgiving/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 05 Dec 2025 16:34:46 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 100+ Easy Thanksgiving Recipes: Turkey, Sides and Desserts https://foolproofliving.com/category/holidays/thanksgiving/ 32 32 Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/#comments Tue, 04 Nov 2025 20:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15392 Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You…]]>

This is the only way I make mashed sweet potatoes.

Aysegul

When it comes to Thanksgiving side dishes, I have a few go-to recipes, and this creamy sweet potato mash has been one of them for over 10 years. I first came across the recipe in Cook’s Illustrated, and it has never let me down.

What I love most is its flexibility. You can make it right before serving dinner, or prepare it ahead of time and reheat it without losing any of its creaminess. I usually keep it simple, but it’s also the perfect base for adding your own twist, whether you prefer a sweet touch with maple syrup or a savory one with herbs and spices.

Over the years, I’ve tried it both slightly sweet and boldly savory, and it always turns out creamy and delicious. I don’t know about you, but for me, this is the best kind of recipe I need for the holidays: easy, reliable, and open to your own creativity.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work

This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my testing:

Ingredients from the top view with text on each one.

Sweet Potatoes: I use the standard sweet potatoes commonly found at most U.S. grocery stores. The most popular kinds are Jewel or Garnet; they both work in this recipe and offer a naturally sweet taste and creamy texture. 

Look for firm ones with smooth skin and no visible bruises. Peel them and cut into similar-sized chunks so they cook evenly.

Unsalted Butter: I used unsalted butter so I can adjust the salt myself, but salted butter can also be used. If you want to make these mashed potatoes dairy-free, you can swap in your favorite vegan butter.

Heavy Cream: If you look at the recipe below, you might think that only 2 tablespoons of heavy cream won’t be enough to cook all the potatoes, but it is. Both sweet potatoes and butter will release their juices, which is plenty to steam them in the pan.

While it won’t be as creamy, you can substitute it with half-and-half, regular milk, or almond milk for a vegan option.

Seasonings: I keep it basic with kosher salt and black pepper. However, if you want a hint of warmth, add a pinch of ground cinnamon and a touch of nutmeg; they both pair particularly well with sweet potatoes.

Maple Syrup (Optional): I personally love how it brings out the natural sweetness of the potatoes, but if you prefer not to add any sweeteners, you can leave it out.

How to Make Mashed Sweet Potatoes

When it comes to mashed sweet potatoes, the first question that always arises is: should you bake, steam, or boil them? While there are recipes for each, over the years of making this creamy sweet potato mash, I’ve found that the easiest and most reliable way is none of those. 

Instead, cooking cubed sweet potatoes right in the pan with a bit of butter and cream is the right answer. 

Images showing the adding of sweet potatoes, cream and butter to the pan.

Step 1 – Cook the Sweet Potatoes: Place the peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a large pot with butter, cream, a splash of maple syrup, and salt and pepper. There’s no need to add water as the potatoes release their own liquid as they cook. 

Next, cover the pan with a tight lid so they can steam. This step is important because it keeps the potatoes from drying out. Stir every so often to keep them from sticking to the bottom.

Also, keep in mind that this whole process is quite quick, so keep a close eye on it.

Person showing how to mash sweet potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 2 – Mash To Your Liking: Once the potatoes are soft and tender, mash them right in the pot. I like to use a potato masher or even a fork for a more chunky texture.
For a perfectly smooth consistency, consider using an immersion blender or a potato mill.

Easy mashed sweet potatoes garnished with butter and pecans in a bowl.

Step 3 – Season and Serve: Taste the mash and add a little more salt or pepper, as needed. Then, transfer it to a serving bowl and finish with your favorite garnish.

Expert Tips for the Best Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Although this sweet mashed potatoes recipe is as simple as it gets, a few tricks will help you achieve the best results. Here are my notes from making it over the years:

  • Potato masher vs. food processor: A masher works perfectly for a more rustic texture. If you use a food processor, pulse instead of blending continuously, so the mash stays creamy rather than gluey.
  • Use a pot with a tight-fitting lid: The lid helps the potatoes steam in their own juices, which makes them creamy without the need for extra liquid.
  • Keep a close eye on it: This recipe comes together quickly, usually in about 20 minutes. Keep the heat at medium to medium-low and give them a stir a couple of times. Potatoes cook quicker than you think, and if they are left alone, they can stick to the bottom.
  • Cut the potatoes the same size: This helps them cook evenly, so you don’t end up with some pieces still firm while others are mushy.

FAQs

Why are my mashed sweet potatoes watery?

With many recipes, this occurs when the potatoes are boiled but not drained properly. Since this recipe cooks the potatoes in their own juices, you don’t have to worry about excess water.

How do I fix a dry mash?

If the mash feels too thick, stir in a splash of warm cream or milk until it reaches to your desired level of consistency.

Can I use yams instead?

I do not recommend using yams in this recipe. Here in the US, most people refer to sweet potatoes as yams but they are not the same thing. True yams are very starchy with a mild flavor so they won’t deliver the same results.

Serving Suggestions

This is one of my go-to Thanksgiving sides, and it pairs beautifully with both holiday favorites and simple weeknight meals. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and thyme.
Print

Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes Recipe

Most mashed sweet potato recipes boil the sweet potatoes, and while that is a good approach, it takes a long time, and you lose most of the flavor in the boiling water. My recipe here cooks them in a pot along with a bit of butter and heavy cream. The result is a super creamy sweet potato mash that comes together in under 30 minutes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 343kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter cut into 4 pieces, extra for topping if preferred
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 2 pounds sweet potatoes 3 medium-sized , peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup optional
  • 3/4 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon pecans as garnish – optional
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs thyme or parsley, chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Place butter, heavy cream, sweet potatoes, maple syrup, salt, and black pepper in a medium-sized saucepan with a tight fitting lid.
    Person pouring in heavy cream into saucepan.
  • Stir well to combine.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Cook, stirring occasionally, over low heat until sweet potatoes are soft (almost falling apart), 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a knife into a sweet potato. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready to mash.
    Person checking the doneness of a sweet potato cube with a knife.
  • Using a potato masher (or a fork), mash the potatoes. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Place in a bowl or a plate (like I did) and garnish with pecans and/or butter.
    Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter, thyme, and pecans.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 4-5 cups of mashed sweet potatoes, enough to serve 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make-Ahead: You can prepare the mashed sweet potatoes 1 to 2 days in advance of serving. Simply let them cool completely, then store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: There are a few simple ways to warm them up:
    • Stovetop: Warm them gently over low heat with a splash of cream or butter until they reach your desired consistency. Stir frequently to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.
    • Oven: Place them in an oven-safe dish, cover loosely with foil, and let them warm up for about 10-15 minutes. 
  • Freezing: You can also freeze it in a freezer-safe container or bag for up to 2 months. Just thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat to enjoy.

Nutrition

Calories: 343kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 565mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 32640IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg

Holiday Variations and Garnish Ideas

I usually garnish with a couple of pecans, but this mash is super flexible. Here are some of my favorite ways to spice it up:

For a sweet version: You can garnish with cinnamon, brown sugar, roasted marshmallows, or add a little extra maple syrup. A touch of fresh orange zest or lime zest are also good options.

For a savory version: Mix in a small clove of roasted garlic (or try this quick air fryer roasted garlic) and a small amount of fresh herbs like fresh thyme or rosemary. You can also add a sprinkle of shredded parmesan and a handful of fresh chives. 

For the holidays: If you want to take it up a notch for Christmas or Thanksgiving, I recommend browning the butter. Before adding the sweet potatoes to the pot, let the butter simmer until browned. 

You can also garnish with candied bacon or toasted pumpkin seeds for crunch.

Maple sweetened easy mashed sweet potato recipe placed on an oval dish served with pecans

More Sweet Potato Recipes 

If you are like me and can’t get enough of sweet potatoes, here are a few more recipes I make every year around the holidays:

  • My adaptation of Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Soufflé Recipe has been one of the most popular holiday potato recipes on the blog, thanks to its thick butter and pecan streusel-like topping.
  • If you’re looking for something both sweet and savory, try my Sweet Potato Stacks. It’s baked thin slices of sweet potatoes that are perfect for brunch, dinner, or any holiday meal.
  • And if you’re craving something warm and comforting, this Vegan Sweet Potato Soup is silky, spiced with ginger and carrots, and perfect as either a holiday starter or a simple weeknight meal.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 18
Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Tahini Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/#respond Sat, 01 Nov 2025 19:45:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84257 Ingredients You’ll Need This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler…]]>

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with a Mediterranean Twist

Aysegul

Let’s face it, perfectly crispy and tender roasted Brussels sprouts already have their place on the holiday table, but why not spend 5 more minutes to give them a little Mediterranean flair and turn them into a showstopper? 

Growing up in Turkiye, I learned how a few simple ingredients, such as olive oil, Greek yogurt, garlic, and tahini, can transform even the most familiar dishes into something a bit more thoughtful and creative.

This crispy Brussels sprouts recipe follows that same philosophy: an easy way to take a holiday classic and elevate it with bold, balanced flavors, all without adding any extra stress to your cooking routine.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it looks. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing to make sure it all comes together perfectly:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Brussels sprouts: 

Brussels Sprouts: When shopping, take the time to choose firm, bright green sprouts that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Seasoning: I kept the Brussels sprouts seasoning simple with paprika, ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

For the Tahini Yogurt Sauce:

The Tahini Yogurt Sauce recipe I am using in this baked Brussels sprout recipe is one of the first recipes I learned from my mom. It is also a staple in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Greek Yogurt: I recommend using a thick Greek yogurt instead of regular yogurt. It’ll give you a creamier texture and will spread smoothly.

Tahini: I really like Soom’s tahini because it’s super creamy, smooth, and easy to work with. Be sure to give your tahini a good stir and a quick taste before using it, as the flavor and texture can vary between brands.

Garlic: I am using freshly minced garlic, but if you prefer a milder taste, you can use ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder as an alternative, or simply omit it.

For Garnish:

Pine Nuts: Taking the time to toast the pine nuts makes all the difference, and it’s, in my opinion, what takes this oven-roasted Brussels sprouts recipe to the next level. 

Toasting them is so easy! Simply add them to a dry skillet and toast over medium heat for 4-5 minutes, stirring often, until they’re golden and fragrant. 

Pomegranate Arils: I am using them to add a festive color, more texture, and to balance the creaminess of the sauce. In a pinch, dried cranberries can be used as a substitute.

Pomegranate Molasses (optional): If you can get your hands on it, a drizzle of pomegranate molasses is a classic Mediterranean finishing touch. Alternatively, you can use balsamic glaze as a substitute. It will have a different flavor profile but will still taste delicious.

How to Make Crispy Roasted Brussels Sprouts: Oven Method

The secret to getting that irresistible crisp edge and tender center is high heat, space on the pan, and a touch of olive oil. Here’s exactly how I roast Brussels sprouts so they come out golden and crisp every single time:

Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.

Step 1 – Prep the Brussels Sprouts: Preheat your oven to 425°F (204°C) and line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Trim the ends of each Brussels sprout and slice them in half. Transfer the sprouts to the pan and drizzle them with extra virgin olive oil, and sprinkle with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.

Person seasoning Brussels sprouts with ground cumin and paprika on a sheet pan.

Step 2 – Arrange the Sprouts Cut-Side Down for Maximum Caramelization: This may seem like an extra step, but it’s crucial for achieving the best texture. Flip each sprout cut-side down and make sure they’re spaced evenly on the pan. When the flat sides touch the hot pan, they caramelize beautifully. Otherwise, the moisture will trap and steam them instead.

Freshly roasted Brussels sprouts from the top view.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the Brussels sprouts for about 20 minutes, tossing them once halfway through so they brown evenly. Since each oven is different, check on them around the 18-minute mark. You’re looking for golden edges and centers that are soft enough to pierce with a fork but still hold their shape.

If they’re not crispy enough, leave them for a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on them.

Step 4 – Let Them Cool: Once the Brussels sprouts are out of the oven, allow them to cool in the pan for a few minutes before assembling, allowing the steam to escape and keeping the outsides crisp.

Assembling the Baked Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce

Now that we have roasted the Brussels sprouts, it is time to put them all together. Honestly, this is my favorite part as it takes no more than 2 minutes but looks so impressive.

Person making the tahini yogurt sauce for the recipe.

Step 1 – Make the sauce: If you’ve never paired roasted vegetables with a cool yogurt sauce before, you’re in for a treat. To make my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, whisk together thick Greek yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt in a bowl. 

Step 2 – Spread: Place a large serving platter (or an oval plate, as shown in the pictures) on a flat surface and spread the yogurt sauce evenly on the bottom in a layer using the back of a spoon. This creamy base should be easy to spread but nice and thick.

Roasted Brussels sprouts served over yogurt sauce with tahini.

Step 3 – Add the Brussels Sprouts: Add the now slightly cooled Brussels sprouts directly over the sauce. It does not have to be perfect; let some of the sprouts overlap or fall to the sides. 

Step 4 – Garnish and Serve: Finish it off with toasted pine nuts for added crunch, a handful of pomegranate seeds for a touch of sweetness, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, if using.

Helpful Tips for the Best Roasted Brussels Sprouts

After testing this recipe a few times, I found a few small details that make a big difference in getting Brussels sprouts that are perfectly crisp on the outside and tender on the inside:

  • For the Best Crisp: The key to perfectly golden Brussels sprouts is spacing them so the steam doesn’t trap, which makes them soft instead of crispy. Arrange them cut-side down to get that beautiful golden crust where they touch the pan.
  • Using parchment paper: Direct contact with the hot pan helps the cut sides caramelize more. I’ve tested both ways, and thanks to the high 425°F/218°C oven temperature, the difference was negligible. So, choose whichever matters more to you: easy cleanup or maximum crispiness.
  • Toss halfway through: Giving them a quick stir at the halfway point helps them brown evenly and prevents one side from overcooking or burning. 
  • Dry them thoroughly: Make sure the sprouts are completely dry before seasoning them. It will help them roast better. If you’re short on time, a good shortcut is to buy pre-cut, ready-to-eat Brussels sprouts, which can be easily found in most large grocery stores.

FAQs

How do you prepare Brussels sprouts for roasting?

Rinse them under cold water to remove any debris, then dry them really well. Trim the woody ends and cut each sprout in half.

How long to roast Brussels sprouts at 425°F?

At this temperature, they’ll roast in about 20 minutes. If your sprouts are larger, you may have to roast them a bit longer (no more than 5 minutes).

How do you know when Brussels sprouts are cooked?

The outer layers should look golden brown with a crispy texture, while the insides feel soft and tender in the center when pierced with a fork.

How do you season Brussels sprouts?

Brussels sprouts take well to warm, earthy spices. Start with salt and pepper, then add a warming spice like paprika, cumin, or coriander. They’re also great with smoked paprika, garlic powder, or a little cayenne if you want some heat.

Can I reheat leftovers?

Yes! While roasted Brussels sprouts are always best fresh out of the oven, you can revive leftovers by warming them in a 400°F (200°C) oven for 5-7 minutes to restore their crispness. I don’t recommend microwaving them, as they’ll soften too much and lose their crispiness.

More Brussels Sprouts Recipes to Try

There is a reason why Brussels sprouts are one of the most popular Thanksgiving vegetable sides. They are so versatile and take on pretty much any flavor. So, if you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few Brussels sprouts recipes from the archives:

  • If you love a crisp and tangy green salad that makes sprouts shine, look no further than my Kale Brussel Sprout Salad
  • For another brussels sprouts recipe perfect for your holiday table, try my Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts. This 5-ingredient recipe is just as colorful and easy to make.
  • If you’ve never had shredded Brussels sprouts, you’ll love my Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad. It’s a bright and crunchy salad that is tossed with apples, hazelnuts, and goat cheese. 
  • For an easy sheet-pan side, try my Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes. This is the perfect simple fall side that works for both simple weeknights and holidays.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Roasted Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and served over yogurt tahini sauce.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce Recipe

These roasted Brussels sprouts are crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and served over a creamy tahini yogurt sauce for a bright Mediterranean twist. Finished with toasted pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, this simple side dish feels restaurant-worthy yet easy enough for any weeknight or your holiday table.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Brussels Sprouts:

  • 1 ½ lbs Brussels sprouts cleaned and sliced in half lengthwise
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tahini Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt full-fat
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

As Garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425 °F/204 °C. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchement paper.
  • Place Brussels sprouts on the sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
    Person seasoning Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the sprouts are evenly coated with everything. Arrange the Brussels sprouts cut side down and roast them for 20 minutes, tossing them halfway through.
    Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down while you are working on making the yogurt sauce.
    Crispy roasted Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • While the sprouts are roasting, make the tahini sauce. In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    Two images side by side showing the making and spreading of the yogurt tahini sauce.
  • When ready to assemble, spread the yogurt sauce on a serving platter. Arrange the Brussels sprouts over the top. Sprinkle them with toasted pine nuts and pomegranate arils. If using, finish it off with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses.
    A collage of images showing the roasted Brussels sprouts being assembled.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4-5 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How to Make Ahead: I’ve tested this recipe both fresh and prepped ahead, and while it’s best right out of the oven, it still tastes wonderful the next day. To prep ahead, you can roast the sprouts and make the sauce, then store them separately in the fridge for up to one day in advance. On the day off, you can reheat the sprouts in a 400-degree oven for 7-8 minutes and then assemble the recipe as written.
  • Storage: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for 2-3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 937mg | Potassium: 920mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1423IU | Vitamin C: 151mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 4mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 0
12+ Showstopping Holiday Potato Recipes https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/#respond Tue, 28 Oct 2025 17:26:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84044 Look, I get it. Mashed potatoes are a classic, and I am all for them. But when it comes to…]]>

Look, I get it. Mashed potatoes are a classic, and I am all for them. But when it comes to potatoes, we can all do a little more than the standard version everyone pairs with turkey. Don’t get me wrong, I can’t imagine a holiday dinner without them, but potato side dishes are one of those things you can easily have more than one of on your table. 

If you’re like me and don’t mind stepping a little outside your comfort zone, I’ve put together this creative, tested, and perfected roundup of my best holiday potato recipes I make every year.

These are among my most popular Thanksgiving vegetable side dishes. And, they always disappear first and pair beautifully with any main, whether it’s meat, poultry, or vegetarian.

Swirled mashed potatoes garnished with butter and chives.

Creamy and Comforting Mashed Potatoes

Mashed potatoes are a classic for a reason. Soft, buttery, and irresistibly creamy, they’re simple to make and always a crowd favorite. Sure, you can make your grandma’s recipe, but why not take it up a notch and try one that prioritizes flavor above all else?

Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 4

Rosemary mashed potatoes with butter on top in a bowl.

These rosemary mashed potatoes are what I serve with my Herb Roasted Turkey every year for Thanksgiving. I just can’t imagine a better pairing.

The secret to making this dish truly special is steeping fresh rosemary and garlic in melted butter for a few minutes before mixing it with the boiled potatoes. It is a simple step that infuses every bite with deep, aromatic flavor.

Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6

Yukon gold mashed potatoes in a bowl with chives on top.

This is the mashed potato recipe that I make when I want something quick, easy and simple. Ready in 35 minutes, it uses simple ingredients like milk, sour cream (or Greek yogurt), and potatoes, available in most well-stocked pantries. 

Yukon gold potatoes naturally offer a creamy texture and rich buttery flavor, so you do not need to add too many other ingredients to make them taste good. However, you can drizzle the final dish with my Beef Gravy Recipe before serving for an extra flair.

Mashed Potato Casserole

Make-ahead friendly, Serves 6

Potato casserole topped off with crispy leeks.

Now, if you really want to wow your guests, make this mashed potato casserole. It combines regular and sweet potatoes, giving you the best of both worlds. It is a holiday season staple in my household.

Adapted from an old Martha Stewart recipe, it’s super creamy, decadent, and easily customizable. Want to jazz it up? Add your favorite toppings like chopped turkey bacon, sautéed leeks, or melted cheese for a delicious finishing touch.

The Best Sweet Potato Recipes for the Holiday Table

I don’t know about you, but I can’t imagine a holiday table without sweet potatoes. Whether you serve them roasted and caramelized, mashed or baked until tender, they always bring warmth and color to the meal. 

No matter how you prepare them, sweet potatoes are the perfect way to brighten your holiday spread. Below are my foolproof sweet potato side dishes that are guaranteed to impress.

Sweet Potato Soufflé

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6-8

Sweet potato casserole with a spoon on the side of the casserole dish.

I made this sweet potato soufflé recipe after watching Trisha Yearwood make it on her Food Network show over 12 years ago. It was also one of the first recipes I shared on the site.

Since then, it has been one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living around Thanksgiving. And it’s easy to see why. This recipe takes the classic sweet potato casserole and makes it even better with a generous layer of buttery pecan streusel on top. 

Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 4

Mashed sweet potatoes garnished with pecans.

Most mashed sweet potato recipes call for cooking a few peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a pot of boiling water, which is okay, but my recipe here steams them in a pot with a bit of butter and cream.

In less than 30 minutes, you end up with ultra-creamy mashed sweet potatoes that you can serve sweet with a drizzle of maple syrup or savory with a generous drizzle of my Turkey Gravy

Sweet Potato Stacks

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Makes 12 stacks

Sweet potato stacks from the front view.

Need something easy to make but visually impressive? Well, I know these sweet potato stacks look fancy, but this recipe couldn’t be easier to make. Just thinly sliced sweet potatoes layered in a muffin tin with butter, fresh herbs, salt, and pepper.

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegan, Serves 4-6

Roasted sweet potatoes and brussels sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

You might think that a recipe like this wouldn’t be all that popular. After all, it’s just two vegetables roasted together with a bit of oil and seasoning. 

But you’d be surprised to know that this is one of the most popular recipes on the blog, especially around Thanksgiving. It’s easy to see why: both vegetables cook at the same time, and you end up with the best of both worlds in under 30 minutes.

While it’s perfect for larger gatherings, it’s just as wonderful for smaller ones too. I especially love pairing it with my Turkey Tenderloin for a simple, satisfying holiday meal.

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6

Roasted sweet potato salad with Mediterrenean flavors.

Now, I know this might not be your traditional Thanksgiving or Christmas salad, but if you’re looking to try something a little different, make this Mediterranean sweet potato salad. 

Made with roasted sweet potatoes, caramelized shallots, and crispy chickpeas on a bed of arugula with feta and maple-candied walnuts, it’s colorful and vibrant.

Crispy, Roasted, and Air-Fried Potato Sides

If you’ve spent any time on social media, you’ve probably seen the crispy potato revolution. Over the last few years, cripsy roasted potatoes have become everyone’s favorite way to satisfy that craving for crunch, and I am completely on board with it.

The good news is that you have options. Roasting them in the oven is always a great choice, but if your oven is full, the air fryer is another handy tool up your sleeve. No matter which method you choose, the recipes below are my go-to roasted and air-fried potato sides that I know you’ll love.

Air Fryer Red Potatoes

Vegan, Serves 4-6

Crispy air fried red potatoes in a casserole dish.

I think red potatoes are one of these vegetables that are underutilized, and this air-fried red potato recipe is here to change that. 

Slightly creamier and sweeter than golden potatoes, this easy potato side dish is perfectly seasoned, crisp on the outside, and creamy on the inside. Oh, and it is ready in 20 minutes from start to finish.

Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes

Vegan, Serves 4-6

Crispy air fried fingerling potatoes from the top view.

I love fingerling potatoes because they come in fun shapes and sizes, and each potato offers a slightly different flavor. Yes, you can cook them in the oven, but cooking them in the air fryer makes them just as crispy with only one tablespoon of olive oil.

Potato Roses with Bacon

Vegetarian, Makes 6 “roses”

Potato roses in an oval plate from the top view.

If you really want to impress your guests, make these potato roses; they’re guaranteed to be the showstopper on the table. 

You might think it looks complicated, but it’s surprisingly simple to make: thinly sliced potatoes wrapped in turkey bacon (or regular bacon), with some shredded cheese, and baked in a muffin tin. The result is a crispy, golden, and decadent side that’s as beautiful as it is delicious.

Muffin Tin Potatoes

Vegetarian, Makes 12 stacks

Muffin pan potatoes on a plate.

If you love potatoes, cheese, and creamy comfort food, you have to try these muffin-tin potatoes. Made by layering thinly sliced potatoes with heavy cream, parmesan cheese, and seasonings, and baking them in a muffin pan.

They bake up with irresistibly crispy edges and a rich, tender center, giving you the best of both worlds. While it may look like something straight out of a restaurant, they’re surprisingly easy to make at home.

Smashed Fingerling Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegan, Serves 4

Smashed fingerling potatoes as a holiday potato side dish.

You can’t scroll through social media these days without seeing smashed potatoes, and for good reason. Fingerling potatoes are perfect for this recipe: boiled, gently smashed, then roasted until crisp on the outside and buttery on the inside.

Serve them straight from the oven with a sprinkle of fresh herbs, and, as I like to do, pair them with any of your favorite dipping sauces.

Watch: 3 Easy & Creative Potato Side Dishes For Your Holiday Table

See three of the most popular and impressive dishes from this roundup brought to life! Watch me show you exactly how to make my potato roses, muffin-pan potatoes, and a bonus recipe: crispy smashed potatoes topped with burrata.

FAQs

Can I make mashed potatoes ahead of time for Thanksgiving?

You sure can. Simply make the recipe as written, bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to a day or two before you are ready to serve it.

How do I keep roasted potatoes crispy for serving?

You can do a few things. First, roast them at high heat (425°F/218°C) oven, and once roasted, do not cover them (we do not want them to steam). Second, if you are not serving them right away, keep them warm in a low heat (200°F/95°C) oven so they stay warm and crispy.

What’s the biggest mistake people make when roasting potatoes for a crowd?

By far, the biggest mistake people make when roasting potatoes for a crowd is overcrowding the sheet pan. When the pan is packed too tightly, the potatoes steam rather than roast, preventing them from getting that golden, crispy exterior we all love. For the best results, give the potatoes plenty of space so each piece can make direct contact with the hot pan. If you’re cooking for a larger group, use two baking sheets and rotate them halfway through roasting for even browning.

What’s the best type of potato for mashing or roasting?

I prefer Yukon gold (also known as golden potatoes) for mashing and roasting as they naturally have a buttery flavor and a creamier consistency.

More Holiday Side Dish Inspiration

If you’re planning your full holiday menu, below are a few other sides from fresh salads to cozy soups that pair beautifully with any of your holiday mains:

  • No holiday meal is complete without a colorful salad that will bring everything together. If you agree, don’t miss my roundup of Best Fall Salads all in one place.
  • A warm, comforting soup always adds a special touch to a festive meal. Take a look at my Fall Soups collection for cozy, make-ahead options that will complement your holiday spread perfectly.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Vegan Apple Crisp https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/#comments Sun, 14 Sep 2025 13:56:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35696 Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we…]]>

Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we always come home with more apples than we need. When that happens, this simple vegan apple crisp is the first thing I turn to.

What I love about this version is that it delivers all the comfort of a traditional crisp but with a lighter approach. Instead of the usual butter-flour-sugar crumble, the topping is made with rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, and a touch of coconut oil.

It’s still golden, crisp, and satisfying, just a little more in line with how I like to bake at home.

And the best part? It’s vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, so it’s one of those desserts you can easily share or enjoy yourself, no special occasion needed.

Ingredients You’ll Need

As it is with any fruit crisp recipe, this no-sugar-added apple crisp recipe consists of two sets of ingredients: the apple layer and the crispy topping. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes on  key ingredients to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for butterless apple crisp from the top view.

For The Apple Layer:

Apples: You can use any type of apples you like. Use one type of apple or a combination of apples that offer different flavors. I usually use Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp apples, as they are sweeter than most other types, which helps make the crisp minimally sweetened. I also like to incorporate a Granny Smith apple for a little tartness.

Maple syrup: I use a small amount of maple syrup to coat the apples, but you can also use one tablespoon of coconut sugar, brown sugar, agave, or even regular sugar.

Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens everything up and keeps your apples from browning before baking. For this recipe, I wouldn’t recommend bottled juice.

Salt: I use kosher salt here. Don’t skip it, because even that tiny pinch enhances the sweetness coming from apples and makes the crisp taste richer.

Arrowroot powder: This helps the apple juices thicken as they bake, so you don’t end up with a watery crisp. An equal amount of cornstarch would be a great alternative.

For The Crisp Topping:

Oats: Use rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) for the best chewy texture. Quick oats will not work as they are thinner and tend to disappear into the bake. If you are curious about the difference, check out my Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats guide for a full breakdown.

If you are following a gluten-free diet, make sure to purchase gluten-free certified rolled oats.

Almond flour: Almond flour and almond meal both work in this recipe. I often use Blue Diamond Almond Flour because it is finely ground and easy to find, but Trader Joe’s almond meal is a good choice, too. 

If you can’t find almond flour at the store (or need a cheaper alternative), you can make it at home following my comprehensive guide on How to Make Almond Flour.

How to Make The Best Vegan Apple Crisp: Step-by-Step Instructions

This easy vegan apple crisp might look like something that belongs on a holiday table and takes hours to pull off, but it is actually super simple to make. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the apples: Chop your apples into small cubes. I prefer smaller chunks so they bake evenly and get soft all the way through. Once they’re cut, toss them in a medium bowl with maple syrup, lemon juice, cinnamon, salt, and arrowroot until everything looks coated. 

A collage of images showing the making of vegetarian apple crisp's topping.

Step 2 – Make the crisp topping: In a large bowl, stir together the oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, cinnamon, salt, coconut oil, maple syrup, and pecans. Mix until it starts to clump together in little bits because those clumps are what bake into those crunchy clusters everyone loves.

Rolled oats are the best choice here since they hold their shape in the oven and give you that real “crisp” texture. Quick oats are thinner and tend to disappear into the mix. 

Side by side photos showing the assembly of the recipe for vegan apple crisp.

Step 3 – Assemble the crisp: Spread the apple mixture evenly in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish. You can use a glass or ceramic pie plate or a square baking pan. The important thing is to ensure that cubed apples are spread evenly at the bottom of the dish.

Spread the topping on top. No need to worry about making it perfect. The uneven clusters are what make this simple apple crisp extra crunchy in the end.

A photo of the freshly baked no butter added apple crisp from the top view.

Step 4 – Bake: Bake in a preheated 350°F (177 °C) oven for about 40 to 45 minutes. You’ll know it’s ready when the topping is golden brown and you see the apples bubbling around the edges.

I did not experience this, but if the topping browns a little too quickly, you can cover the dish loosely with foil towards the end.

Step 5 – Cool and serve: Let the crisp rest for about 10 minutes before serving so the juices settle and the topping stays crunchy. I know it’s hard to wait, but it’s worth it.

How To Store, Reheat, and Freeze Apple Crisp

This gluten-free apple crisp is at its best when it comes out of the oven warm and sizzling, but you can definitely make it ahead or save leftovers to enjoy later. Here’s what I’ve found works best:

Storage: This recipe yields approximately 6 servings, and while it typically disappears quickly, any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 or 5 days.

Reheating: When you are ready to serve, warm it in the oven at 300°F (149 °C) to 350°F (177 °C) for about 10 to 15 minutes. The microwave works in a pinch, but the topping will soften instead of staying crisp.

Freezing: Apple crisp freezes well for up to 2 months, and you have two options:

  • Freeze before baking: Assemble the crisp in a freezer-safe dish, cover tightly, and freeze. When you are ready, bake it straight from frozen at 350°F (177 °C), adding a little extra time until the apples are tender and the top is golden. This is the best option if you want the topping to stay crunchy.
  • Freeze after baking: Let the crisp cool completely, then wrap it well (to prevent freezer burn) and freeze. When you are ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge and warm it in the oven at 350°F (177 °C) for 15 to 20 minutes. The topping will be softer than when freshly baked, but the flavor will still be delicious.
Apple crisp topped off with three scoops of vegan vanilla ice cream.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Crisp

Even though this vegan apple dessert is one of the easiest desserts you can make, a few small details can really change the outcome. Here are my best tips from testing this recipe:

  • Cut the apples into small pieces: Aim for evenly cut, ½-inch cubes. Larger chunks take longer to cook and soften, which makes the baking time longer.
  • Prevent a watery filling: If your apples are extra juicy (like Honey Crisp), add ½ teaspoon more arrowroot powder or cornstarch to keep the filling from being too watery.
  • Let it rest before serving: Allow it to cool down for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the juices have time to settle.

Variations & Substitutions 

One of the best things about this butterless apple crisp is how easy it is to adapt to your own needs and preferences. Here are a few ideas from my recipe testing:

  • Nut-Free: If you want to skip the nuts, swap the almond flour for oat flour and leave out the pecans. The crisp topping will not be as crunchy, but it can be a good substitute.
  • Sugar-Free Keto: For a keto or sugar-free version, replace the maple syrup with monk fruit sweetener or your favorite keto sweetener. Alternatively, if you want to make a sugar-free apple crisp, you can omit adding maple syrup completely. It won’t have the subtle sweetness that maple syrup offers, but it will still be delicious.
  • Mix-ins and spices: Try soaking raisins in warm apple juice and stirring them into the filling along with a pinch of ground cloves for a bit more spiciness. You can also experiment with chopped dates and even add a dash of cardamom if you are a fan of those cozy spices.

FAQs

Do I need to peel the apples?

It is totally up to you. I prefer not to peel mine, but either way would work.

What is the best way to cut apples?

Use a sharp knife to cut the apple in half, remove the core, and then cut it into ½-inch to ¾-inch cubes. The important thing here is that they are equal in size, so they bake evenly.

How do I keep the topping crunchy?

The key to keeping the topping crunchy is to let it cool for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This way, the apple crisp has some time to settle and harden before it is served.

What is the difference between an apple crisp and an apple crumble?

They are very similar apple desserts, with a minor difference. A crisp is usually made with oats and nuts in the topping, whereas a crumble typically has a topping made with just flour, sugar, and butter, so it’s more like a streusel.

Serving Suggestions

One of the best parts of this no-butter apple crisp is how versatile it is. It’s the perfect fall dessert to enjoy straight from the oven or dress it up with a few simple add-ons to make it extra special. Here are some of my favorite pairings:

A Glass of milk: Serve it with a glass of cold milk, or for a plant-based option, try my Homemade Almond Milk to balance the sweetness of the warm apples.

Ice Cream: You can never go wrong with a scoop of vegan vanilla ice cream on top. Alternatively, you can try my Coconut Milk Ice Cream for another dairy-free option or my Homemade Honey Ice Cream for a vegetarian option. 

Whipped Cream: If you prefer something lighter than ice cream, a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream on top adds just the right amount of sweetness without overpowering the apples.

Yogurt: You can even use this vegan apple crumble as a topping on my Vanilla Yogurt Recipe. It’s perfect for turning leftovers into a cozy breakfast the next day.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes You Might Like

If you loved this apple dessert, there are plenty of other apple recipes you can try this season:

  • My No Sugar Crockpot Applesauce is one of the simplest ways to use up extra apples and makes the perfect snack or baking staple during the fall months.
  • For a quick breakfast, try my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. It’s ready in 15 minutes and has all the warm fall flavors we love in a bowl. 
  • Or, if you’re feeding a crowd, Baked Apple Oatmeal is the ultimate make-ahead breakfast, perfect for fall.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Apple crisp in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Vegan Apple Crisp Recipe

The best vegan apple crisp recipe made without the use of butter and refined sugar (sweetened with maple syrup and fresh apples). Caramelized apples topped with almond flour-oat topping for a perfect vegan apple crumble for fall. Vegan, gluten-free, dairy-free, refined sugar free.
Course Breakfast Sweets, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 481kcal

Ingredients

For The Apple Layer:

  • 4 apples medium sized – cut into ½ inch cubes*
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2 gr
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons arrowroot powder or cornstarch – 14 gr

For The Crisp Topping:

  • 1 cup rolled oats not the quick-cooking kind- 100 gr
  • 1 cup almond flour 120 gr. (or almond meal)
  • ½ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 40 gr (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 7 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • ½ cup pecans roughly chopped 50 gr

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

To prepare the apples:

  • Place apples, maple syrup, lemon juice, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, and arrowroot powder in a bowl. Give it a stir. Place it in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish.

To prepare the crisp:

  • Mix together the rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, coconut oil, maple syrup and pecans in a bowl. Mix until well combined.
    Person making crumb topping.

To Assemble & Bake:

  • Distribute the crisp topping onto the apples in an even layer.
    Collage of images showing the assembly of the apple crisp.
  • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the topping turns lightly golden.
    Freshly baked apple crisp from the top view.
  • Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a cup of almond milk on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 generous servings (approximately 3/4 to 1 cup per serving). The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include optional ice cream on top.
  • * What kind of apples should I use? Feel free to use any kind of apples you like. I personally prefer using two different kinds for different flavors, but either way would work.
  • Can I make it ahead? You can prep the apples a day in advance and keep them in an airtight container in the fridge until you are ready to use them. They will probably brown a little bit, but since you will bake them, it shouldn’t be a problem. I do not recommend making the vegan crumble topping in advance as it could get soggy. Luckily, it takes no more than 5 minutes to put all the ingredients in a bowl and mix them.
  • How to store the leftovers? This recipe serves 6 servings. I doubt that you will have any leftovers, but if you do, place it in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 481kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 264mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/feed/ 10
Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/#respond Wed, 23 Apr 2025 17:27:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81131 How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic? Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but here are the most important things to know to make your balsamic and maple-glazed Brussels sprouts a success:

  • Cut side down: Roasting the Brussels sprouts with the cut side down gives you crisp, golden edges and more flavor. Tossing halfway through the roasting process ensures that they are roasted evenly and don’t get too dark on one side.
  • Glaze after roasting: Tossing the vegetables in maple syrup and balsamic vinegar after roasting them helps prevent the sugars from burning during the roasting process.
  • Check doneness: The best way to tell if your Brussels sprouts are fully roasted is by inserting a sharp knife into the center of one—it should slide in easily with little resistance.

How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic?

Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a few simple steps. The most time-consuming part is slicing the Brussels sprouts in half—after that, it’s mostly hands-off while the oven does the work. Below are the steps:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below. Below are a few ingredient substitutions:
    • Oil: I opted for extra virgin olive oil, but any flavorless oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
    • Honey: While the flavor profile will change slightly, honey can be a good substitute for maple syrup. 
  2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or roast directly on the pan for more caramelization.
A person is drizzling Brussels sprouts with olive oil and then spreading them on a baking sheet.
  1. Arrange and season: Spread the halved Brussels sprouts directly onto the pan. Drizzle with olive oil, then sprinkle with kosher salt and freshly ground pepper. Toss lightly on the pan, then arrange in a single layer, cut side down. Don’t skip this step as it is crucial for crispy Brussels sprouts.
Vegetables before and after they are roasted.
  1. Roast: Roast for 20–25 minutes, flipping halfway through. They should be deeply golden and tender.
Roasted Brussels sprouts being drizzled and mixed with balsamic maple syrup glaze.
  1. Prepare the maple balsamic glaze: Let them rest for 5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. In a small bowl, mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup. Drizzle this maple glaze for Brussels sprouts over the top and toss gently to coat.
  2. Finish & serve: Add optional toppings like chopped toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds for extra flair. Serve your roasted maple Brussels sprouts warm and enjoy!
Roasted maple balsamic brussel sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips:

This balsamic maple Brussels sprouts recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a couple of things I want to highlight to help you get the best results.

  • Keep an eye during the last 10 minutes: Brussels sprouts can go from perfectly roasted to overdone quickly. Start checking around the 20-minute mark, and give them a toss to promote even browning.
  • Don’t toss the loose leaves: Any leaves that fall off during trimming will crisp up beautifully in the oven. Leave them on the pan—they’ll add great texture and a bit of crunch.
  • Great served warm—or cold: While I prefer serving this dish warm, the flavors hold up well even when served at room temperature or chilled. It’s a versatile side that works beautifully for gatherings or even for meal prep.

Serving Suggestions:

While most people think of roasted balsamic Brussels sprouts as more of a holiday side dish (and trust me, it’s one of my favorite Thanksgiving veggie sides), I make it all year round . Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

You Might Also Like:

Brussels sprouts can surprise you in the best way. Here are a few more recipes I love making when I have a fresh bag in my fridge.

Roasted brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic on a plate.
Print

Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts Recipe

These Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts are golden, crisp, and full of flavor—the perfect easy vegetable side dish for weeknights or holiday gatherings.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 148kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb Brussels sprouts clean and sliced in half lengthwise
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon grond black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup

Optional Toppings *

  • ¼ cup pomegranate arils optional
  • ½ cup pecans chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F/218 C. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread the prepared Brussels sprouts in the pan, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper. Toss to combine. Spread them, cut side down, in a single layer.
    Person drizzling oil and spready brussel sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Roast for 20-25 minutes until tender, tossing halfway through.
    Brussel sprouts before and after they are roasted.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then transfer it to a large bowl.
    Person drizzling brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic vinegar mixture.
  • Mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup in a bowl. Drizzle it over the roasted Brussels sprouts and toss to combine.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if needed.
  • Transfer to a serving platter or bowl and garnish with pecans and pomegranate seeds, if using. Serve.
    Roasted balsamic maple Brussels sprouts in a plate from the top view.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts with maple and balsamic, which is ideal for four servings as a side dish. The nutrition information below does not include the optional toppings.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing.
  • Reheating: I find that reheating them in the oven is the best way to keep their crispiness. Simply preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C) and warm for about 10 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Air fryer method: If you prefer cooking Brussels sprouts in an air fryer to save on time, simply preheat your air fryer to 375°F, spread the halved sprouts on a single layer, and air fry for 15 minutes, rotating halfway through. 
  • It’s easy to customize this dish with a variety of optional toppings. Below are some ideas:
    • Nuts: The toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds are optional, but they elevate the dish with texture and color. You can easily swap the pecans for other nuts, such as walnuts, hazelnuts, or sliced almonds. 
    • Fruit: For a fruity touch, try using dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead of pomegranate seeds. 
    • Cheese: And if you want to add a bit of richness, a sprinkle of crumbled goat cheese or shredded Parmesan cheese works beautifully too.
    • Bacon: For a smoky-salty bite, try crumbling in some cooked bacon. I prefer baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon would also work.

Nutrition

Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 614mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 855IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/feed/ 0
Roasted Whole Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/#comments Fri, 11 Apr 2025 19:33:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20085 How to Roast Whole Carrots? Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

  • Ideal temperature and time: My preferred temperature for roasting is 425°F (218°C), and the roasting time is usually around 20–25 minutes. That said, cooking carrots in the oven depends on their thickness—thinner carrots (like the young ones from the farmers market) tend to roast quickly, while thicker ones may need 10-15 more minutes, depending on their size.
  • Uniform size matters: When shopping for this recipe, try to pick carrots that are similar in size so they roast evenly. If some are much thicker than others, you can cut them lengthwise to even them out.
  • To peel or not to peel? It’s totally up to you! I usually peel mine, but if you’ve got fresh, young carrots from the market, a good scrub under cold water works just as well.
  • Don’t crowd the pan: Spread the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan. Overcrowding can lead to steaming instead of roasting.

How to Roast Whole Carrots?

Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for a weekday dinner or a special gathering, here’s how to make roasted carrots that are tender, flavorful, and beautifully caramelized.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few substitutions and optional add-ins:
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is what I use most often, but melted butter or avocado oil are great options, too.
    • Seasonings: Keep it simple with salt and pepper, or add spices like cumin, smoked paprika, garlic powder, or even a touch of cinnamon for warmth.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is a favorite, but rosemary, oregano, or chopped parsley also work beautifully. Feel free to adjust the herbs based on what you’re serving—using the same or complementary herbs can help bring the whole meal together.
    • Sweeteners:  For holiday versions like honey-roasted carrots, try drizzling with a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup or sprinkling with a bit of brown sugar. If you’re after a more glazed finish, check out my Maple Roasted Carrots recipe for a richer, sweeter take.
  2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). I usually roast vegetables directly on the sheet pan because I find that the hot surface helps them caramelize better—especially when it comes to onions or root veggies. But if you prefer easier cleanup, feel free to line your pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
Steps showing how to season carrots to bake in the oven.
  1. Season the carrots: Place your carrots on the prepared sheet in a single layer. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Give them a good toss so they’re evenly coated.
  2. Roast the carrots: Pop the tray into the oven and roast carrots in oven for about 25 minutes, or until fork-tender. Test doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part—if it slides in easily, they’re ready.
  3. Serve and garnish: Transfer the baked whole carrots recipe to a platter and top with fresh parsley or your favorite herb for a little extra color and flavor.

Expert Tips

A few final tips to make your easy baked carrots even better:

  • Carrot tops: If your carrots have tops, you can trim them down but leave a little bit for a rustic look. And don’t toss those tops! They’re great for making a vibrant carrot top pesto—fresh, herby, and perfect for using up the whole vegetable.
  • For extra caramelization: Don’t flip the carrots during roasting—just let them roast cut-side down. This allows the natural sugars in the carrots to caramelize where they’re in contact with the hot surface, giving you those golden, slightly crisp edges that are so delicious.
  • Using baby carrots: While this recipe works well with any type of carrot, baby carrots tend to cook faster due to their smaller size. If you’re using this recipe to make roasted baby carrots, start checking for doneness around the 15-minute mark to avoid overcooking.
  • Cutting them in chunks: If you prefer, you can cut the carrots into 1½-inch pieces. Roasting them in chunks should take about the same amount of time, as long as they’re evenly sized.
Whole roasted carrots garnished with parsley from the top view.

Serving Suggestions

This simple carrot side dish pairs beautifully with so many mains. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted Chicken – You really can’t go wrong pairing these carrots with any kind of roasted chicken, but I especially love serving them alongside a whole roasted chicken or bone-in chicken breast. The flavors and textures just work so well together.
  • Prime Rib – These carrots are a great way to add a pop of color to your prime rib dinner, which I usually serve for Christmas. One of my favorite tricks is to roast the carrots while the meat is resting—everything comes together beautifully without any extra fuss.
  • Leg of Lamb – For a festive Easter meal (or any special occasion), serve these roasted carrots with roasted leg of lamb. The natural sweetness of the carrots is a great complement to the rich, savory lamb.

My Favorite Way to Serve Whole Roasted Carrots:

While this easy roasted carrots recipe is a delicious side dish straight from the oven, I love giving it a Mediterranean twist when I have a few extra minutes. The flavor profile in this version is inspired by my roasted carrot hummus recipe.

A woman is serving oven Baked Carrots Recipe on a sheet pan

I top the carrots with a cup of canned (and drained) chickpeas, a handful of crumbled feta cheese, fresh dill (or any other fresh herb I have on hand), and pomegranate seeds.

Then, I finish it off with a generous drizzle of my tahini lemon sauce.

It takes no more than 10 additional minutes, but it transforms this basic savory roasted carrots dish into a colorful, crowd-pleasing vegetable side dish that’s just a little extra special.

More Carrot Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this roasted whole carrots recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Overn roasted carrots on a plate from the top view.
Print

Roasted Whole Carrots Recipe

This Roasted Whole Carrots recipe is all about simplicity and flavor. With just olive oil, salt, and pepper, the natural sweetness of the carrots shines through. It's a versatile side that fits seamlessly into everyday meals or special holiday spreads.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs whole carrots cleaned, stems cut, and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218 °C).
  • Place the carrots onto a large baking sheet* in a single layer.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Toss to ensure all carrots are coated evenly with the oil and seasoning.
  • Roast in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork tender. You can check doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part of a carrot; if it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
  • Transfer onto a serving platter and garnish with parsley before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: Two pounds of roasted carrots serve 6 as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Carrots: I used whole carrots that are sold with stems. They tend to be thinner than regular carrots sold in plastic bags. This recipe would work with any carrot, but please remember that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the carrots and cooking time. For best results, I recommend cutting larger carrots vertically to ensure they are equal in size for even roasting.
  • Lining the baking sheet: I usually roast carrots without lining the baking sheet with parchment paper, as roasting them directly on the hot surface caramelizes them better. However, you can line the baking sheet with parchment paper if preferred.
  • To Store: Let the roasted whole carrots cool, then transfer them to an airtight container. They’ll keep well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold, at room temperature, or reheated.
  • To Reheat: I prefer warming them up in a low-heat oven (around 300°F/150°C) for 10–12 minutes. This gentle method helps preserve their texture and prevents them from drying out. You can also reheat them in a covered skillet over low heat if you’re short on time.
    To Freeze: While you can freeze roasted carrots, the texture will be softer once they are thawed. If that’s okay with you (for soups or purees), place the cooled carrots in a freezer-safe bag or container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat it in the oven for best results.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 489mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 25316IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/feed/ 24
Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

Ingredients

This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

  • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
  • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
  • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
  • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
  • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
  • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
  3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
  5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
  6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
  7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

  • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
  • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

Expert Tips

Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

  • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
  • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
  • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
  • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
  • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
  • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
  • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

Serving Suggestions

When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
  • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
  • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
  • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
  • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
Calories 122kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
  • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
  • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

Nutrition

Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
Easy Cranberry Apple Cake https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/#comments Sat, 21 Dec 2024 15:27:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1865 Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table.…]]>

Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table. This apple cranberry cake is the perfect centerpiece for a holiday gathering, whether celebrating with family or hosting friends. 

And if you find yourself with extra cranberries, don’t let them go to waste—transform them into a stunning Cranberry Almond Tart or a versatile Cranberry Maple Sauce to complement your holiday spread.

Cranberry and apple cake being sliced by a person.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This apple and cranberry cake is made with a list of simple ingredients. Here’s more detail about what we need from the grocery store:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Cranberries: You can use fresh or frozen cranberries. Take the advice of the Barefoot Contessa herself and buy a few extra bags of fresh cranberries when they are widely available in the fall and freeze the extra. Also, sort through the cranberries and pick out any stems.
  • Apples: I recommend a Granny Smith apple since it is tart and balances the sweetness. With that said, you can use any variety of apples you prefer, like Gala, Pink Lady, or Jonagold.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps the filling naturally sweetened, but you can use light brown sugar instead.
  • Orange Zest: Be sure to zest the orange before squeezing it.
  • Orange Juice: Freshly squeezed orange juice from a fresh orange will provide the best flavor.
  • Ground Cinnamon
  • Large Eggs: Ina uses extra large eggs in her original recipe, but I can never get my hands on them. Large eggs work just fine.
  • Cane Sugar: I like to use organic cane sugar for the cake recipe, but you can use granulated sugar if that is all you have. Make sure to save some extra for sprinkling on top just before baking.
  • Unsalted Butter: Unsalted butter controls the salt in the recipe. If you only have salted butter, omit the salt in the recipe. It is essential to let it cool before mixing it with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Vanilla Extract: A hint of pure vanilla extract rounds out the flavors.
  • Sour Cream: Full-fat sour cream provides the best texture and tang. Creme fraiche would be a wonderful substitute, or full-fat Greek yogurt, too.
  • All-Purpose Flour: Regular all-purpose flour creates a cohesive cake batter. If you want to make this gluten-free, use 1:1 gluten-free baking flour.
  • Kosher Salt

How to Make Ina’s Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe?

There is nothing to it. This apple cranberry pie recipe is so easy to make, it will become a new holiday staple. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch glass pie plate with butter or cooking spray. 
A collage of images showing how to make the batter for this cranberry and apple cake.
  1. Mix fruit filling: Add fresh cranberries, apple, coconut sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon to a large bowl. Mix to combine.
  2. Whip eggs: Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs on medium-high speed until thickened, about 2 minutes.
  3. Add wet ingredients: Add the cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream and mix on low speed until combined.
  4. Add dry ingredients: With the mixer still running, add the flour and salt. Mix until just combined. Do not overmix.
A collage of images showing the steps to baking this cake.
  1. Fold in fruit mixture: Fold in the cranberry apple mix with a rubber spatula.
  2. Transfer to baking pan: Pour the cake batter into the prepared baking dish. Sprinkle the top with the remaining tablespoon of sugar.
  3. Bake: Bake for 60-65 minutes, until lightly golden brown. The cake is done when the middle of the cake is pierced with a toothpick, and it comes out clean. Cool for 15 minutes before serving.

What to Serve It With?

It’s important to note, that the flavor of this cake is more sour than sweet, which is why I love to serve it with a creamy component to balance the sourness. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

  • Ice Cream: Serve it with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or our Vanilla Honey Ice Cream if you want to try something new.
  • Whipped Cream: A dollop of whipped cream would be extra delicious, like our Maple Whipped Cream.
  • Creme Fraiche: Creme fraiche is another rich, tangy counterpoint that makes it elegant and divine.
  • Yogurt: Another good idea is Vanilla Yogurt if you don’t have any other toppings on hand.
Freshly baked cake from the top view.

How to Store Leftovers?

This cranberry apple dessert is best served the day it is made, but it can be stored for later with fantastic results. Here are my best storage and reheating tips:

  • Storage: The cake is very moist because of the fresh fruit. For this reason, I allow it to come to room temperature and then store it in an airtight container in the fridge. The cake will last for 3 days.
  • Reheat: While you can enjoy the cake cold, if you prefer it warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5-10 minutes, depending on the size of your slice.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Easy Cranberry Apple Cake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from Ina Garten’s cookbook Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That?

Cranberry and apple cake is being sliced from the top view.
Print

Easy Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe

An easy to make and quick to put together Cranberry Apple Cake recipe right out of Barefoot Contessa's cookbook. A recipe that I make every year as soon as the fresh cranberries are available in the market.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 ounces fresh cranberries rinsed and picked over to remove stems (frozen cranberries can also be used)
  • 1 Granny Smith apple peeled, cored and diced into 1-inch cubes
  • ½ cup coconut sugar or light brown sugar
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest grated zest from 1 orange
  • ¼ cup orange juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 cup cane sugar plus 1 tablespoon to garnish or granulated sugar
  • ¼ pound unsalted butter melted, cooled slightly plus more for greasing the pie plate
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup sour cream full fat
  • 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch pie plate with butter or cooking spray and set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, add cranberries, diced apple, ½ cup coconut (or brown) sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon. Mix to combine. Set aside.
  • Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs until frothy, approximately 2 minutes.
  • Add 1 cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, melted and cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream. Beat on low until thoroughly combined.
  • While the mixer is on low, add flour and salt. Mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
  • Fold the batter into the fruit mixture, ensuring that the fruit and batter are evenly distributed and mixed.
  • Pour the mixture into the 10-inch pie place. Sprinkle with the additional tablespoon of cane sugar.
  • Place in the oven and bake for 60-65 minutes* until lightly brown. To test for doneness, insert the cake with a toothpick or sharp knife. It should come out clean when removed.
  • Let cool for 15 minutes and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a 10-inch cake that serves 8 slices. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Baking dish: You must use a 10-inch baking dish. We tested it with a 9-inch pie pan and the cake batter overflowed. However, if you only have a 9-inch baking dish, place it on a baking sheet before baking it in the oven. The baking sheet will catch any cake batter if the cake starts to overflow.
  • Bake time*: While Ina Garten’s recipe calls for a baking time of 55 – 60 minutes, we found it took longer for us. I recommend you start checking it with the toothpick test at the 55-minute mark. Then, bake in additional 5-minute increments if it is not ready.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 87g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 133mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 64g | Vitamin A: 210IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/feed/ 20
Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/#comments Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:51:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79352 I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no…]]>

I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no mashed potato recipe turns out as silky as one made with Yukon Golds. 

The reason is simple. They have just the right amount of starch and a naturally buttery flavor that creates the smoothest, creamiest texture without needing a ton of added fat.

Yes, my version uses a bit of butter, sour cream, and milk, but I’ll also share ways to make it your own, whether that means swapping in Greek yogurt, keeping it extra rich, or making it vegan without losing that velvety texture. 

Plus, I’ll walk you through everything you need to know, from whether to peel them to how to season them so they taste restaurant-worthy, and how to make them ahead for your holiday table.

Mashed golden potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and chives.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This recipe for mashed potatoes with Yukon gold is remarkably simple. The adaptability and ease of this recipe are what make it such a classic. It comes together with a few basic ingredients that you can find at any grocery store. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Yukon gold potatoes: At the supermarket, you may also see these referred to as yellow potatoes, golden potatoes, baby gold potatoes, petite gold potatoes, or even Yukon golden potatoes. While the smaller “baby” potatoes will work for this recipe, I prefer the standard size for ease of peeling. 

Whole milk: Mashed yellow potatoes are intended to be rich and creamy in consistency and that requires a full-fat milk. You could also achieve the same result using half and half. If you prefer to use a vegan milk such as oat milk or almond milk, just be sure you select one that is unsweetened and unflavored. 

Fresh garlic: The real secret to the best gold mashed potatoes is garlic. The infusion of fresh garlic complements the yellow potatoes in such a decadent way. If you’d like an extra intensity here, I recommend that you use roasted garlic, which can easily be prepped in the oven or even in the air fryer!

Unsalted butter: While you can use salted butter, it is harder to control the overall saltiness of the dish this way; using unsalted butter gives you more control to make adjustments later. If you prefer, vegan butter can be swapped in. 

Sour cream: Traditional mashed baby gold potatoes always call for sour cream, as it adds a welcome tang to the side dish. But if you aren’t a fan of sour cream, feel free to substitute in either whole milk plain yogurt (or Greek yogurt) or cream cheese.

Salt & Pepper: I used Kosher salt and black pepper. If you’d prefer a more even color for your Yukon whipped potatoes, you may switch to white pepper instead.

Cheese (optional): I didn’t include cheese to keep it light, but for a cheesy twist, you can fold in a cup of shredded cheddar, Parmesan, or Gruyère just before serving. The heat from the potatoes will gently melt the cheese, adding a richer, more indulgent taste. Alternatively, you can also sprinkle a handful of shredded cheese on top before serving.

Additional toppings (optional): What to add to mashed potatoes for flavor, you ask? There are lots of options that pair well with this pliable mashed yellow potatoes recipe. Some of my favorite toppings include fresh herbs, green onions, and turkey bacon. A true Epicurean upgrade: drizzle some truffle oil on top before serving!

How to Make Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes?

The steps to prepare my signature creamy Yukon gold mashed potatoes are quite straightforward. I have tested this recipe more times than I can count.

So, if you follow along below, you’ll end up with golden mashed potatoes that disappear faster than any other side dish on the table.

A collage of images showing how to make mashed potatoes with gold potatoes.

Step 1 – Boil the cubed yellow potatoes: Fill a large pan with cubed potatoes and enough cold water to cover them by about an inch. Stir in 1 tablespoon of kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.

Starting with cold water helps the potatoes cook evenly from the inside out.

Step 2 – Cook the potatoes until fork tender: In my testing, I found that it took about 15-20 minutes to reach the desired consistency when the potatoes were cut into even 1-inch cubes.

You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, the golden potatoes are done.

Step 3 – Drain the potatoes: Then return the warm potatoes to the pot.

Step 4 – Warm your milk and butter: While the gold potatoes are cooking, place your milk, fresh (or roasted) garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low heat until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed. There is no need to bring it to a boil; you just don’t want to be using cold ingredients.

A collage of photos showing how to mash yellow potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 5 – Add the warmed milk mixture to the pan: Combine the milk mixture with the drained potatoes and lightly mash to combine. You want to move fast here so you can take advantage of the residual heat from potatoes to help you mash easily and reach to that creamy consistency.

Step 6 – Add the sour cream and season: Then continue mashing to your desired consistency. Season your mashed gold potatoes with a sprinkle of kosher salt and pepper to your desired taste.

Transfer it into a serving bowl and add more butter on top, if preferred. 

How To Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze Leftovers

Do you have a lot to do for an upcoming brunch or a holiday dinner and would like to make ahead Yukon gold mashed potatoes to save time on the big day? Here are the instructions to do so: 

  • Make Ahead: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance for optimal freshness. Simply make a batch, bring to room temperature, and store in an airtight container in the fridge.
  • Storage Instructions: To store, let the golden mashed potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe baking dish (for easy reheating) or airtight container, cover them with stretch film, and place them in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
  • Freezing & Thawing Instructions: I don’t recommend that you freeze any leftovers, as freezing fundamentally changes the consistency and flavor. If you have leftovers, I recommend that you refrigerate them and then form them into potato “pancakes” to fry in the skillet for a creative brunch the following day. 
  • Reheating: You can reheat your yellow mashed potatoes in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes (or until warmed thoroughly), making sure to stir them a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
Mashed Yukon gold potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes Recipe

These Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes are easy to make, unbelievably creamy and fluffy, and ready in 30 minutes. A timeless American side dish, whipped Yukon gold potatoes literally go with anything, making them an all-around crowd-pleaser for all year round.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds Yukon gold potatoes peeled* and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 tablespoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¾ cup whole milk or half and half or heavy cream
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup sour cream or Greek yogurt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper or white pepper
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs such as chives or parsley chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Fill a large pan with cold water and add the cubed potatoes, making sure the potatoes are fully submerged. Stir in 1 tablespoon kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender, 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, they are ready to go. Drain the potatoes and return them to the pot.
  • While the potatoes are cooking, place milk, garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed—there is no need to bring it to a boil.
  • Add the warmed milk mixture into the pan containing the now drained potatoes and lightly mash* to combine.
  • Add the sour cream and mash all of it to your desired consistency.
  • Season with salt and pepper to your desired taste.
  • Transfer into a serving bowl, sprinkle with fresh herbs and add more butter on top, if preferred. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 1/2 to 3 cups of mashed potatoes, ideal for serving six as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can double the recipe.
  • Should I peel the potatoes? When it comes to peeling, Yukon Gold mashed potatoes offer flexibility. Unlike Russet potatoes, golden potatoes can be used with or without their skin. For the creamiest texture, peel the potatoes before mashing. If you prefer a more rustic flavor or are using baby potatoes, leaving the skin on works perfectly, too. Just note that it will add a slightly earthier texture and taste.
  • Tools: I recommend using a hand masher for mashing potatoes, but a food mill or potato ricer can also be used. I do not recommend using a food processor or blender for mashing as you’ll end up with a gooey texture.
  • Make ahead, storage and reheating: This recipe can be made a day ahead. To store, let it cool down, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 10 minutes or until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 1188mg | Potassium: 705mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 464IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQs

How long do you boil Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

If you boil cubed potatoes, it should take about 15-20 minutes for them to cook. If you would rather boil the gold potatoes whole, then expect them to take around 25-30 minutes to reach doneness.

Do you peel Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

Whether or not you go for skin-on Yukon gold mashed potatoes is a personal preference. Choosing not to peel your potatoes will give them an earthier vibe, in both consistency and appearance. Peeling simply makes for a smoother end product, creamy in both color and texture.

How to season mashed potatoes?

If you’re looking to elevate this recipe, then selecting the right mashed potato seasoning beyond the basic salt, pepper, and butter will do the trick. Some ideas include: Fresh herbs such as rosemary and sage; dried herbs like nutmeg; Dijon mustard for some tanginess; truffle oil or olive oil for a more gourmet feel; or even cheese (Parmesan, cheddar, or cream cheese) to bring out the richness of the potatoes.

Why are my mashed potatoes gummy & how to fix it?

If you have ended up with mashed potatoes that are gluey or gummy in texture, it simply means that the starch has gotten overworked or your ingredients were too cold. I recommend that you try folding in a little warm milk, cream, or melted butter to loosen them.

What can I do with leftover mashed potatoes?

You can use them to top a shepherd’s pie, stir them into soups to make them creamier, or even freeze them for later. For a quick meal, reheat them and serve with roasted vegetables or a fried egg on top.

Expert Tips for Mashed Golden Potatoes

This recipe is intentionally uncomplicated and will be accessible for any home cook. Here are a few additional tips to ensure this Yukon gold mashed potatoes recipe comes out perfectly for you, every time you make it:

  • Check the doneness of your potatoes before draining them: You want to make sure that they are cooked throughout and not still hard at their center. When you think they may be done, insert a sharp knife in their center. If it slides in easily, they are done and ready to be drained from the boiling water.
  • Make sure you have the best tools for mashing: How much you mash your yellow potatoes depends on the consistency you prefer. You don’t want to use a food processor or a blender, as that will result in overworking the starch, which leads to gummy mashed potatoes. My favorite tool is a potato masher, but a food mill or a potato ricer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture.
  • Warm your milk and butter mixture before adding them: We aren’t cooking these ingredients, but rather warming them. This step is essential because using cold milk and butter can lead to a gummy texture. Warming the mixture will give you creamy, smooth Yukon gold potato puree.
  • Drain well: No one wants watery mashed potatoes, and usually, the leftover excess water from boiling is the reason why this happens. Therefore, it is imperative to drain them well. I also let the potatoes sit in the hot pot for a minute after draining to let the remaining water evaporate.

What To Serve the Best Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes With?

This recipe is so adaptable—it tastes great with just about everything! In fact, it is among my top Thanksgiving veggie sides, year after year. Here are a couple of ideas to assist you as you plan your upcoming meals, whether it’s for the holidays, a weeknight dinner, or some other special feast:

  • Meat: Is there any comfort food combo more well-known than meat and potatoes? If you’d like to complement your next meat main with this easy potato recipe, I recommend you check out my Pot Roast recipe, my Reverse Sear Prime Rib, or my Filet Mignon
  • Turkey: No Thanksgiving meal is complete without turkey and mashed potatoes, right? If you’re cooking for the big holiday, this recipe will be divine with my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, if you’re looking for a weeknight dinner throughout the rest of the year, I recommend that you pair it with my Turkey Meatloaf recipe
  • Chicken: Serve it with my Marry Me Chicken or Chicken Fricassee for an easy yet simple weeknight dinner.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

Over the years of writing this blog, I have shared many potato dishes, from holiday-worthy potato recipes to easy weeknight mashed potatoes, so if you love potatoes as much as I do below are a few others I hand-picked for you:

  • If you want something still as creamy but with a herby touch, my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a bit more elevated, while just as fluffy and creamy.
  • My Muffin Tin Potatoes turn simple ingredients like Russet potatoes, garlic, and Parmesan into mini potato stacks that bake up golden and crisp on the edges. 
  • If you love crispy and golden potatoes, try my Smashed Fingerling Potatoes. They have the crunchiest exterior and buttery, melt-in-your-mouth center. 
  • And if you are a fan of the classics, my Red Skin Potato Salad is creamy, tangy, and full of bacon bits, dill, and pickles. A go-to side for summer BBQs and picnics.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/feed/ 2
45+ Thanksgiving Vegetable Sides https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/ https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/#comments Thu, 14 Nov 2024 02:57:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15416 Consider this your hub for vegetable ideas for Thanksgiving dinner. Whether you need fancy vegetable dishes worthy of your elegant…]]>

Consider this your hub for vegetable ideas for Thanksgiving dinner. Whether you need fancy vegetable dishes worthy of your elegant holiday table, or if easy, make-ahead recipes for a low-key Friendsgiving are more your speed, you can find it all here.

Grab a mug of tea and let’s map out your Thanksgiving day menu together. And rest assured—every recipe below is foolproof, big on flavor, and the perfect addition to complement the “gobble-gobble” star of the show. Without further ado, we present to you our best Thanksgiving vegetable recipes:

A collage of images showing side vegetables for Thanksgiving dinner.

If you adore a classic holiday table, then the recipes in this section will be your go-to vegetable sides for your Thanksgiving menu. These holiday veggie side dishes are our most popular for a reason: they’re timeless crowd-pleasers that everyone asks for, year after year.

Sweet potato casserole and green bean casserole side by side.
  • Green Bean Casserole: You cannot serve vegetable casseroles for Thanksgiving dinner without including this signature green bean side dish. Our recipe foregoes the canned condensed soup and gives you a new, made-from-scratch way to add that umami flavor. This is also one of those vegetable side dishes that you can make ahead to better streamline your Thanksgiving day cooking schedule. 
  • Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Souffle: Also known as a sweet potato casserole, this Southern-style sweet potato souffle is one of our best Thanksgiving veggie recipes. The pecan topping is far superior to the more traditional marshmallow topping. This elevated Thanksgiving side will have everyone going back for seconds. 
  • Roasted Butternut Squash: Nothing smells like fall more than the scent of butternut squash roasting in the oven. Butternut squash pairs well alongside with any turkey recipe, but my favorite one is our roasted turkey tenderloin recipe, especially if I am serving a smaller crowd.
  • Roasted Delicata Squash Rings: Easy to prepare yet elegant in appearance, the delicate skin on this squash allows you to roast it whole, without removing the skin. The mild, nutty flavor can be enhanced on the plate with a drizzle of the sweet & sour “agrodolce” sauce you’ll find in this holiday vegetable recipe.
Two vegetarian sides for Thanksgiving in a collage.
  • Make Ahead Roasted Carrots: Colorful carrots caramelized with maple syrup to perfection; these are one of those side vegetables that bring both a sweet and savory flavor combo. This simple carrot recipe tastes anything but. And, as a bonus, it is easy to make ahead of Thanksgiving day.
  • Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash: This is one of those great vegetable sides that can also double as a main dish for any vegetarians/vegans at your holiday table. Stuffed with nutty quinoa, this hearty side dish packs in extra fall flavor with apples, cranberries, and pecans.
  • Baked Acorn Squash Slices: Acorn squash is another beautiful addition to your holiday feast. This recipe’s special touch? A maple syrup and cinnamon mixture that complements the nutty, buttery flavors of the squash. It’s a good vegetable dish for Thanksgiving that brings in natural sweetness to balance out the other more savory dishes.
Harvest salad and cranberry sauce side by side.
  • Maple Syrup Cranberry Sauce: You’re making your Turkey Gravy homemade, so there’s no reason you should be serving your cranberry sauce from a can either! This recipe couldn’t be easier to make ahead. It’s naturally sweetened, warmly spiced, healthy, and vegan. Trust us—once you go homemade, you’ll never go back.
  • Harvest Salad: A well-balanced holiday meal calls for some crunch and this fall-inspired salad truly delivers. Packed with colorful fruits and vegetables, its festive appearance and surprisingly complex flavor profile will have even the pickiest eaters making room for salad first. 
  • Wild Rice Pilaf: While most people tend to think of potatoes as their go-to carb-centric Thanksgiving side dish, wild rice pilaf is a refined alternative to pair with your more gourmet vegetable side dishes. This recipe is a welcome addition if you’re curating a special Thanksgiving menu geared towards foodies.
  • Garlic Roasted Cauliflower: If you’d like to add some easy vegetable dishes for Thanksgiving that are lower in carbs to your holiday menu, then cauliflower is your superstar. Parmesan cheese and fresh garlic give this veggie side a savory profile that could easily take the place of traditional mashed potatoes alongside your Herb Roasted Turkey main dish. 
  • Balsamic Brussels Sprouts: Crispy, yet tender, these Brussels sprouts are roasted with a maple balsamic glaze and look like one of the fancier veggie side dishes on your holiday table. Expert tip: Don’t skip the toppings for extra crunch and sweetness.
  • Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad: Colorful, tasty, and oh-so-delicious, this roasted butternut squash dish is one of the most popular holiday favorites on this website. Packed with hearty cooked quinoa and chopped cranberries and drizzled with homemade balsamic vinaigrette, it is a make-ahead recipe that is guaranteed to impress.

Green Vegetables for Thanksgiving Dinner

With all of the decadent holiday menu items you’ll be serving, adding some greens for Thanksgiving dinner is always a good idea. Here are a few good vegetable side dishes for you to incorporate that include green veggies:

Green side dishes for Thanksgiving dinner.
  • Butter Garlic Green Beans: If you’re skipping the green bean casserole this year and are looking for alternative Thanksgiving dinner vegetable recipes that include green beans, this side dish will delight your palate. Between the rich butter and the smoky garlic, you’ll be swooning over these tender green beans. 
  • Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms: Looking for Thanksgiving dinner vegetables that are a match made in heaven? Here is your crowd-pleasing duo. The flavors and consistency of asparagus and mushrooms pair perfectly together in this recipe and adapt well to everything else on your holiday plate.
  • Pan Sauteed Asparagus: These bright green asparagus spears add a pop of color to your plates and are easily prepared in under 10 minutes. They’re pan-seared in a little bit of butter, giving them a decadent yet plenty of flavor.
  • Baked Asparagus: When it comes to great vegetable recipes for Thanksgiving, you do not need to get complicated. This baked asparagus veggie side dish is simple and healthy. The fresh flavor is an excellent balance to the more indulgent items being served.

Potato Vegetable Sides for Thanksgiving

Let’s be real, Thanksgiving wouldn’t be Thanksgiving without the humble potato. Whether you like them mashed, smashed, or deviled, we have a recipe to meet your holiday menu planning needs. 

Pick one from the recipes below or check out my collection of Holiday Potato Side Dishes for more inspiration.

Mashed potatoes and potato roses side by side.
  • Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes: Mashed potatoes are a classic Thanksgiving veggie side, and this recipe will ensure yours are incredibly fluffy, butter-y, and melt in your mouth delicious. The addition of rosemary is the best part; you will be surprised by how much this aromatic herb elevates this side dish.
  • Bacon Potato Roses: Have guests at your holiday table that you would like to impress? This is the best Thanksgiving vegetable dish when presentation matters. These potato roses are wrapped in bacon and add a visually stunning boost to the big feast.
  • Smashed Fingerlings: Fingerling potatoes, but make them crispy. This is one of those holiday veggie dishes that you make for Thanksgiving, then continue to make for every subsequent holiday throughout the year. They are that good.
Deviled egg potato salad and muffin tin potatoes in a collage.
  • Muffin Tin Potatoes: Think of these as mini potato au gratin stacks. They’re a fun Thanksgiving dinner vegetable idea, particularly if you plan on individually plating your holiday meal for your guests. And the fresh thyme will fill your home with the cozy scent of autumn.
  • Deviled Egg Potato Salad: Deviled eggs? Yes. Potatoes? Yes. Together? YES. This salad is such a unique way to combine some of the most popular Thanksgiving side dishes into one unforgettable twist on classic potato salad. It’s also a great way to use leftover deviled eggs if you made far too many by (happy) accident.
  • Red Potato Salad: For those who like their salad less lettuce and more potato, we’ve got you covered. This classic potato salad includes crispy bacon bits, tender eggs, fresh dill, and briny pickles and gives you the cold holiday vegetable side dish you need to round out your Thanksgiving dinner.

Sweet Potato Side Dishes

Prefer sweet potatoes over traditional Yukon gold potatoes? Or perhaps you just like to offer a variety of potatoes to your holiday guests (we get it). Sweet potatoes are good vegetables for Thanksgiving—not only do they add color to the plate, but they also add a dimension of natural sweetness to all of the savory dishes being served. Here are a couple of our favorite sweet potato recipe to add to your turkey dinner:

Sweet potato side dishes from the top view.
  • Sweet Potato Mash: In a mashed potato competition, we think you’d have a hard time deciding between traditional mashed potatoes and this sweet potato version. This is a creamy, dreamy vegetable side dish that only requires 7 ingredients and can be cooked completely on the stovetop (no oven required!).
  • Roasted Sweet Potato Salad with a Mediterranean Twist: Tired of serving the same roasted sweet potato dish every Thanksgiving? This vibrant salad offers a fresh and festive alternative to the traditional holiday sides. One recipe that I make every year! 
    Cubes of sweet potato are roasted with savory chickpeas, tossed with creamy feta, crunchy candied walnuts, and a bright lemon dressing, proving that this beloved root vegetable can absolutely take on a new, delicious Mediterranean twist.
  • Garlic Butter Sweet Potato Stacks: These are very similar to our Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe above, individually portioned and crispy, though the sweet potatoes make for a sweet + savory flavor combo that’s hard to resist. They are a playful way to sneak in vegetables at Thanksgiving that everyone will want on their plates. 
  • Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts: These two are another dazzling duo of Thanksgiving vegetables. Savory spices like paprika and cumin bring out their natural flavors and hold their own alongside the star of the show—the turkey.

Vegetable Casseroles and Stuffing Recipes

Few things are more American than a classic casserole side dish. Ditto stuffing for Thanksgiving dinner. Here are a few vegetable ideas for this Thanksgiving that deliver their goodness in a baking dish:

Chestnut stuffing and wild rice stuffing side by side.
  • Chestnut Dressing: Did you know that while you can buy store-bought chestnuts, roasted chestnuts are an aromatic holiday treat when you make them at home? It may also come as a surprise to you that chestnuts are the base of a fabulous stuffing recipe, along with bread, onions, celery, fresh sage, and parsley. This is one of our favorite unique turkey day recipes that has the flexibility to be made vegetarian, if you prefer.
  • Wild Rice Turkey Stuffing: Looking for a gluten-free stuffing (or dressing) recipe? The wild rice blend and absence of bread make this stuffing gluten-free, plus it includes both fruits and vegetables for a holiday side dish that packs in all of the season’s signature flavors. 
  • Vegetarian Cornbread Dressing: If you love any opportunity to squeeze in more vegetables for Thanksgiving dinner, then you’ll love this veggie-packed, vegetarian-friendly version of Thanksgiving stuffing. This recipe isn’t made inside the turkey (but it can be, if preferred) and uses day-old jalapeno cheddar cornbread and green beans for a major pop of flavor.
Cauliflower au gratin and wild rice mushroom stuffing side by side.
  • Mushroom Stuffing: Brioche bread is the star of the show in this vegetable side dish and we will let you in on a little secret—baking your own brioche is easier than you think and truly takes this dish to another level. The crisp exterior and creamy custard filling of this vegetarian stuffing make it one of our most popular Thanksgiving recipes for a reason.
  • Cauliflower Gratin: This feels far more decadent than it is, considering the base of the recipe is cauliflower. It’s a win-win! It is also one of those easy Thanksgiving veggie dishes that can be made ahead, saving you precious time on turkey day.
  • Cheesy Broccoli Casserole: When it comes to good vegetable sides for Thanksgiving, our list wouldn’t be complete without some form of broccoli with cheese. The crispy fried onions on top are the real showstopper of this classic casserole side dish. 

Salad Recipes as Side Dishes

Our best Thanksgiving veggie side dishes wouldn’t be complete without a section of fall salad recipes. While some people debate that there’s no room for salads with such a huge Thanksgiving dinner on the horizon, we believe the opposite is true. 

Not only are these salads a fresh start to a heavy meal, they are also wildly complex in flavor and delicious in their own right. These are holiday side dishes that satisfy just as much as the rest on this list.

Two salad side dishes side by side.
  • Roasted Pear Salad: The radiant homemade lemon vinaigrette in this recipe takes the warm maple roasted pears up a notch for a salad that feels wonderfully fresh and not too filling as a starter. Combining fruits and vegetables for Thanksgiving is one of our secrets for a balanced holiday flavor profile. 
  • Acorn Squash Salad: This salad is the epitome of fall, combining roasted acorn squash with arugula, pepitas, and cranberries. The salad is then topped off with creamy goat cheese and pomegranate seeds, for a balance of textures and a beautifully colorful presentation.
  • Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad: You can also think of this salad as a type of slaw. The shredded consistency of the shaved Brussels sprouts pairs well with the apples, hazelnuts, dried cranberries, and goat cheese. It’s all dressed beautifully with a lemony vinaigrette whose balancing tang comes from shallots. 
  • Apple Salad with Raisins: Don’t let the simplicity of this apple salad fool you. Between the apples, raisins, red onion, and yogurt dressing, the complexity of this dish will make your taste buds perk up. It’s crisp and refreshing—the ideal light bite before a big Thanksgiving meal. 
Roasted Beet salad and kale brussel sprout salad side by side.
  • Beet Salad with Goat Cheese: If you love to incorporate colorful vegetable side dishes onto your holiday table, then the bright beets in this fall salad will ensure your Thanksgiving meal is utterly Instagramable. Sweet beets, earthy greens, and crunchy walnuts make for a salad worthy of seconds.
  • Kale Salad with Avocado: This salad will turn any kale-hater into a kale lover. Once you learn how to ensure your greens are tender (thanks to gently massaging kale) and pair them with a ripe avocado and pine nuts, you’re in for an absolute veggie side dish holiday delight. 
  • Caesar Salad: Everyone loves a classic Caesar salad. If you need a crowd-pleaser of a Thanksgiving vegetable side dish, then this salad is your fail-safe. Our homemade traditional Caesar salad dressing and garlic croutons keep it simple and satisfying.
  • Brussels Sprout and Kale Salad: Leave it to kale to bring the crunch to your Thanksgiving dinner table. In this light + bright veggie side dish, crunchy almonds, tangy Dijon mustard dressing, and rich Parmesan cheese make the salad shine. 

Air Fryer Veggies for Thanksgiving

This Thanksgiving day hero—the versatile air fryer—may very well be deserving of a holiday medal. Not only does using the air fryer save you precious oven space, it also makes a bunch of great Thanksgiving vegetable side dishes a little bit healthier in the process.

Air fried potatoes and butternut squash in a collage.
  • Fingerling Potatoes in Air Fryer: Our fingerling potatoes are seasoned to perfection and come out of the air fryer with crisp exteriors and soft, pillowy insides in less than 20 minutes. If you don’t plan on serving them as a vegetable side dish for the main Thanksgiving meal, their finger-food quality also makes them a perfect appetizer. 
  • Air Fried Butternut Squash: Thanksgiving dinner vegetable recipes always include this seasonal squash, but roasting it in the air fryer makes it just as tasty as in the oven, but in half the cooking time. 
  • Red Potatoes in Air Fryer: For those who aren’t a fan of mashed potatoes, these roasted red potatoes make for an excellent alternative (and taste delicious with a little Turkey Gravy (or even beef gravy) on the side, too!). And because they are air-fried rather than traditionally fried, you can add these to your list of healthy vegetable dishes—score!
  • Asparagus in Air Fryer: Who knew that asparagus could come out so tender, yet crispy, in the air fryer? Air-frying asparagus is a revelation—one your guests won’t be able to stop talking about. This is a great way to get in your holiday veggies without feeling like you’re being punished. Flavorful and fresh, you may not want to cook asparagus any other way after trying this. 
Air fried asparagus and air fryer beets from the top view.
  • Air Fryer Green Beans: If you’ve only got 15 minutes to devote to your green beans, then this is one of the top veggie side dishes you need to add to your holiday menu. Follow our foolproof method to air fry fresh green beans and get a flavor-packed side that everyone will love.
  • Air Fryer Beets: This is the ultimate way to serve beets. Not only is it far quicker to roast them in the air fryer, the end result is sophisticated and rich. Beyond the taste, they look lovely on your holiday table.
  • Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves: If you need roasted butternut squash for use in another vegetable dish such as Butternut Squash Soup, then using an air fryer is a no-fuss, time-saving way to get tender, caramelized, and flavorful squash.

You Might Also Like

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/feed/ 16
Herb Roasted Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:49:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78821 Ingredients Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey,…]]>
Aysegul

Growing up in Turkiye, the idea of roasting a massive turkey for Thanksgiving wasn’t part of our holiday traditions. I only learned the art of turkey-roasting much later, after moving to the U.S. over two decades ago. After countless holiday dinners and plenty of trial and error, I can confidently say I’ve mastered a truly foolproof method.

This Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is now my absolute go-to. I wrote the recipe so that even if you didn’t grow up cooking or eating turkey, you’ll end up with a perfectly roasted, juicy bird every time.

It follows a classic roasting technique but is elevated by a personal touch: a potent, homemade turkey rub that completely infuses the meat with incredible flavor.

And because the meal isn’t complete without the final essential ingredient, I’ve also included my rich, foolproof gravy recipe. Because let’s face it, what’s roasted turkey without a rich, delicious gravy on the side?

Roasted turkey with herbs and fruit around it from the top view.

Ingredients

Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey, whether using fresh or dried. Here’s what you’ll need:

The ingredients for the recipe including the best herbs for turkey from the top view with text on the image.
  • Whole Turkey: Most grocery stores sell frozen turkeys throughout the year. As we were testing this recipe, we used a 12-pound bird, but as long as it is somewhere between 12-16 pounds, you would be fine. The most important thing is to make sure that it is fully thawed before the seasoning and roasting process.
  • Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the salt, taking a little inspiration from our Turkey Compound Butter and Turkey Injection Recipe, but salted butter can be used. With that said, ½ cup olive oil can be substituted.
  • Sugar: A small amount of brown sugar (or coconut sugar for a refined sugar-free alternative) helps with browning and caramelization of the skin.
  • Herbs for turkey: For a classic and aromatic flavor, we recommend using a blend of rosemary, thyme, and sage, which we think are the best fresh herbs for turkey. These herbs infuse your bird with a fragrant, savory taste, perfect for the holidays. You can use fresh or dried herbs. If you are using fresh herbs, be sure to chop them finely. For dried herbs, substitute 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh. And if you want a done-for-you dried herbs blend, use our Turkey Seasoning Rub.
  • Other seasonings and spices: Besides the herb blend, we added more flavor with paprika (sweet or smoked), garlic powder, onion powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. We found garlic powder blends better with the butter, but freshly minced garlic cloves can be used instead.
  • Vegetables: Our aromatics include a classic mirepoix (onions, carrots, celery) that adds flavor to the turkey and the pan juices.
  • Lemon: A whole lemon is used to flavor the turkey itself. Adhering the lemon half to the turkey skin is a technique we learned to keep the turkey skin in place during roasting. Just like we did in our roasted turkey breasts recipe, using a half lemon in the neck of the bird will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
  • Stock: Use Turkey Stock or Chicken Stock, whichever you have on hand.

How to Make Herb-Roasted Turkey

Now, the fun begins! This recipe for herb roasted turkey is all about using fresh ingredients and the right technique to build delicious layers of flavor in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey for roasting.
  1. Prep turkey: Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour beforehand. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper (for easy cleanup and to prevent cross-contamination). Pat turkey dry with paper towels on all sides.
  2. Preheat oven: Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position. Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C).
  3. Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, combine the softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme leaves, fresh sage leaves, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of Kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper.
  4. Season turkey with herbs: Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining Kosher salt and black pepper.
  5. Loosen the skin: Gently separate the top skin from the meat with your fingers. It is best to take your time as you are doing this while being careful not to tear the skin.
A person seasoning the skin of turkey with fresh herbed butter mixture.
  1. Add butter under skin: Evenly spread 2 tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
  2. Spread butter over the skin: Distribute the remaining herb butter evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
  3. Add vegetables: Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
Herb butter turkey neck filled with half lemon.
  1. Finish with lemon: Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird, round-cut, and side up. Pull the skin over and secure it with a toothpick.
  2. Prepare a large roasting pan: Add the remaining vegetables and pour one cup of stock into the bottom of the roasting pan.
A collage of photos showing the steps for preparing herb roasted turkey.
  1. Add turkey to V rack: Transfer the turkey to a V-rack fitted inside the roasting pan (please read notes for what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
  2. Position wings and drumsticks: Tuck wing tips under and tie the legs with butcher twine.
  3. Add temperature probe: Insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast without touching the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
A collage of images showing how to roast Thanksgiving herbed turkey in the oven.
  1. Set temperature: Set the temperature to 155 degrees F (68 C) (more on this below).
  2. Roast turkey: Place the turkey in the oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then, reduce the oven temperature to 325 degrees F (163 C). Roast for 2 – 2 ½ hours, or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
  3. Baste turkey: Place the remaining two cups of stock in a small saucepan over low heat to keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes with a baster or large spoon.
  4. Tent with foil (if needed): If the turkey seems like it’s getting too brown during cooking, cover it with aluminum foil.
  5. Rest the turkey: When the turkey reaches temperature, remove it from the oven and tent it with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
  6. Prepare gravy: While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor! If you want a good recipe, follow our Turkey Gravy from Drippings.
  7. Serve: Garnish with colorful fruits (optional) or carve and serve to wow all your guests at the table!
A woman serving roasted herb turkey in a roasting pan from the front view.

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

We all love Thanksgiving turkey leftovers and we don’t want all our efforts going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

  • Storage: Bring the leftovers of your herb rubbed turkey to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the leftover turkey slices in a skillet over medium-low heat and splash in some chicken or turkey broth. Cover and gently simmer until warm, about 5-8 minutes. Alternatively, place them in a casserole dish along with a splash of broth and reheat them in a preheated low heat oven (300 degrees F) until warmed thoroughly.

Serving Suggestions

Need some menu inspiration to serve this perfectly roasted herbed turkey? You can pick from my collection of Thanksgiving Vegetable Sides or Holiday Potato Side Dishes or try one of the recipes I hand-picked below:

More Roasted Turkey Recipes

While the full roasted turkey is perfect for a big holiday feast, sometimes you’re hosting a smaller crowd or simply don’t want a ton of leftovers. The good news is, you don’t have to skip the turkey!

  • My Baked Turkey Wings recipe requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. Cooking the wings low and slow in the oven makes all the difference, resulting in tender, fall-off-the-bone meat-perfect for a smaller gathering.
  • The Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy is the perfect choice when you want holiday flavor without the hassle of carving a whole bird. It cooks quickly, stays incredibly juicy, and ensures maximum meat with minimum fuss. We include a quick pan gravy made with the drippings to complete the meal.
  • The Turkey Tenderloin recipe is much faster to cook, uses a simple marinade to lock in moisture, and is your perfect starting point if you’ve never cooked turkey before.
  • My Roasted Turkey Drumsticks recipe delivers tender, dark meat with crispy skin. And let’s face it, it is the best part of the whole bird.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Herb crusted turkey roast garnished with fruit and placed on a table.
Print

Herb Roasted Turkey Recipe

Seasoned with the best herbs for turkey, this Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is simple yet flavorful. Follow our step by step instructions for the best Thanksgiving turkey recipe anyone can make.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Resting time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 620kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Whole Turkey 12-16 pounds – fully thawed if frozen
  • 4 ounces unsalted butter at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar or coconut sugar
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped plus two sprigs for cavity
  • 1 tablespoon fresh sage chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
  • 2 teaspoons fresh rosemary chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt divided
  • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper divided
  • 2 stalks celery roughly chopped
  • 2 carrots roughly chopped
  • 1 onion roughly chopped
  • 1 lemon cut in half
  • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey stock, more as needed – divided

Instructions

  • Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour before roasting. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and use a few sheets of paper towels to dry it as much as possible.
  • Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat your oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C). Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position.
  • To make the butter herb mixture, place softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme, fresh sage, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper in a bowl. Mix well to combine. Set it aside.
  • Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining one tablespoon of kosher salt and one teaspoon of ground black pepper.
  • Using your fingers, gently separate the breast meat from the skin, being careful not to tear the skin. Do not rush this process.
  • Using your fingers, evenly spread two tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
  • Distribute the remaining butter herb mixture evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
  • Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
  • Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird round cut side up, pull skin over, and secure with a toothpick. This will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
  • Add the veggies and one cup of the stock at the bottom of the roasting pack.
  • Transfer the turkey (breast side up) to a V-rack fitted in a roasting pan (please read notes as to what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
  • Tuck the wings under and tie the drumsticks with kitchen twine.
  • If you have a temperature probe for continuous monitoring, insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast, making sure that it does not touch the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
  • Set the probe temperature to 155 degrees F. (68 C).
  • Place the turkey in the preheated oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then reduce the heat to 325 degrees F (163 C) and roast for 2 to 2 ½ hours or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
  • While the turkey is roasting, place the remaining two cups of chicken (or turkey) stock in a small saucepan over low heat and keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes.
  • If the turkey seems like it’s getting overly browned during the cooking process, cover it with aluminum foil.
  • Once the internal temperature is achieved, remove from the oven and tent with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
  • While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor!
  • Carve and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: When serving turkey the general rule of thumb is to serve 1 1/2 pounds per person. Our turkey was just over 12 lbs which serves comfortably for 8 servings. However, this recipe would work for a turkey that is up to 16 pounds. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Remove from fridge: It’s important to remove the fully-thawed turkey from the refrigerator at least 1 hour before roasting. This not only helps to prevent overcooking the turkey, but it makes the butter much easier to spread.
  • Check doneness: Nowadays most turkeys come inserted with a pop up timer, which pops when it reaches a preset temperature. If you do not have thermometer you can rely on that, but a better way measure doneness is a Probe Thermometer (affiliate link). We think that it works best because it takes the guesswork out of knowing when the turkey reaches the optimal temperature. With that said, you can use an instant read thermometer (affiliate link). If you do so, do not stick the breast multiple times. Instead, follow the timing listed on the recipe and check once or twice measuring both the breast and thigh. Also, as you are measuring, avoid touching a bone.
  • Leave the pop up timer in: Even if you have a thermometer, leave the pop up timer in and remove it after the roasting process is complete.
  • Roasting vessel: A Roasting Rack (affiliate link) elevates the turkey, allowing hot air in the oven to circulate. If you don’t have a rack, you can lay the turkey on top of the vegetables, which helps lift them a bit for the air to circulate throughout the bird. It also helps infuse flavor into the vegetables and makes an excellent base for gravy.
  • Basting: Basting is a wonderful method to prevent the herb-crusted turkey roast from drying out. Do so every 30 – 45 minutes with a turkey baster or large spoon.
  • Roasting temperature: If you have ever roasted turkey, you know that it can go from perfectly moist to terribly dry very quickly. While the FDA recommends roasting turkey to 165 degrees F, we intentionally take it out when it reach 155 degrees F. because the roasting process continues even after you take your bird out of the oven. During our testing, we found that it should reach to the safe temperature (165 F.) within 20-30 minutes of resting while proving a super moist and juicy turkey.
  • Garnish for presentation: Although optional, feel free to get creative and impress your guests with a beautiful presentation. We finished the turkey with an assortment of in-season produce, like pomegranate, blood orange, black grapes, and plenty of those flavorful fresh herbs for roasted turkey.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (330 F.) with a splash of chicken stock.

Nutrition

Calories: 620kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 73g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 265mg | Sodium: 2256mg | Potassium: 982mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3609IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/feed/ 4
Turkey Gravy with Drippings https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78843 Ingredients All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need…]]>
Homemade turkey gravy in a gravy boat with a spoon.

Ingredients

All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need to make turkey gravy out of drippings:

Ingredients for quick turkey gravy from the top view with text on the photo.
  • Juices leftover (aka liquid gold): Use the drippings from the pan after roasting your turkey. Since we used aromatics in our herb-roasted turkey, these drippings are super flavorful. However, you can use the drippings from any turkey recipe by following this recipe.
  • Chicken or turkey stock: I recommend Homemade Chicken Stock (or store bought) instead of turkey stock since it is lighter and provides a cleaner flavor. However, both options would work.
  • Unsalted butter: I prefer to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt in the gravy. However, you can use salted butter as well. Just be sure to taste it and salt it (if needed) after the gravy is thickened.
  • All-purpose flour: All-purpose flour is the thickening agent. If you want a gluten-free gravy, use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend.
  • Turkey Gravy Seasoning: The best way to season turkey gravy is with fresh herbs, including fresh thyme and parsley. You can add additional herbs like fresh rosemary or fresh sage as well. If you prefer dried spices, use 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs.

How to Make Turkey Gravy From Drippings?

This gravy with turkey drippings recipe comes together in a few steps. I assure you, you’ll have a flavorful, smooth gravy that enhances your turkey and adds a delicious touch to everything on your Thanksgiving plate. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make turkey gravy from drippings.
  1. Remove the veggies:  While the turkey rests, remove the large pieces of vegetables (onions, celery, carrots) in the roasting pan with a slotted spoon.
  2. Strain the juices: Strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or through a fine mesh strainer into a glass measuring cup. 
  3. Remove the fat: Using a spoon, remove the top fat layer as much as possible.  You should end up with about 1 to 2 cups of liquid. Add chicken stock to ensure you have 3 cups of liquid.
A collage of images showing how to make gravy from turkey juice.
  1. Make the roux: Set the now empty roasting pan over medium heat. Melt the butter, then add the flour, mixing with a wooden spoon until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
  2. Add the turkey drippings: Slowly pour the separated juices into the flour mixture while constantly whisking. Bring to a boil and continue whisking constantly until thick, about 7-10 minutes. If needed, add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
  3. Add seasonings: Sprinkle in thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. If you have one, place it in a gravy boat and serve with turkey on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

Turkey pan gravy is one of those Thanksgiving must-haves you will want the day of, as well as to enjoy all your leftovers. Since we don’t want any of this delicious brown turkey gravy going to waste, here are my best storage, freezing, and reheating instructions:

  • Storage: Cool the gravy to room temperature. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Make sure the gravy is at room temperature. Transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan over medium heat, stirring regularly. Or, microwave in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between. Please note that when you reheat, it will start as a congealed texture. For lack of a better term, it will be a blub. But as it heats, the gravy will return to its original consistency. 

FAQs

How to make thick gravy?

Cook the gravy longer to evaporate excess water. You can thicken the sauce with a cornstarch slurry (by mixing an equal amount of cornstarch with an equal amount of liquid) if it’s not thickening.

Can you make turkey gravy without drippings?

Yes, you can. Start with a good chicken broth bouillon, but start with a small amount, as it can be salty. Add fresh herbs and use butter to make it silky smooth. Let it simmer to thicken.

What to Serve with Turkey Gravy?

If you are making this Thanksgiving gravy recipe with drippings for the holidays, here are my favorite serving suggestions:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Easy Homemade Turkey Gravy with Drippings recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Turkey gravy made with pan drippings in a gravy boat.
Print

Turkey Gravy with Pan Drippings Recipe

Learn how to make rich, creamy Turkey Gravy with drippings! This easy homemade recipe is the perfect finishing touch to complement your Thanksgiving turkey.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 3 cups
Calories 261kcal

Ingredients

  • Juices leftover from the roasting pan
  • Chicken or turkey stock as needed to yield 3 cups gravy
  • ¼ cup unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons fresh thyme chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped
  • Kosher salt to taste
  • Ground black pepper to taste

Instructions

  • Using a slotted spoon, remove the large pieces of cooked vegetables and strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or glass measuring cup.
  • Let it sit for 10 minutes for the fat to separate*. Remove as much fat on top as you can with a spoon.
  • You will likely end up with 1 to 2 cups of drippings. Use chicken stock to bring it to 3 cups. Set it aside.
  • Melt the butter in the now-empty roasting pan over medium heat. Add the flour and whisk constantly until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
  • Gradually pour the liquid into the roasting pan and boil while constantly whisking until thick, about 7-10 minutes. Add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
  • Stir in the thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • Serve with turkey on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 ½ to 3 cups of gravy, ideal for eight servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and approximate based on the amount of drippings.
  • Removing the fat on top: A fat separator will provide the best results. However, if you do not have a fat separator, strain the drippings into a glass measuring cup, then place it in the fridge for 10 minutes. The fat will slowly rise to the top. At this point, you can use a turkey baster to suck the fat off or slowly skim the fat off with a spoon. This step is crucial to prevent your gravy from separating.
  • Be sure to brown the flour: It’s important to cook the flour to diminish the raw flour taste. The flour is ready when it is golden brown and smells like popcorn.
  • Constantly whisk to avoid lumps: Whisking constantly when adding the liquid is key to a smooth gravy. If lumps do form, no worries. Strain it through a fine mesh strainer or use an immersion blender to make it silky.
  • Cooking pan matters: The cooking time will vary depending on the pan. If you use the same roasting pan you used to cook the turkey, the gravy will thicken faster since the water evaporates faster. If you use a saucepan, it will take longer. Bring the mixture to a gentle simmer, stirring often, until it thickens to your desired consistency.
  • Adjust for consistency: Cooking the gravy longer will reduce and thicken it. Remember gravy thickens as it cools, so make it a little thinner than you think if it will be sitting for a while. If you went too far and the turkey sauce is too thick, add more stock to thin it to your desired consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 261kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 343mg | Potassium: 281mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 656IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/feed/ 2
Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/#comments Mon, 28 Oct 2024 16:10:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78662 Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got…]]>

Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got me wondering: Can you put cottage cheese in mac and cheese? Great news: Not only can you add protein to mac and cheese with cottage cheese, the actual cottage cheese cheese sauce comes together quickly in a blender and is ready in less than 30 minutes.

While the main instructions you’ll find below are for a stovetop version of this recipe, this cottage cheese macaroni and cheese can also be prepped ahead of time to be baked later in a casserole dish if you’d like to add it to your holiday menu. Not to worry—the baked version of this recipe is also included below.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This homemade mac and cheese with cottage cheese has an impressive depth of flavor for a dish with just a few simple ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Pasta: For our version of macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, we selected the fun & familiar macaroni noodle that we all grew up eating. However, all pasta shapes are welcome as long as they’ll hold the sauce. And, if you have specific dietary needs/preferences, feel free to substitute gluten-free pasta (GF), chickpea pasta, or whole wheat pasta—they all adapt well to this recipe.
  • Cottage cheese: When adding cottage cheese to mac and cheese, I recommend that you go with the full 4% milkfat version. You can use a lower-fat version, but if you are like us and prefer a creamier dish, go for the 4% version.
  • Milk: The same goes here with the milk—I recommend choosing full fat regular milk for a luscious finished pasta. However, an equal amount of alternative dairy-free milk, like almond milk, can also be used.
  • Cheddar cheese: We used sharp cheddar cheese when testing this recipe. If you’d prefer a milder cheese flavor for your cottage mac and cheese, feel free to swap in gouda cheese in its place. 
  • Parmesan cheese: Take it from me—shredded parmesan cheese is essential to this cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe. Without it, the mac and cheese sauce with cottage cheese tasted a bit bland. The parmesan gives it the umami punch that will keep everyone reaching for second helpings.
  • Cornstarch: This helps to thicken your cottage cheese sauce. If you prefer arrowroot powder, you can swap that in instead.
  • Garlic: Garlic powder blends into the sauce evenly, which is what we used in our recipe trials. If you prefer the more intense flavor of fresh or roasted garlic, just be sure to mince or press it well before adding it to your blender. While it is not traditional, ½ teaspoon of onion powder can also be added if preferred.
  • Spices: Our cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe gets its traditional flavor with these three classic mac and cheese spices—paprika, nutmeg, and a touch of cayenne pepper. 
  • Veggies (optional): If you’d like to elevate your cottage cheese mac and cheese, feel free to mix in some cooked vegetables once the dish is complete, such as steamed broccoli, peas, or a handful of fresh baby spinach leaves.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese?

This mac and cheese recipe with cottage cheese comes together in three simple steps: First, you cook the pasta. Then, you make your high-protein cheese sauce with cottage cheese. Finally, you mix the two components together. And, voilà! It’s just that easy in under 30 minutes. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Steps showing how to cook pasta and make the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce in a blender.
  1. Cook the pasta: Fill a medium saucepan with water and season generously with salt. Bring it to a boil and add the pasta to the boiling water. Cook until your noodles are al dente, following the timing on the package’s directions.
  2. Drain the water: First, reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta into a strainer and set aside. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  3. Blend your cheese mixture: Next, blend cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a high-speed blender or a food processor until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
A collage of images showing how to cook mac n cheese with cottage cheese sauce.
  1. Cook your cottage cheese cheese sauce: Pour the blended sauce into the pot over medium-low heat. Using a wooden spoon, stir your sauce until it is slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½  minutes. You will know that it’s ready when it coats the back of a spoon. Taste for seasoning, adding more flavor if you desire it. 
  2. Combine your pasta and sauce: Add the drained pasta back into the pot with the cottage cheese cheese sauce and stir to combine. Cook until the pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture. Serve while still warm.

How to Bake it?

If you’re looking for a baked mac and cheese with cottage cheese recipe, then look no further. The baked version is a crowd-pleasing side dish for Thanksgiving, Christmas, or really any holiday potluck that you’re invited to. It can easily be adjusted as a baked version, and I’m going to show you how:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C. 
  2. Prepare your baking dish: Brush an 8X8 baking dish with 1 TBSP of butter.
A collage of images showing how to make baked mac and cheese cottage cheese.
  1. Pour in your cooked cottage cheese mac n cheese: Put the cooked pasta and sauce mixture into the buttered 8×8 baking dish. Add an extra 3 tablespoons of pasta water into the mix.
  2. Top your pasta: Sprinkle the top of the cottage cheese macaroni with an additional ½ cup of parmesan cheese first, then ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs (or regular bread crumbs).
  3. Bake: Put the baking dish in the oven for 15 minutes, or until the breadcrumbs have toasted. 
  4. Brown the top, if preferred: If you’d like the top of your baked pasta to have a crunchier texture, switch the oven to broil and leave in the oven for an additional two minutes.
Mac n cheese with cottage cheese in the pot being stirred by a person from the top view.

How To Make Ahead and Store and Reheat Leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: If you’re looking to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version that you see above. Just pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, allow it to cool to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking. 
  • Storage: If you made the stovetop version of this mac & cheese recipe with cottage cheese, you can store any leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: To reheat macaroni and cottage cheese leftovers, place the pasta in a saucepan and warm it on low heat on the stovetop. If the sauce is too thick, you may have to add some water to get it back to its creamy texture.

What to Serve This Recipe?

Our mac n cheese recipe with cottage cheese is adaptable and satisfying as either a side dish or vegetarian main dish: 

Expert Tips

Thankfully, the process of making this high protein cottage cheese macaroni and cheese recipe is a straightforward one without much room for error. However, there are a few things that I’d like to mention for the best results:

  • Don’t leave the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce unattended while it’s cooking: The sauce comes together quickly—truly, within minutes. Once your pasta is cooked and you start to warm your sauce, it will thicken and be ready for the macaroni to be stirred in shortly.
  • Use full-fat dairy products: For the ultimate creamy, dreamy, high-protein mac n cheese, you’ll need to use full-fat regular milk and 4% cottage cheese. Trust me on this one. Skim just doesn’t cut it in this recipe. 
  • Cooking the cottage cheese cheese sauce in the saucepan before adding the pasta is very important: Because the cottage cheese mixture contains cornstarch as a thickening agent, it needs a few minutes to cook so that it blends in, thickens, and becomes “invisible,” flavor-wise. You don’t want to be able to taste the cornstarch!
  • Use water to adjust your sauce’s texture: If your blended cottage cheese mac and cheese is too thick, adding a small bit of the reserved pasta water to the mix will thin it out. 
  • Mind your salt: Because we are adding salt to our pasta water and using salty cheeses such as sharp cheddar and parmesan, you will notice that we did not include any additional salt in the recipe for our homemade protein mac and cheese. Please adjust and add salt according to your own taste.
  • Broiling browns the top of the baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese: We noticed in our testing of the baked version of this recipe that simply baking didn’t brown the breadcrumbs sufficiently. If you’d like that crunchy, browned top, be sure to broil it for 1 minute once it has finished baking.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a pot from the top view.
Print

Cottage Cheese Macaroni and Cheese Recipe

This Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese Recipe is our guilt-free alternative to traditional mac and cheese that is lower in calories, higher in protein, and doesn’t sacrifice the signature creamy deliciousness of the original dish. The cottage cheese sauce comes together easily in a blender and the whole dish is ready in less than 30 minutes. This recipe can be made on the stovetop, or as a baked version by following a few additional instructions below.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 461kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces pasta elbow macaroni
  • 1 cup cottage cheese 4% milk fat
  • ½ cup regular whole milk
  • 4 ounces sharp cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese shredded
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • pinch nutmeg
  • pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Bring a pot of generously salted water to a boil in a medium-sized pot. Add the pasta and cook according to package directions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  • Meanwhile, place the cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a blender or a food processor. Blend until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
  • Pour the cottage cheese mixture into the pot and turn the heat to medium-low. Using a wooden spoon, stir until slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes. It should be ready if it coats the back of a spoon. The sauce thickens very fast so do not leave it unattended. If it thickens too much you can thin it out using the reserved pasta water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if needed.
  • Add the now-drained pasta into the pot and stir to combine. Cook until pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture.
  • Serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 cups of macaroni and cottage cheese ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values are per serving.
  • Baked Version: To make baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, you will need 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, 1/2 cup of panko breadcrumbs, and 1/2 cup (additional) shredded parmesan cheese. Below are the step by step instructions:
    • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C.
    • Brush a 8X8 baking dish with butter.
    • Follow the recipe as written. Instead of serving, incorporate three tablespoons of the pasta water into the mac and cheese mixture.
    • Place the cottage cheese mac and cheese into the buttered dish.
    • Sprinkle with parmesan cheese and then panko breadcrumbs. Bake for 15 minutes or until breadcrumbs have toasted.
  • Make Ahead: If you’re planning to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version. Simply pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, bring it to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking as written above.
  • Storage and reheating instructions for the stovetop version: Any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat in a sauce pan with a splash of water over medium-low heat until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 593mg | Potassium: 271mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 580IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 462mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/feed/ 2
Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

  • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
  • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
  • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
  • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
  • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
  • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
  • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
  • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
  • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

  • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
  • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
  • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
  • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
  1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
  2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
  3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
  1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

Make Ahead and Storage

Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

  • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
Print

Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Butternut Squash

  • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Goat Cheese Spread

  • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 3 stalks scallions chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
  • ¼ cup parsley chopped

For The Bruschetta

  • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
  • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
  • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
  • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
  • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
  • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
  • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
  • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
  • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
  • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
  • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
  • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
  • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
Potato Roses https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/ https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/#comments Sun, 20 Oct 2024 12:51:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78546 Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato…]]>

Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato flower recipe to enhance your Mother’s Day or Easter brunch. They are savory and decadent—the perfect complement to almost any meat, chicken, or veggie main dish. 

If you’re looking to elevate your celebratory meals this year, this potato roses recipe will certainly dazzle your guests. For those who adore a good theme, we also have a tutorial on How to Make Apple Roses that can round out your floral feast.

Potato roses on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Don’t be intimidated by the intricate look of these rolled potato roses. We’ve tested this recipe again and again so we can share with you the simplest path to potato rosette success! You, too, can create a beautiful rose potato of your own with a few basic ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Unsalted butter: The unsalted butter in this recipe is used to grease your muffin tins. We tested the recipe with oil sprays, as well as olive oil, but butter created a far superior end result for these rose potatoes and ensured they did not stick to the pan.
  • Potatoes: While we used Yukon gold potatoes for the potato bacon roses pictured here, russet potatoes will also work just fine. We do recommend that you keep the skin on, as it not only helps to keep the potatoes intact, but also adds a nice visual edging to each potato rosette. 
  • Olive oil: The olive oil in this recipe for potato roses is used in coating the sliced potatoes. If you prefer avocado oil, it will work as a suitable alternative. 
  • Fresh herbs: For our bacon and potato roses, we used fresh rosemary. You could also substitute in fresh thyme or fresh sage. If you prefer to use dried herbs such as an Italian seasoning blend, just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried herbs.
  • Garlic: We tested this potato rose recipe with both fresh garlic and garlic powder. While they both work, we preferred the result with the garlic powder, as it dispersed amongst the potato and bacon roses more evenly.
  • Seasonings: Beyond the fresh (or dried) herbs mentioned above, the only other seasonings you need are some Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. 
  • Parmesan cheese: The parmesan cheese in our potato roses with bacon serves two main purposes—it adds a wonderful umami flavor to the dish, and it acts as a binder (or glue) to hold the layers together as it melts during the baking process. 
  • Bacon: We tested this recipe with both traditional bacon and with turkey bacon. They both came out excellent, so feel free to select your personal preference on the bacon. 

How to Make Potato Roses?

You needn’t have any special chef skills to achieve perfect potato roses with bacon. We have laid out the instructions step-by-step for you below. If you follow them, you will be able to prep your own in less than 30 minutes. 

Person showing how to prepare potatoes to make this recipe in a collage of photos.
  1. Preheat your oven. Set the temperature to 400 degrees F/204 C. Take your 2 tablespoons of melted butter and generously coat 6 of the 12 muffin tin cups. Ensure each cup (including the corner and sides) is fully greased to prevent sticking.
  2. Slice your potatoes. With the skin on, slice your potatoes using a mandolin with a handrail (also referred to as a handguard) into very thin slices, approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness. If you do not have a mandolin, you can do this step with a sharp knife. However, do your best to slice them as thinly as possible.
  3. Mix & coat your potato slices. Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl. Add the olive oil, minced rosemary (or your chosen herbs), garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine, ensuring you separate the slices to coat them evenly. Potato slices will release their juices after you mix them. Be sure to drain it before using them to assemble the roses.
Person showing how to roll potato roses.
  1. Layer your potato rosettes. On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place a line of potato slices on top, overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices. Then, sprinkle the potato layer with 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese.
A collage of images showing how to make potato rosettes.
  1. Roll your potatoes into roses. Gently roll the bacon base around the potatoes until it has formed a rosette shape.  
  2. Arrange your potato roses in the pan. Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup, then add about 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. This is a visual choice—feel free to play around with the potato slices, adding more or less to “fluff” up the edges of your roses.  
  3. Finish assembling your bacon potato roses. Repeat the layering and rolling steps above with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
Person showing how to remove potato roses from the muffin tin.
  1. Bake your rosette potatoes. Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses  to prevent them from burning and bake for an additional 30 minutes or until the centers are tender and cooked through. When inserted into the middle of the potato rose, a sharp paring knife will pierce the potato center easily.
  2. Serve your bacon potato roses. Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place them onto a serving platter, or plate them individually on each dish.

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

If you happen to have leftover potato bacon roses (however unlikely that may be, considering what a crowd-pleaser they are!), you can store and reheat them for another snack or meal later. 

  • To store your potato roses: Allow them to come to room temperature; do not attempt to contain them while they’re still warm. Place them upright in an airtight container. Our potato roses recipe will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. 
  • To reheat the potato rosettes: Place your rose potatoes on a baking sheet and heat them in a 300 degree F oven until warmed throughout—roughly 5-10 minutes. 

Serving Suggestions

This potato roses recipe is a malleable dish that wows in a variety of scenarios. Here are some pairing suggestions:

A potato rosette on a plate.

FAQs

You’ve got rose potato questions, we’ve got answers! Also, if there is something we do not cover here, please feel free to head to the comments section and we will do our best to get back to you in a timely manner. 

Do I need to soak potato slices in water before making potato rosettes?

We found this to be an unnecessary step. However, if you have a desire to remove extra starch, you’re welcome to soak them, but be sure to dry them as much as you can prior to using them in the recipe.

Do I need to cover my potato and bacon roses in foil?

Yes. Covering the rosette potatoes with foil will help protect your petals and prevent them from burning. 

How will I know when my bacon potato roses are fully cooked?

The easiest way to test your potato roses for doneness is to take the tip of a sharp paring knife and gently poke the center of the potato rosette; it will pierce easily if it is done.

If you make your own Potato Roses recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Bacon wrapped potatoes on a plate.
Print

Potato Roses Recipe

Savory and decadent, bacon potato roses are an impressive appetizer or side dish for your holiday meals and other festive occasions. The potato rosette shape adds a playful element to your plates and is easy to achieve with this foolproof recipe.  
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 245kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 4 Yukon gold potatoes approximately 1.4 lbs, rinsed with the skin on
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup grated parmesan cheese loosely packed (approximately 1 ounce)
  • 6 slices bacon pork or turkey

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 C. Brush 6 cups of a 12-cup muffin tin generously with melted butter*.
  • Thinly slice the potatoes using a mandoline with a handguard (aka handrail), or using a sharp knife to approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness.
  • Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl*. Add 2 tablespoons of olive oil, minced rosemary, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine.
  • On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place the potato slices overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices.
  • Sprinkle 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese over the potatoes.
  • Gently roll up the combined bacon and potato slices until it has formed a rose.
  • Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup and add 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. If needed, you can adjust the potato slices to “fluff” out the edges of your rosette more.
  • Repeat with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
  • Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses and bake for an additional 30 minutes, or until tender and cooked through. A sharp paring knife, when inserted into the middle of the potato rose, will pierce the potato center easily.
  • Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place onto a serving platter.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes six potato roses, but you can multiply it to serve a larger crowd. The nutritional values below are per rose.
  • Don’t skimp on the butter when greasing your muffin tin: A generous coating of butter will keep the rose potatoes from sticking to the pan. Make sure to coat not only the inside but also the outer edges of each muffin cup. This will ensure that the outer layers of the roses don’t stick as they bake and crisp up beautifully. We do not recommend using parchment liner as it didn’t allow the potato roses to crisp. 
  • Drain the liquid: After mixing the potato slices with the olive oil, rosemary, and seasonings, they tend to release some moisture. While we initially tried drying the slices with a kitchen towel before seasoning, we found that the potatoes still released juices once combined with the other ingredients. To avoid soggy potatoes, we recommend draining any excess liquid that collects at the bottom of the bowl before assembling your potato rosettes.
  • Separate the potatoes while you’re mixing them: Because your potato slices will be thin, it’s essential that you manually separate them during the mixing step into your olive oil and spices so that all of your slices get evenly coated.
  • A sharp knife can be used if you do not own a mandoline: While it may take you a bit longer (cue: patience) to slice your potatoes with a knife, it is doable. Do your best to slice them as thinly and evenly as possible.
  • Can I make potato roses in advance? Unfortunately, we do not recommend it. We attempted to prepare these bacon and potato roses ahead of time, but after sitting in the fridge for a night, the potatoes oxidized. The change in color wasn’t appetizing and they simply didn’t taste as fresh when they were baked. We encourage you to make your potato roses the day you plan on serving them.
  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for upto 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 689mg | Potassium: 523mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 273IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/feed/ 2
Roasted Turkey Breast With Gravy https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/#comments Sat, 12 Oct 2024 15:11:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78380 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

For years, my husband and I have celebrated Thanksgiving with close friends who, like us, don’t have big families. I used to make a whole turkey, but over time, I realized that roasting just the breast makes so much more sense for a smaller table.

If I am being honest, I am always most excited about the gravy. I think we can all agree that it is what ties the whole meal together: the turkey, the mashed potatoes, even the stuffing. So, when I began developing this recipe, I wanted it to be simple, dependable, and complete.

Here is what makes this recipe special for me:

  • Great for intimate gatherings: Ideal when you want the comfort of a Thanksgiving feast without the work of roasting a whole turkey.
  • It is quicker than roasting a whole turkey: It cooks faster, it is easier to carve, and with the right butter and herbs, it turns out just as juicy and satisfying.
  • No need to brine: The herb butter keeps the turkey juicy without any advance prep.
  • Everything in one pan: While the turkey rests, you can make the gravy right in the same roasting pan.
  • Tested for reliability: After four rounds of testing, I found the ideal timing, seasoning, and temperature for consistent results.
  • Beginner-friendly: I wrote the instructions in a clear, step-by-step way so even if you have never roasted a turkey breast before, you can do it with confidence.
Roasted turkey breast served with gravy, mashed potatoes, green beans and cranberry sauce on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables and turkey breast, and the gravy ingredients.

You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below; however, I’ve included some notes from my recipe testing:

For The Compound Butter

To season my turkey breast, I opted for my trusty Thanksgiving turkey compound butter, not only because it flavors the turkey beautifully but also makes the drippings delicious for gravy later on.

Now, you can certainly use the whole recipe (with one stick of butter), but I thought that the halved recipe was just the right amount for a 6-pound turkey breast.

Seasoning ingredients for roasted turkey breast.

Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt, but you can use salted butter. I would reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Hearty herbs like fresh rosemary, thyme, and sage make it feel like fall and hold up well during cooking. If you want to use dried herbs, reduce the quantity to ½ teaspoon per herb.

Garlic: One fresh garlic clove gives us a delicious bite, but ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder would be a great substitute.

Lemon zest: Do not skip this, as the zest from a fresh lemon balances and brightens all the earthy flavors of the herbs.

Seasonings: Stick to a simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. It is optional, but if preferred, a teaspoon of paprika can be added to the mixture.

Need more seasoning ideals? Try my Turkey Dry Rub or Turkey Injection Method. Both options give the meat and the gravy a rich, perfectly seasoned finish.

For The Turkey Breast and Vegetables

You do not need much when roasting a turkey breast, just a few basic staples:

Ingredients for the recipe.

Turkey breast: I use a bone-in, skin-on-whole turkey breast, also known as a hotel-style turkey breast. A whole turkey breast consists of two breasts joined at the breastbone. If you prefer a half breast (only one breast), ask the butcher to cut the whole breast in half.

Aromatics: A classic mirepoix blend of onions, carrots, and celery, along with garlic, provides the base. Even more so, the vegetables elevate the turkey breast, creating enough circulation so you don’t need to use a V rack (or a wire rack) if you don’t have one.

Lemon: One of my secrets in this recipe is to tuck a whole lemon into the cavity and secure it with a toothpick. It adds a subtle citrus note and helps keep the skin around the neck in place during roasting.

Liquid: Dry white wine, such as a Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Gris, keeps the turkey breast meat moist while cooking. If you prefer an alcohol-free recipe, use Chicken Stock, Vegetable Stock, or turkey stock instead.

For The Gravy

My favorite part of this recipe might just be the homemade gravy, made with the drippings from the roasted turkey. Here is what you will need:

Ingredients to make the gravy from the top view.

Unsalted butter: Again, I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt. Salted butter can also be used, but you’d have to adjust the salt accordingly.

Flour: Regular all-purpose flour thickens the gravy to the right consistency. If you are following a gluten-free diet, use 1:1 gluten free flour such as Cup 4Cup.

Drippings from roasting pan: A small amount of the pan drippings adds depth and meaty flavor.

Stock: Use chicken stock, turkey stock, or vegetable stock, depending on what you have on hand. I recommend using homemade stock if possible, but store-bought works perfectly fine. If you go that route, choose a low-sodium option so you can better control the seasoning.

Seasonings: I recommend tasting the gravy near the end of cooking before adding any more seasoning, as the pan drippings may already be salty. After tasting, add more salt and black pepper if needed.

How to Roast a Turkey Breast in the Oven?

This turkey breast with gravy recipe has become my go-to for whenever I host a smaller holiday gathering. And the best part, you ask? It is ready in just a couple of hours.

Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Step 1 – Preheat oven: Preheat your oven to 450°F (232°C). I recommend removing the turkey breast from the fridge about 30-60 minutes before cooking so it comes closer to room temperature. I’ve found that this small step helps it cook more evenly.

A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey breast (and seasoning) for roasting.

Step 2 – Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt, and pepper.

Pro tip: The important thing when making the butter mixture is to have your butter at room temperature, as it not only mixes easily but also spreads better on the meat.

Step 3 – Pat dry: Pat dry the turkey breast and the cavity with paper towels as much as you can. Do not skip this step. Otherwise, it will be hard to spread the butter on top.

Step 4 – Loosen turkey skin: To butter your turkey, gently separate the skin from the meat with your fingers, being careful not to tear it. I find it easier to start at the bottom and slowly work my way up the breast.

Person showing how to spread butter over and under the skin of turkey breast.

Step 5 – Add butter under skin: Lift the skin and place 3 tablespoons of the softened herb butter (about 1 ½ tablespoons on each turkey breast) underneath the skin on both sides.

Step 6 – Spread butter over the skin: Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin, then massage it underneath the skin into an even layer.

Pro Tip: As you distribute the butter under the skin, be as gentle as possible and go slow. You don’t want to tear the turkey skin as it will expose too much flesh while cooking.

Step 7 – Finish with lemon: Place the whole lemon in the neck cavity and secure it with a toothpick (this holds the lemon in place and prevents the skin around the neck from shrinking).

Step 8 – Add vegetables: Spread the onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in one even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or stock).

A collage of images showing how to roast turkey breast in the oven.

Step 9 – Position turkey: Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables, skin side up, ensuring it is elevated, so hot air can circulate underneath and keep the meat tender without needing a wire rack. Feel free to rearrange the veggies a bit to help the turkey sit upright.

Step 10 – Insert meat thermometer: If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alert at 155°F (68°C). (If you do not have a meat thermometer for the oven, skip this step.)

Step 11 – Reduce oven temperature: Once the turkey goes in, immediately lower the oven temperature to 325°F (163°C).

This was a turning point in my recipe testing, because lowering the oven temperature from very hot to medium helped the skin crisp beautifully while cooking the turkey gently, without drying it out.

Step 12 – Roast the turkey: Cook for 1 ½ -2 hours, or until the internal temperature reaches 155°F (68°C).  If you do not have a temperature probe, check the turkey with an instant-read thermometer.

Step 13 – Rest the turkey: Remove the turkey breast from the oven. Place it on a cutting board and lightly tent with aluminum foil. Do not remove the temperature probe. Let it rest for 30 minutes. Trust me when I say this is when the magic happens. All of the juices redistribute, and the carryover heat brings the internal temperature up to a perfect 165°F (74°C).

Baked turkey breast fresh out of the oven.

How to Make Gravy from Turkey Breast?

While the turkey breast is resting, I make the homemade gravy. I always say this is where all those golden drippings come to life. It’s rich, silky, and full of that roasted flavor no one should ever waste.

Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1 – Remove vegetables: Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan and set them aside.

Step 2 – Separate fat from drippings: Pour the pan drippings into a large glass measuring cup or a fat separator. Let it sit for about 10-15 minutes so the fat rises to the top. I use a small spoon to scoop off the excess fat. At that point, you will be left with all the rich liquid. You’ll need about 3 tablespoons of drippings for the gravy.

Step 3 – Preheat the pan or saucepan: If you use an oven-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Place the roasting pan directly on the stove over medium-high heat. Otherwise, a medium saucepan would work just as well.

A collage of images showing how to make gravy for turkey breast.

Step 4 – Make the roux: Add the butter to the pan and let it melt for a minute. Then whisk in the flour, stirring constantly until it turns a light golden color, about 6-8 minutes. It will start to darken quickly, so keep an eye on the heat and lower the heat if needed.

Pro Tip: The 6-8 minutes of stirring time might seem like a lot, but it is important for the final product’s taste. If you don’t cook the flour long enough, your gravy will have a noticeable floury taste that won’t go away no matter how long you cook it.

Step 5 – Add pan drippings and stock: Add the reserved turkey drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the pan (that’s where all the flavor is). Gradually add the stock in a steady stream.

Bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, until thickened to your desired consistency, about 10-15 minutes. 

Step 6 – Add seasonings (if needed): I always recommend tasting the gravy before adding any extra salt, as those drippings can already be quite flavorful. Adjust with salt and black pepper only if needed. 

Gravy Troubleshooting

You can learn more about this in my Turkey Gravy with Drippings post, but if you feel like your gravy isn’t quite right, here are a few ways to fix it:

  • Too thick? Whisk in a splash (in 1-2 tablespoon increments) of warm stock until it loosens up.
  • Too thin? Let it simmer a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring often; it will naturally thicken as it reduces.
  • Too salty? Stir in a bit of unsalted stock or a splash of heavy cream to balance the flavor.
Images showing gravy strained and in a gravy boat.

Step 7 – Strain: Place a fine mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the gravy through the strainer. Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out any residual “lumps.” Transfer it to a gravy bowl.

Step 8 – Carve and serve: Use a sharp knife to slice the turkey breast into thin slices. Arrange them on a platter, and serve with warm gravy on the side, or, as I like to do, drizzle a little over the top.

Person serving sliced roasted turkey breast with gravy on the side.

Timetable for Cooking Turkey Breast in the Oven

If you are wondering how long to cook a turkey breast in the oven, I have a foolproof timetable for you!

However, there are a few essential factors to keep in mind. The cooking time will depend on your turkey’s weight.

Additionally, the turkey must be thoroughly thawed. I always remove it from the fridge 30 to 60 minutes before cooking because the herbed butter spreads more easily, and the turkey is not cold.

Following these guidelines, a bone-in turkey breast will take approximately 22-24 minutes per pound at 325°F (163°C).

The internal temperature goal is 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast, as the carry-over heat will help raise it to the safe 165°F (74°C) as it rests.

Turkey Breast WeightBone-In Turkey Breast Roast Time (325°F (163°C))
2-3 pounds45 – 75 minutes
4-6 pounds90 – 150 minutes
7-8 pounds154 – 200 minutes

How to Store and Reheat?

We all love Thanksgiving leftovers, and I don’t want any of that gorgeous baked turkey breast and gravy to go to waste. Also, while roasting a turkey breast is typically associated with Thanksgiving, having some fresh turkey on hand is a great way to stock your fridge with some lean protein for lunch or dinner.

Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

Storage: To store any leftovers, let the turkey breast and gravy cool to room temperature, then store them in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
To Reheat:

  • Turkey: I like to reheat turkey slices in a skillet with a splash of chicken or turkey broth, then cover and let them simmer gently over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. This will keep the meat moist and tender every time.
  • Gravy: Reheat in a small pot over medium heat until bubbly and warm, about 5 minutes. Your gravy will naturally thicken as it cools, so if it feels too thick, you can whisk in a little warm stock (in 2-tablespoon increments, depending on the amount you are reheating ) until it reaches a smooth texture.

Expert Tips From My Recipe Testing

Like with any turkey recipe, a few small details can make the difference between a dry turkey and one that’s juicy, tender, and golden brown. Below, I’m sharing what I’ve learned through years and years to make the best roasted turkey breast with gravy:

Thaw your turkey: If your turkey breast is frozen, thaw it safely and completely in the fridge. Place the turkey (while it is still in its packaging) on a baking sheet (to catch any juices) and thaw in the fridge. It takes about 24 hours to thaw every 4 pounds of turkey, so your turkey breast can take anywhere from 36 – 48 hours, depending on the weight. Once thawed, the turkey should be cooked within 1-2 days.

Remove the turkey from the fridge before cooking: I always let the turkey sit out for 30-60 minutes before roasting. I know it might sound like a small step, but it makes a big difference in helping the turkey cook evenly and stay juicy.

Make the compound butter in advance: The herbed butter can be made 3-5 days ahead. Having it ready cuts down the prep time in half.

Thickness of the turkey gravy: The gravy will thicken as it sits and even more so when stored in the fridge. You can thin it out with more stock (¼ cup at a time), just make sure to check the seasoning after each addition.

Equipment you need: While you can bake the turkey breast in a large casserole dish, I had even greater success with a roasting pan (affiliate link) because you can easily roast the turkey and then make the gravy on the stove while it rests. You can prop the turkey up on the included V-Rack, but the veggies are enough to prop it straight if you do not have one.

Use a meat thermometer: During my recipe testing, I used Digital Meat Thermometer with a probe. I especially liked that it lets you set a temperature alarm, so there is no guessing or opening and closing the oven.
That said, you can use a regular instant-read thermometer. I would recommend checking at the 1 ½-hour mark, then every 10 minutes thereafter until the turkey reaches 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast.

Don’t skip resting: Allowing the turkey to rest for at least 30 minutes helps redistribute the juices, resulting in a juicy, succulent turkey.

Also, if you use a digital probe thermometer, do not remove it until after the turkey has rested. You don’t want all the good juices to escape! Letting the turkey rest with the thermometer still in place prevents any openings that could cause those flavorful juices to leak out, ensuring every bite is moist and delicious.

Roasted turkey breast with gravy served on a plate with mashed potatoes and green beans.

FAQs

Should turkey breast be covered or uncovered when roasting?

I did not think covering the turkey breast was necessary as we roasted it in a low-heat (325 degrees F) oven. The gentle heat cooks the turkey evenly and promotes a crispy, golden-brown skin; however, if you feel the breasts are browning too quickly (i.e., your oven is hotter than the recommended temperature), you can use a piece of foil to cover them.

How do you keep turkey breast moist when reheating?

I have found the best way to reheat turkey is to do so in a large skillet over medium heat with a splash of stock, either chicken broth, vegetable, or turkey. The added liquid helps retain moisture and flavor.

How much turkey breast do I need per person?

About ¾ lb of turkey breast per person is ideal. If you want leftovers, however, I would increase that to 1 pound of turkey breast per person. A 6-pound turkey breast will feed 6 people with some leftovers.

Can I make the gravy ahead of time?

Since this recipe relies on the drippings from the roasted turkey breast, it is best to make it right before serving. The good news is that it takes no more than 10 minutes from start to finish.

What to Serve with Turkey Breast Roast

Nothing beats the simplicity of this simple turkey breast recipe. It is easy and show-stopping at the same time. If you are serving a small gathering, I keep it simple with Maple Cranberry Sauce.

But when I am making this roasted turkey breast for Thanksgiving or an elegant fall gathering, I make sure to have all the classic vegetable side dishes. My favorites include:

More Turkey Recipes You Might Like

This roasted turkey breast is one of my go-to recipes when I want something elegant but approachable. That said, I have a few other tested and trusted turkey recipes and techniques that I make every year, whether it’s for Thanksgiving or to bring to a smaller holiday party:

  • Whenever I crave a turkey recipe that cooks as quickly as chicken, I turn to my Roasted Turkey Loin recipe. I use my turkey tenderloin marinade, which doubles as a delicious sauce for drizzling later on.
  • If you’re feeling a little intimidated by cooking a whole bird, my Herb Roasted Turkey recipe will change that. It’s a beginner-friendly Thanksgiving classic that turns out tender, juicy, and golden brown every single time.
  • For something cozy and a little more casual, try my Roasted Turkey Legs. They’re prefectly crispy on the outside on juicy on the inside.
  • When I’m craving something simple yet satisfying, I make my Baked Turkey Wings. With just 10 minutes of prep, you’ll have tender and crisp wings that pair well with any vegetable sides.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post contains affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

Turkey breast roast served with gravy, potatoes, and green beans on a plate.
Print

Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy Recipe

Here's an easy recipe for Roasted Turkey Breast served with gravy on the side! Whether you are serving a smaller crowd for Thanksgiving or need a simple turkey dinner, this foolproof recipe will guide you through the process of making the turkey breast roast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 6 servings
Calories 658kcal

Ingredients

For The Turkey Breast:

  • 6 pound turkey breast skin and bone-in
  • ½ cup herb compound butter recipe below
  • 1 large onion sliced into thick rounds
  • 1 large carrot sliced in large chunks
  • 2 celery ribs sliced in large pieces
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and rough chop
  • 1 lemon
  • ½ cup dry white wine such as sauvignon blanc or pinot gris (or chicken stock for an alcohol-free option)

For The Herb Compound Butter:

  • 2 oz unsalted butter ½ stick – at room temperature
  • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh rosemary finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh thyme finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ¼ teaspoon dried sage
  • 1 clove fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the turkey gravy:

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 3 tablespoons drippings from roasting pan fat separated * it can be a little bit more or less
  • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey or vegetable stock
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

For The Turkey Breast:

  • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F/232 degrees C.
  • Remove the turkey breast from the fridge 30 minutes or an hour before you are ready to roast it.
  • Meanwhile, make the herbed butter by mixing together butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt and pepper in a bowl until well combined.
  • Pat dry the turkey breast with paper towels on all sides.
  • Using your fingers, gently separate the top skin from the meat, being careful not to tear the skin.
  • Place three tablespoons of the softened herb butter underneath the skin on both sides.
  • Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin.
  • Place one half of the lemon in the neck cavity rounded side up and secure the turkey skin with a toothpick*.
  • Spread onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in an even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or chicken stock.)
  • Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables. You may have to arrange the vegetables to “prop” the breast to stay upright.
  • If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alarm at 155 F/ 68 C. (see notes if you do not have a thermometer probe).
  • Place in the oven and immediately reduce the heat to 325 F/ 163 C.
  • Roast for 1 ½ -2 hours or until the internal temperature reaches 155 F/ 68 C.
  • Remove the turkey breast from the oven, place it on a cutting board, and lightly tent with foil. Do not remove the temperature probe if using it. Let it rest for 30 minutes. As it sits, it should reach 165 F/74 C with the help of the residual heat.

To Make The Turkey Gravy:

  • Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan.
  • Pour the pan drippings into a glass measuring cup. Set aside so that the fat can separate, for about 10-15 minutes. Skim the fat off and discard. You should end up with three tablespoons of drippings. If you have more, you can discard the rest.
  • Place the roasting pan on top of the stove at medium-high heat. If you use an oven- and stove-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Otherwise, you can use a medium saucepan.
  • Melt the butter and then sprinkle the flour. Cook, stirring constantly with a whisk, until the flour is lightly browned, about 6-8 minutes. Keep a close eye on it and adjust the heat accordingly to prevent burning.
  • Add the drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the roasting pan.
  • Add the stock and bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-15 minutes until thickened to your desired consistency.
  • Taste the gravy and season with salt and pepper, if desired.
  • You can serve it as it is or if you prefer a smooth and silky gravy, you can strain it. To do that, place a mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the now-cooked gravy into the strainer, and use the back of a spoon or spatula to press “lumps.”

To Serve:

  • Remove the temperature prope.
  • Carve your turkey breast and transfer the slices onto a serving platter.
  • Serve with gravy on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people (¾ lbs turkey breast) per person comfortably. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the gravy as well.
  • High and low temperature: We intentionally started with a high temperature to crisp up the skin and turned it down to a lower temperature to cook the breasts in a gentle heat. Also, because of the mild heat, we did not think that covering it with foil was necessary.
  • Lemon hack: Placing a whole lemon in the cavity helps prevent the turkey skin in the neck area from sinking, but it is an optional step.
  • Check doneness: A meat thermometer is the best tool for the most accurate results when cooking turkey. If you don’t have a probe thermometer, we recommend using a digital thermometer and following the time and temperature guide provided in the blog post above. Based on the weight of your turkey breast, it’s best to check doneness closer to the end of the cooking time.
  • Residual heat: We intentionally cooked the turkey to 155 degrees F, as the residual heat continued to cook it during the resting process. During our recipe testing, it took about 20 minutes of resting time for the roasted turkey breast to reach 165 degrees F.
  • Storage & serving leftovers: Leftover turkey breast and gravy can be refrigerated in airtight containers for up to 3 days. A foolproof method to reheat turkey is to slice the meat and place it in a pan or skillet. Add chicken or turkey broth, cover, and simmer over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. While the turkey breast is reheating, you can warm the leftover gravy in a small saucepan. 
  • Quantity of the gravy: The quantity will depend on the pan you use. When we used the roasting pan, there was a lot of evaporation because of the wide opening, resulting in 1 ½ cups of gravy. If you use a medium saucepan, you should end up with approximately 2 cups of sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 658kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 102g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 279mg | Sodium: 1312mg | Potassium: 1348mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2181IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/feed/ 4
Sweet Potato Stacks https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/#comments Thu, 03 Oct 2024 12:26:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78286 Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to…]]>

Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to serve alongside just about any main dish. A great alternative to classic sweet potato casserole, this recipe takes about 20 minutes of prep time when you follow the uncomplicated step-by-step instructions below.

After you give these crispy sweet potato stacks a try, we also have a Bacon Potato Roses and Sweet Potato Souffle recipe both of which are family favorites during the holiday season. And our Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes are a fun spin on traditional mashed potatoes.

Sweet potato stacks on a plate from the front view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While these sweet potato stacks look like an elevated showstopper, this is truly a simple side dish—they’re essentially sliced sweet potatoes in a muffin pan. The rest of the ingredients may already be in your fridge and pantry. Otherwise, they can be easily obtained at your local grocer. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Sweet potatoes: We used the traditional orange sweet potatoes in this recipe. They’re the most common type of sweet potato that you can find in stores and hold their shape beautifully when sliced. Seek out relatively narrow potatoes of similar diameter so they will fit into the muffin tin cups uniformly.
  • Fresh thyme leaves: We prepared our sweet potato stacks recipe with fresh thyme, though dried thyme will work, if that’s what you have on hand. Just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried. You can also swap in other fresh herbs, such as fresh rosemary and sage, if you prefer. But remember: small amounts go a long way!
  • Unsalted butter: If you only have salted butter in hand, that will work too. However, be sure to adjust the amount of additional salt you use in the seasoning step. While we love the flavor combination of butter and sweet potatoes, you can use an equal amount of olive oil or ghee for a dairy-free alternative.
  • Garlic: We tested this recipe with both fresh garlic and granulated garlic. We found that while both options are acceptable, the granulated garlic dispersed more evenly amongst the stacks, and we preferred the milder flavor overall. 
  • Seasonings: The naturally sweet flavor of the sweet potatoes doesn’t require much else by way of seasonings. And thus, we use an elegantly simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper only. 
  • Maple Syrup (optional): If you’d like to lean into more of a sweet flavor profile, a drizzle of maple syrup adds a delicious touch. Alternatively, you can also make these sweet potato stacks with brown sugar.
  • Ground cinnamon (optional): If you’re adding maple syrup, ground cinnamon pairs well. Again, just remember that a little of this spice goes a long way.
  • Shredded Parmesan cheese (optional): If you’d like to make these sweet potato stackers more on the savory side, a ½ cup of grated parmesan cheese (or gruyere cheese) does the trick. Crispy parmesan sweet potato stacks are always a favorite when served with beef stew and pot roast.

How To Make Sweet Potato Stacks in A Muffin Tin?

Consider this recipe a grown-up version of a layered sweet potato bake. By finely slicing our sweet potatoes in muffin tins, we end up with lovely little stacks of potatoes that are crispy on the outside and buttery soft on the inside. 

  1. Preheat your oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. 
A collage of images showing how to prepare sweet potatoes to bake in a muffin pan.
  1. Grease your muffin tin: Using a pastry brush and 1 tablespoon of butter, apply a thin layer of coating to the inside of each individual muffin cup. Set the pan aside. 
  2. Slice your sweet potatoes: Using a mandolin or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly and evenly as possible. Transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  3. Prepare your potatoes: In the bowl of sweet potatoes, add the rest of the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If you’re going with the maple syrup and cinnamon, add them at this step. Or, alternatively, if you’re using Parmesan for a savory touch, add the grated cheese at this step.
  4. Coat your sweet potatoes: Using tongs (or your clean hands work fine too!), toss the sweet potatoes to ensure that all of the slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl. 
A collage of images showing how to make sweet potato stackers recipe.
  1. Assemble your sweet potato stacks: Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 (yes, 30!) ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes in the batches pictured here.
  2. Bake: Bake your garlic butter sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  3. Cool and serve: Remove the muffin tin from the oven and allow your sweet potato stacks to cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, delicately remove them from each muffin cup using an offset spatula (or a butter knife) and transfer them onto a serving platter. Garnish each stack with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

If you plan on doing some advance meal preparations whether it be for a dinner party or holiday event, these muffin-tin sweet potatoes are the perfect flexible and easy side dish.

  • Make Ahead: These crispy sweet potato stacks can be prepped 1 day before you plan on serving them. Simply follow the instructions through Step 6, where you’ve assembled the stackers in the muffin tin, then wrap them tightly with aluminum foil and refrigerate. The next day, remove them from the refrigerator to bring to room temperature about 30 minutes before you plan on baking them, then bake as directed. 
  • Storage: If you have leftover sweet potato stackers, they will keep in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Be sure to bring them to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container.
  • Reheating: To reheat your leftover sweet potato stacks, place them on a baking sheet (there’s no need to grease it this time). Warm your stackers in a 350-degree F oven for 5-7 minutes, or until heated through.

If you make your own Sweet Potato Stacks following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Sweet potatoes cooked in a muffin tin on a plate.
Print

Sweet Potato Stacks Recipe

Sweet potato stacks with crispy edges and tender centers, baked to perfection with butter and thyme—a showstopping side dish perfect for any time of the year, but especially for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners when you want to impress.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 12 stacks
Calories 98kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 – 4 sweet potatoes peeled (approximately 2 ½ pounds)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme minced – plus more as garnish (or 1 teaspoon dried thyme)
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter + 1 tablespoon for greasing the muffin tin (melted and cooled divided)
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons maple syrup optional
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. Brush each muffin cup of a 12-cup muffin tin using 1 tablespoon of butter (for the whole muffin tin). Set it aside.
  • Using a mandolin slicer or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly (and evenly) as possible. Transfer the sliced potatoes to a large mixing bowl.
  • In the bowl, add the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If using, add the maple syrup, and ground cinnamon.
  • Using tongs or clean hands, toss to ensure that all of the potato slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl.
  • Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes.
  • Bake sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven, let cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Using a butter knife or an offset spatula, carefully remove them from the muffin tray and transfer them onto a serving platter.
  • Garnish with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 roasted sweet potato stacks. The nutritional values below are per stack.
  • The size of the potatoes: When shopping for this recipe, pick out potatoes that are similar in size and large enough to fit in a muffin cup. 
  • Evenly sliced sweet potatoes are essential: The most crucial aspect of this recipe is that your sweet potato slices are thin and uniform in thickness (otherwise, baking times will be inconsistent). Using a mandoline slicer makes this task foolproof. If you don’t have one, then the next best option is a very sharp knife. Slicing them thinly with a knife requires a bit more patience, but it is doable.  Do your best to slice them as thinly (and evenly) as possible.
  • Greased muffin cups are the key to crispy sweet potato stacks: When testing this recipe, we tried lining the muffin cups with parchment paper, but the potatoes wouldn’t crisp. Don’t be shy when greasing your muffin cups – use plenty of butter. 
  • Layer plenty of sweet potatoes in your stacks: The sliced sweet potatoes in your muffin pan will compress while baking, so be sure to fill your muffin cups just slightly above the rim to get the most height out of your stackers. We used 30 slices of sweet potatoes in each muffin tin. You might consider it a lot, but it will shrink after it is baked.
  • There is no need to cover it with foil: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover the sweet potato stack with aluminum foil during the baking process. 
  • Make ahead: You can prep everything a day before, cover it tightly with foil, and store it in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, remove it from the oven 30 minutes before you plan to bake it and bake it as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8160IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/feed/ 2
Muffin Tin Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/#comments Sun, 25 Aug 2024 21:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1836 If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes…]]>

If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes like Smashed Fingerlings—crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and perfect for dipping—or our creamy and comforting Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes. These dishes are just as delicious and easy to prepare as this muffin tin potatoes gratin recipe, offering more ways to enjoy this versatile vegetable!

Scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin baked until golden brown on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Muffin Pan Potatoes

Baking potatoes in a muffin pan is easy and quick. Plus, this recipe is made with a short list of simple ingredients readily available at the grocery store. We will need the following:

Ingredients to make scalloped potatoes in muffin pan.
  • Potatoes: You can use a few types of white potatoes to cook in muffin cups. Go for Russet potatoes if you prefer a fluffy and light texture (similar to french fries) or use yellow potatoes, like Yukon gold potatoes, for a creamy, tender bite. If both are unavailable, red potatoes are the next best substitute.
  • Butter: We need unsalted butter to grease the muffin tins, but olive oil or avocado oil cooking spray can also be used.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic offers a delicious savory punch, but garlic powder is a good substitute for a milder garlic taste.
  • Cheese: Parmesan cheese has a rich, slightly nutty flavor that works beautifully with scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. Gruyere cheese or cheddar cheese would be just as delicious.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the cheesy potatoes to shine. But depending on your preference and serving accompaniments, you can try additional seasonings, such as chili powder, ground cumin, or Italian seasoning.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme offers a delicate and subtle earthy flavor, but you can substitute with dried thyme if fresh isn’t available, using about 1 teaspoon. Alternatively, you can other herbs like fresh rosemary, fresh parsley, dill, or chives, based on what you have on hand.
  • Cream: Heavy cream will provide a rich, buttery flavor, but whole milk can also be used.

How to Make Muffin Tin Potatoes?

Making scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin is straightforward and rewarding. The potato mixture can be prepped and ready in 15 minutes, with the oven doing the rest. Follow the below step-by-step instructions to create delicious, individual muffin tin potato stacks that are guaranteed to impress.

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin potatoes gratin.
  1. Prepare potato slices: Slice each into 1/4-inch thin slices using a mandolin slicer. If you do not own a mandoline, you can use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as possible.
  2. Grease muffin tray: Generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter using a pastry brush.
  3. Begin stacking potatoes: Stack 3-4 slices of potatoes in each muffin cup of the prepared muffin tin. Then, sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin scalloped potatoes.
  1. Add a second layer of potatoes: Top each stack with 3-4 more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle with more garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step until the muffin cup is fully filled with sliced potatoes. Continue to fill the rest of the muffin cups following the same order of ingredients.
  2. Add heavy cream: Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each potato stack.
  3. Bake: Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender and golden brown.
  4. Cool and serve: Cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then run a knife around the edges, remove the potatoes, and serve. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves, if desired.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

While these muffin tin potatoes are best enjoyed fresh from the oven, they can be made ahead, stored, and reheated for later enjoyment. Here are some tips to help you make the most of these muffin tin potato stacks:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the scalloped potato cups as instructed, but do not bake. Cover tightly with foil and place in the fridge for up to 1 day. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator 30 minutes before baking it in the oven. Bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Be sure to cool the potatoes completely before storing them. Warm potatoes will create excess moisture and condensation, making them soggy.
  • Reheat: Reheat the leftover mini potato gratin stacks in a preheated low-heat oven (300 degrees F) or toaster oven to ensure they stay crispy and delicious. 

What to Serve It With?

You can serve muffin pan scalloped potatoes as a side dish or an appetizer. They are perfect when served with eggs for breakfast or your favorite meat dishes. Some of my favorite dishes to serve them with are:

Potatoes cooked in muffin cups served with eggs for breakfast.
  • Meat: Whether serving these potatoes as part of a casual weeknight dinner or an elevated side dish for special occasions and Christmas dinners, meat and potatoes are a match made in heaven. The crispy cheesy potato stacks go especially well with Prime Rib or Beef Tenderloin and a fresh salad.
  • Turkey: You can’t have Thanksgiving without potatoes, and what better way to impress your guests than with a platter of scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. These are best served to a crowd with a classic Thanksgiving Turkey. Or, you could try Baked Turkey Wings or Baked Turkey Breasts when serving a small crowd.
  • Breakfast: Don’t save these potatoes just for the holidays. Think of them as a year-round recipe that can be served as part of your breakfast with eggs and bacon or alongside Feta and Spinach Frittata. If you are inspired, make cheesy bacon potato stacks by tossing in some cooked and crumbled bacon (or turkey bacon) between the slices.
  • Snack: There’s nothing more comforting than potatoes when you need something to munch on. Dollop the tops with sour cream or with Guacamole for a fun and delicious appetizer.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

While the recipe is straightforward, there are a few things to remember to succeed on your first try. Here are some of my expert tips for the best muffin tin potatoes recipe:

  • Check for doneness: The cooking time will vary depending on the thickness of the potato slices. If you can easily pierce the center of the potato stacks with a knife and they appear to have crispy edges, they are ready.
  • Pay attention to the size of the potatoes: No matter what potato you choose, muffin tin scalloped potatoes are best made with long and narrow-sized potatoes. As you shop for this recipe, take a few extra minutes to look for potatoes roughly the same size and diameter as your muffin tin.
  • Peel the potatoes: Peeling the potato skin is optional, but during our recipe testing, we found potatoes without the skins provided the best texture.
  • Mandoline will create the most uniform slices: A mandoline is a handy kitchen tool that will give you even slices. A sharp knife and a steady hand will suffice if you do not own a mandoline.
  • Brush the muffin cups generously with butter: Butter is potatoes’ best friend. We want to be generous when brushing the muffin tins with butter, as this will create crispier potatoes and easy removal. We do not recommend using parchment paper liners for this recipe.
  • Layer or toss with the seasonings: We found it easier to stack the potatoes, and then layer with the seasonings. However, you also have the option to toss the potato slices with the garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme in a large mixing bowl, then stack as directed.

More Potato Recipes

If you make this Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Muffin tin potatoes garnished with thyme.
Print

Muffin Tin Potatoes Recipe

Muffin Tin Potatoes is the easiest yet most delicious appetizer or side dish. Stacked potato slices layered with garlic, parmesan cheese, and fresh thyme baked in a muffin cup to perfection.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 114kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium russet potatoes peeled, about 1 ½ pounds
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed or 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme
  • 12 tablespoons heavy cream or whole milk

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
  • Slice each potato into 1/4-inch (or thinner) slices using a mandoline. If you do not have one, use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as you can.
  • Using the pastry brush, generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter.
  • Stack three slices of potatoes in each muffin cup. Lightly sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
  • Top each stack with three more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle a third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step again until you reach the top of the muffin tin cup.
  • Continue with the rest of the muffin cups, following the same steps.
  • Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each muffin cup.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender.
  • Let cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then gently remove from the pan and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, baked in a 12-cup standart muffin tin, make 12 stacked potatoes. The nutrition information below is per potato stack.
  • Generously butter the muffin tins with butter: Do not skip buttering the muffin tins generously with butter; otherwise, it’ll be hard to get the butter stacks after they are baked. We tested this recipe with parchment muffin liners and thought the stacked potatoes were not as crispy.
  • Number of potato slices per cup: The number of slices per cup depends on the thickness of your potato slices. Aim for filling them all the way to the top and pack as many as you can. They tend to shrink as they bake.
  • Thickness of the slices: While a mandoline does a beautiful job, a sharp knife is just as efficient. And if potato slices are a bit thicker, do not worry; it will still bake beautifully. You’ll see in the video below (that I made in 2017) even thicker potato slices bake beautifully.
  • Covering it with foil: During our recipe, we found some versions of this recipe that recommended covering it with aluminum foil while baking. We tried that and did not feel it was necessary.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover potato stacks to room temperature, place them in an airtight container, and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days. Reheat in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes or until they are warmed to your liking.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Muffin Pan Potato Gratins recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 114kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 174mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/feed/ 28
Kale Brussel Sprout Salad https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 17:34:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15238 Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.…]]>

Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.

You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, green side dish for thanksgiving, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a beginner or an expert chef.

A kale Brussel sprout salad in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

Ingredients

This kale Brussel sprouts salad comes together in three sets of basic ingredients:

ingredients for a kale salad with Brussels sprouts from the top view.
  • For the salad ingredients, you’ll need:
    • Tuscan Kale: Because of its mild flavor and popularity in grocery stores, lacinato kale is my go-to for this easy recipe. If you’d like to try other Types of Kale, curly kale has a sharp, peppery flavor that will work great in your kale Brussel salad.
    • Brussels Sprouts: You can shred brussels sprouts like I do it here or buy packaged and already shaved sprouts from the store.
    • Grated Parmesan Cheese: I love the salty and umami flavors of parmesan cheese, but Pecorino Romano goat cheese, blue cheese, and feta cheese would also work.
    • Dried or fresh fruit: I used dried cranberries, but pomegranate seeds, fresh apples, raisins, and craisins also make the perfect additions to this simple kale and Brussels sprouts salad.
  • To make the dressing, gather:
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh lemon juice
    • Vinegar: I used apple cider vinegar, but balsamic vinegar or white wine vinegar would also work. If you are a fan of Cracker Barrel’s brussel sprout and kale salad recipe you can use my Dijon Maple Vinaigrette instead.
    • Dijon mustard
    • Fresh minced garlic cloves
    • Onion: I used a minced shallot, but you can use red onions as well.
    • Kosher salt and black pepper. 
  • For the nuts: I suggest using sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, or chopped pecans. Alternatively, you can use candied nuts like candied pecans! You could also swap out the nuts for seeds, like pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds, to accommodate nut allergies.

Variations & Optional Add-Ins

Take this shaved brussel sprout and kale salad to the next level with countless tasty additions.

  • For meat lovers: Turn your veggie-packed side into a healthy meal by adding a nutritious protein. Top your salad with Turkey Bacon for a kick of crispy bacon flavor, or add Baked Chicken Breasts for a succulent addition.
  • Serve it warm: If you prefer a warm kale and Brussel sprout salad, you can sautee the vegetables in a large skillet until they are lightly cooked. Simply heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet, add the chopped kale and sautee until lightly warmed. Transfer it to a bowl and follow the same steps for the Brussel sprouts.

How to Make this Recipe?

Kale brussel sprout cranberry salad is among my favorite easy salad recipes to whip up on busy weeknights and special occasions alike. You can even hone your veggie prep by checking out my foolproof guide on How to Cut Kale.

A person showing how to make a kale salad with dressing from the top view.
  1. Prepare the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water, and dry them in a salad spinner. Then, use a sharp knife to remove the stems and thinly slice kale leaves. Place them in a large bowl.
  2. Shave the Brussels sprouts: Rinse the Brussel sprouts under cold water using a colander, dry them, and remove their outermost leaves. Then, place them in a food processor fitted with a slicing blade. Switch on the machine and feed the Brussels sprouts into the tube. Once shaved, transfer the Brussels sprouts from the food processor into the salad bowl with the kale. 
  3. Make the lemon vinaigrette: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, salt, and black pepper in a small bowl.
  4. Drizzle the vegetables: Gently pour the dressing over the kale and Brussel sprouts. Toss the mixture such that each leaf has an even coating of the dressing. This even layer will help soften the kale, but if you want, you can also massage kale and sprouts gently to ensure they are fully mixed with the dressing. Set the vegetables aside and let them rest.
A person showing how to assemble a kale salad with toasted almonds from the top view.
  1. Toast the almonds: Place the almonds in a small skillet over medium heat. Toast the nuts for 4-5 minutes, frequently stirring, until they turn fragrant and lightly golden brown. Alternatively, you can toast them in a preheated 350-degree F. oven on a baking sheet for 5-7 minutes, turning once during the process.
  2. Add the toppings: Top the shaved brussel sprout salad with Parmesan cheese, toasted almonds, and cranberries if using. Toss the mixture until evenly combined, then serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This Lemony brussel sprout salad is as easy to make ahead and store as it is to prepare (hello, easy kale storage!). Here’s how I do it:

  • Make ahead: To make this kale Brussels sprouts salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Begin by washing, chopping, and shaving the kale and Brussel sprouts, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Then, mix and cover dressing and store it in a separate airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the refrigerator. Toast the almonds and store them at room temperature. Lastly, shred the Parmesan cheese and store it in the fridge. Combine the ingredients just before serving.
  • Store: To store your salad with Brussel sprouts, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. If you have not yet added the dressing, the veggies will stay fresh for 3-4 days. However, if you have already added the dressing, your salad mixture will last up to two days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

What to Serve with this Salad

With so many tantalizing flavors, this Brussel sprout and kale recipe makes the ultimate side dish for dozens of tasty mains. Here are just a few delicious recipes to try with your new favorite salad:

  • Meat Dishes: My favorite way to serve this kale Brussels sprouts salad is with a savory, meaty main. Ground Turkey Meatloaf is a flavorful classic even picky eaters love, while Baked Chicken Parmesan and Chicken Fricassee will perfectly complement your light salad with rich and succulent flavor.
  • Vegetarian Dinners: Fill your plate with nutritious and eco-conscious foods by pairing your brussel sprout salad with tasty vegetarian recipes. Quinoa Chili and Mexican Quinoa will balance your kale salad with hearty spice, and Stuffed Acorn Squash is a festive, gluten-free option everyone can enjoy.
A salad with kale and Brussel sprouts in a bowl from the side view.

FAQs

Can brussel sprouts be eaten raw in a salad?

Absolutely! Just be sure to shred your raw brussel sprouts before adding them to your recipe.

Do you rinse off brussel sprouts before cooking?

Yes, I recommend rinsing your brussels sprouts under cold water before cooking with them. I also recommend removing each sprout’s dark, outermost leaves to ensure maximum freshness.

Similar Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Kale Brussels Sprout Salad recipe or any other salad recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of brussels sprouts and kale salad recipe from the top view
Print

Kale Brussels Sprout Salad Recipe

This nutrient-dense Kale Brussel Sprout Salad is packed with hearty greens, toasted almonds, cheese, and sweet cranberries, all tossed in a tangy homemade Dijon dressing. Enjoy it for a light meal or serve it as a fall-inspired side dish.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 438kcal

Ingredients

For The Salad:

  • 1 bunch Tuscan Kale or Curly Kale ~1 lb
  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts finely chopped – I used my food processor
  • 1 cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • ½ cup dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds optional

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ small shallot minced (about 2 tablespoons) or red onion
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Nuts:

  • 1 cup sliced or whole almonds or chopped walnuts or pecans

Instructions

  • Prep the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water. Dry in a salad spinner. Remove the leaves from the center ribs and chop thinly. Place it in a large salad bowl.
  • Shave Brussel sprouts*: Place Brussel sprouts in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Turn the machine on and feed brussels sprouts into the tube and let the machine do all the work for you. Transfer the now-shaved Brussels sprouts into the bowl with kale.
  • Make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • Drizzle the vegetables with the dressing and give it a toss to make sure all the leaves are evenly coated with the dressing. Set aside and let it rest.
  • Place almonds in a small empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes, keeping a very close eye on and stirring frequently, until fragrant and lightly browned. Chop them up into large bite-size pieces.
  • To assemble, sprinkle the brussel sprout and kale salad with toasted almonds, parmesan cheese, and cranberries (or pomegranate arils), if using. Toss to combine and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8-7 cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • When it comes to shredding brussels sprouts, you have two other options:
    • Use a sharp pairing knife and slice one by one as thinly as you can. This takes around 10-15 minutes for a pound of raw brussels sprouts.
    • Use a mandolin. This method produces evenly sliced Brussels spouts and takes about 8-10 minutes to shred a pound of brussels sprouts. If you need advice on a good mandoline, I just purchased this one (affiliate link), and I love it.
  • To make ahead: To make this salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Assemble it right before serving.
  • To Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 2 days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

Nutrition

Calories: 438kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 901IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 253mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/feed/ 28
Air Fryer Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 03 Jan 2024 21:01:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73027 If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there…]]>

If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there are countless other ways to use this delectable recipe—a handy way to make the most of the chestnut season. Air fryer roasted chestnuts make an excellent base for my silky Chestnut Cream Soup, and they fit flawlessly into any Christmas dinner when you prepare my five-star Chestnut Dressing. Or, try whipping up my Chestnut Puree Recipe for an irresistibly creamy dish perfect for pastries, parfaits, and so much more.

Air fryer roasted chestnuts on a kitchen cloth.

Ingredients

When it comes to recipes with simple ingredients, air fried chestnuts are hands-down the easiest for your grocery list. All you need to make this toasty dish is one ingredient: chestnuts!

However, as with all one-ingredient recipes, the key to getting the best results is to begin with high-quality chestnuts. Here are just a few things to keep in mind when selecting your nuts:

Fresh chesnuts from the top view.
  • Type of chestnuts: For this recipe, I highly recommend using Italian chestnuts (also known as European chestnuts) or American chestnuts, as they peel easily and are altogether easier to work with. Chinese chestnuts—the most popular variety in Asia—also taste good, but I find that they are harder to peel, so I don’t suggest using them in this recipe.
  • Choose equally sized chestnuts: If possible, try to hand-pick chestnuts of an equal size, as they’ll roast the most evenly in the air fryer.
  • Ensure your chestnuts are of high quality: When looking for chestnuts, try to find ones that are smooth, plump, and shiny—especially those without blemishes or mold. I also encourage you to handle the chestnuts in your hand to ensure the skin isn’t dry.
  • Where to buy: You should be able to find fresh chestnuts in most U.S. grocery stores. However, they also crop up in farmer’s markets during fall and winter, should you prefer a locally grown alternative.
  • Avoid chestnut mix-ups: Though similar in name, be careful not to accidentally purchase horse chestnuts (which are toxic) or water chestnuts. These two are not the same as regular chestnuts and will drastically change the taste and texture of your recipe.

How to Prepare Chestnuts for Cooking in the Air Fryer?

Proper preparation is a must when getting ready to air fry chestnuts. These three steps will ensure your nuts are clean, tasty, and easily peelable when they come out of the air fryer.

A collage of images showing how to prepare chestnuts for air air frying.
  1. Rinse the chestnuts: Add the raw chestnuts to a colander and rinse them under cold running water. Drain them when thoroughly rinsed.
  2. Score: Lay the flat side of a chestnut on a cutting board, ensuring the rounded side (AKA the belly side) faces up. Hold the chestnut firmly with one hand and use the other to cut horizontally across the rounded face with a sharp paring knife or chestnut knife. Then, rotate the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an “X” on its top. Repeat the scoring process for the remaining chestnuts, trying not to score their inner skin.
  3. Soak chestnuts: Transfer the cut chestnuts to a bowl, cover them with cold tap water, and let them rest for 30-60 minutes.

How to Roast Chestnuts in an Air Fryer?

Air frying chestnuts is a great way to enjoy nutty, easy-to-peel treats in no time. With this easy cooking method, your chestnuts will be on the table in less than 20 minutes.

  1. Prepare your air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to cook chestnuts in air fryer.
  1. Dry the chestnuts: Drain the soaked chestnuts, transfer them to a clean kitchen towel, and dry them as much as possible. Alternatively, you may line a baking sheet with paper towels and pat them dry.
  2. Fill the air fryer basket: Arrange the scored chestnuts in your air fryer basket so that their cut sides face up. Be careful not to overcrowd the basket, as your nuts should fit comfortably in a single layer. If necessary, you may air fry your chestnuts in two batches to ensure proper air circulation.
  3. Cook the chestnuts: Roast the chestnuts in the air fryer for 17 minutes, shaking the basket once or twice during their cooking time.
  4. Steam the cooked chestnuts: Once roasted, transfer the (very hot!) chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Draw the edges of the cloth toward their center, turn the towel into a small pouch, and let the chestnuts steam for about five minutes. For an alternate steaming method, place your air-fried chestnuts in a paper bag and roll down the top so the steam gets trapped inside. Again, let the nuts steam for five minutes or for up to 30 minutes.
Images showing how to peel air fried chestnuts.
  1. Peel: After the chestnuts steam, grasp the pouch in your hand and gently squeeze it to loosen the chestnut shells. Then, carefully peel off the outer shell of the nuts while they’re still hot by lightly pulling back on their scored “X.” Be sure you’re removing the papery skin to expose the yellow flesh inside. If you can’t remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, you may use a small sharp knife to assist you, being careful not to pierce the yellow inner nut.
  2. Serve: Enjoy your air fryer roasted chestnuts while they’re still warm.

How to Store Air Fryer Roasted Chestnuts?

After roasting chestnuts in an air fryer, the last thing you want to do is let a single one go to waste. With these easy tips, you can store this delectable recipe to snack on throughout the week or for long-lasting meal prep.

  • Store: When ready for storage, let your air roasted chestnuts reach room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your peeled air fryer chestnuts, transfer them to a freezer bag and remove as much air as possible. Then, tightly seal the bag and freeze your chestnuts for up to three months.
  • Thaw: When ready to thaw, remove your chestnuts from the freezer and defrost them in the fridge overnight.

Expert Tips

The best way to cook chestnuts in an air fryer is by preheating it to 350°F (175°C), scoring each chestnut, and roasting them for 17 minutes or until the shells open and the insides are tender.  However, I learned a few lessons during my recipe testing and would like to share them with you:

  • Scoring: Because chestnuts can be slippery, it’s important to be safe when scoring them, which is essential for easy peeling later on. Therefore, I recommend placing your chestnuts on a cutting board with their flat sides facing down and rounded sides facing up. Then, firmly secure the chestnut with one hand and use a sharp, serrated, or chestnut knife to score the rounded edge in the shape of an “X.”
  • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for hours on end, I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
  • Air fryer temperature: When making this recipe, you may consider speeding up the roasting process by increasing your air fryer temperature. However, we found that cooking chestnuts in the air fryer at higher temperatures (like 400 degrees F. and 375 degrees F.) led to a fully cooked exterior and uncooked interior. Therefore, we recommend keeping your cooking temperature low—ideally 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes—to ensure the whole chestnut roasts at an even rate.
  • Don’t overcrowd: As with all air fryer recipes, you mustn’t crowd your air fryer basket while cooking, as proper air circulation is essential for thoroughly roasting your chestnuts. We were able to fit a pound of chestnuts into our basket, though this amount may change depending on the size of your air fryer and individual chestnuts. No matter how many chestnuts you can fit into your basket, just be sure to arrange them so that their scored “X” faces up.
  • Look for visual cues: If you’re not sure whether you’ve fully roasted your chestnuts by the end of their cooking time, I recommend looking for the following visual cues: When ready to steam and peel, your chestnuts’ scored edges should begin opening up, and their exteriors should lightly brown. However, because every air fryer behaves differently, I suggest testing a chestnut at the 15-minute mark to see whether it’s ready to serve or needs more roasting time.
  • Peel while still warm: If you want a chestnut with a smooth, nutty taste, you must remove its fuzzy skin before serving. Therefore, I suggest using either of my five-minute steaming methods (either by a wrapped towel or paper bag) to loosen the nuts’ outer and inner skins before peeling, making the process much easier.
  • Buy more than you need: It’s inevitable when buying chestnuts that some of them will be “bad,” whether they’re moldy, blemished, or otherwise spoiled—with special consideration to their time of harvesting. Therefore, I highly advise purchasing more chestnuts than you need to eliminate these undesirable picks and still end up with a whole serving.
  • A word on easy peeling: My step-by-step instructions are a foolproof way to ensure easy peeling and excellent taste for high-quality chestnuts. However—no matter how closely you follow the steps—it won’t be possible to get good results if you’re using chestnuts of poor quality. Plus, keep in mind that the age and size of the chestnuts matter, so I recommend getting the most 
Peeled chestnuts in a bowl from the top view.

How to Season?

Making roasted chestnuts in the air fryer gives you the freedom to play around with all your favorite flavorings. With these mouthwatering seasoning ideas, you can transform your chestnuts into everything from a decadent dessert to a savory snack.

  • Honey and vanilla: If you want your air fryer chestnuts to have an irresistibly dessert-like finish, mix two tablespoons of honey with a teaspoon of vanilla. Once thoroughly combined, drizzle the honey mixture over your cooked chestnuts for a great holiday season treat.
  • Melted butter and maple syrup: Richly sweet and easy to customize, try drizzling your chestnuts with a mixture of melted butter and maple syrup. You can even sprinkle ground cinnamon over your nuts if desired for a warmer, woody flavor.
  • Balsamic glaze with a sprinkle of sea salt: Coating your air-roasted chestnuts with a rich balsamic reduction is an easy way to give your recipe complexly sweet notes—a flavor profile that tastes straight out of Europe. Finish this tasty variation with a sprinkle of sea salt, and every bite will explode with flavor.
  • Asian style: To give your air fried chestnuts a zingy, Asian-inspired flavor, coat them with a blend of soy sauce, a hint of sesame oil, and a sprinkle of sesame seeds. This umami-packed recipe transforms sweet chestnuts into a savory treat perfect for all-day snacking.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to roast chestnuts in an air fryer? This beginner-friendly guide will answer any remaining questions, from ideal cooking times to expert peeling suggestions.

How long to cook chestnuts in an air fryer?

To ensure your chestnuts develop warm, tender insides without burning their exterior, I recommend cooking them at 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes and shaking the basket 1-2 times during the process.

Can you eat the brown skin on chestnuts?

Yes, chestnuts’ brown skin is technically edible. However, it has a fuzzy texture and bitter taste that may interfere with the overall flavor of your roasted chestnuts. Therefore, I recommend removing them before eating.

How to know if my chestnuts are fully cooked?

When checking your chestnuts for doneness, look for a few easy visual cues: The outside of your nuts should turn lightly brown, their scored edges should begin opening up, and their insides should be warm and soft by the time they’re ready to remove from the air fryer.

If you try this Air Fryer Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried chestnuts from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Chestnuts Recipe

This air fryer roasted chestnuts recipe is a quicker alternative to roasting chestnuts in the oven. With this easy recipe, you can make air fryer roasted chestnuts half the time, serve it as a snack, or use it in your favorite chestnut recipes.
Course Snack
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 17 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 222kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 lb Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European)
  • 3 cups Water

Instructions

  • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
  • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board, making sure that the rounded side (aka the belly side) is facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one.) Then, turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Preheat your air fryer to 350 °F.
  • Drain chestnuts and transfer them onto a clean kitchen towel. Dry them off as much as you can.
  • Place them in the air fryer basket, making sure that the cut side is facing up. Do not overcrowd the basket. If needed, you can bake it in two batches.
  • Air fry them for 17 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through the air-roasting process.
  • Once the air frying is completed, transfer the now-very hot chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag to do this. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag to trap the steam inside, and let it steam for 5 minutes.
  • Holding the pouch in your hand, give it a gentle squeeze to loosen the shells. Then, carefully remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X,” peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
  • Enjoy while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a little less than a pound of chestnuts. If you are serving it as a snack, you would likely end up with 7-8 chestnuts (depending on their size) per person if you are serving it to 4 people. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Air frying temperature: Don’t be tempted to increase the temperature of the air fryer to roast them faster. I have tried air frying chestnuts in higher temps to shorten the cooking time, but ended up with chestnuts that were burned on the outside and raw on the inside.
  • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for a long time (8 hours or so), I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
  • Chestnuts: There is a direct correlation between the age, size, and origin of the chestnuts and the quality of the end result. Over the years of cooking chestnuts, I learned that chestnuts from Europe and the US tend to peel easier than chestnuts from China. Needless to say, it is best to buy the freshest chestnuts you can get your hands on for the best results.
  • Store: Bring cooked chestnuts to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.

Nutrition

Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/feed/ 10
Bread Dipping Oil https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/#comments Sun, 31 Dec 2023 05:01:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25983 So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t…]]>

So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t wait for the olive oil dipping sauce and crusty bread to be placed on your table. It’s restaurant-style at its best (I’m looking at you, Carrabba’s Italian Grill, Bertucci’s, California Pizza Kitchen, Olive Garden, Maggino’s, and Macaroni Grill!) That is this recipe!

With the right mix of bread dipping seasoning and the best olive oil you can find, you can make restaurant-style food in your home kitchen. It serves as the perfect appetizer for those get-togethers with family and friends. Who knew bread and olive oil could taste so good?!

Person holding bread dipped in oil.

Ingredients You Will Need

You need a handful of basic ingredients to make this olive oil dip for bread. The good news is that the recipe itself is so forgiving that if you are missing an ingredient or two, you can easily substitute it with another ingredient. Below is what you’ll need, including the best oil for bread dipping:

Olive oil dipping spices and herbs from the top view.
  • Fresh or Dried Herbs: You will need fresh or dried basil, oregano, thyme, and rosemary to make this olive oil dip. If you decide to use dried herbs, I recommend using half the amount as they tend to be stronger. You can find the correct measurements in the recipe card below.
  • Seasoning and Spices: I know it may seem a bit basic, but the salt and pepper you use make all the difference. If you can, avoid table salt and pre-ground black pepper. Use flaky sea salt or kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper for the best flavor. However, if you do not mind your olive oil bread dip being a little bit spicy, you can also add a pinch of red pepper flakes (or red chili flakes) for some heat.
  • Olive Oil: There are so many olive oils on supermarket shelves these days, and it’s hard to know which one is the best olive oil for dipping bread. A general rule of thumb is to purchase cold-pressed extra virgin olive oil from one supplier or country. These are the fruitiest and most flavorful. Avoid olive oil blends or refined versions. 
  • Garlic: Garlic is a big flavor provider and enhancer in this olive dipping oil recipe. When mixed with spices (or fresh herbs), it infuses oil with additional Mediterranean flavors. However, it is also such a delicate ingredient. Use this list as a guide depending on how strong you want the garlic flavor when whipping up your own garlic bread cheese dip.
    • Minced Fresh Garlic cloves: Using fresh minced garlic will provide a strong garlic flavor. I recommend using this version right before you are going to serve. 
    • Oven Roasted Garlic – Roasted garlic olive oil dip is my absolute favorite! When you roast garlic, it brings out a natural, caramel sweetness that is simply divine. Once the garlic cloves are roasted, you should be able to easily mash them with a fork and mix them in. Use the moment you are going to serve. 
    • Garlic Powder – A good substitute if you want to make olive oil dip ahead. Use 1 teaspoon of garlic powder to replace the fresh.
  • Cheese: Grated Parmesan cheese is a classic ingredient in any restaurant-style Italian dipping oil, but it is an optional ingredient here. You can omit using it if you want to make it vegan or dairy-free. If you do not have Parmesan cheese, you can also use grated Pecorino Romano, cubed feta, or those small mozzarella balls for fresh, cheesy flavor.
  • Acid: Acid gives it a fresh flavor and a nice tang and balances the richness of the olive oil, so don’t skip it! My favorite is freshly squeezed lemon juice. But you can make an olive oil and balsamic vinegar bread dip with a splash of balsamic vinegar as well. If you decide to go with balsamic vinegar, simply use a tablespoon of balsamic in place of freshly squeezed lemon juice.

Optional Ingredients and Substitutions:

  • Olives: While it is not a traditional ingredient, a handful of chopped green or black (such as Kalamata) olives would take this Italian olive oil bread dip up a notch, especially if you are a fan of olives.
  • Italian Seasoning: For those times I am short on time, I keep a jar of homemade Italian seasoning in my pantry so that I can make this in minutes. Below is my go-to Italian seasoning recipe:
    • 1 tablespoon dried basil
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • ½ tablespoon dried rosemary
    • ½ tablespoon dried thyme
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • Shallots: Thinly sliced shallots would be a great substitute for garlic if preferred.
  • Other spices: While the combination of basil, oregano, rosemary, and thyme is often used in Italian restaurants, you can also use other olive oil dipping spices such as paprika, dried dill, dried sage, parsley, and even fennel seeds whenever you want to switch it up.

How to Make Olive Oil Bread Dip?

This olive oil dipping sauce for bread comes together quickly and easily. Below are the steps:

A woman is pouring olive oil to make Italian Bread Dipping oil
  1. Mix the herbs and spices: To make it, mix together dried or fresh rosemary, basil, oregano, thyme, and red pepper flakes (if using) in a shallow bowl. 
  2. Add the olive oil: Pour in the olive oil and lemon juice (or balsamic vinegar). Add in the garlic and parmesan cheese.
  3. Add the spices: Season lightly with salt and pepper. Stir it well to make sure that everything is fully mixed.
  4. Rest (Optional): If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour for the flavors to meld together nicely. 
  5. Serve: Place the bowl of seasoned oil on a large plate with sliced bread around it. Serve!

What Kind of Bread Do You Dip in Olive Oil Bread Dip?

When it comes to choosing the best bread for dipping in oil, you have so many options. While any fresh bread would work, below are a few suggestions:

Garlic bread dipping sauce in a bowl with bread on the side.
  • Italian bread: The classic Italian breads like fresh focaccia and ciabatta would be wonderful to dip into this homemade bread dipping oil.
  • French Bread: With its crispy crust and chewy interior, French baguette is a wonderful option. It also has a long and thin shape, which makes it ideal to slice and dip. Alternatively, if you prefer a soft bread for dipping, you can serve it with storebought or homemade brioche
  • Sourdough Bread: The tangy flavors of sourdough pair beautifully with this garlic bread dip. Plus, its dense texture holds the oil well.
  • Homemade bread: If you do have the time, I highly recommend making my No Knead Bread or Rustic Olive Bread (my personal favorite bread to serve it with.) They are both wonderfully crusty with a hearty texture and robust flavor.
  • Garlic Bread: The rich and savory flavor of garlic bread compliments the taste of herb and oil bread dip. If you need a good recipe, try my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
  • Pita Bread: Widely used in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine, pita’s soft and slightly chewy texture is a good choice for dipping.

How To Make Ahead and Store This Dipping Oil?

While making this Italian dipping sauce takes no more than 5 minutes, with a few adjustments, you can make it ahead and store it for serving later. Here is how I do it: 

  • Make Ahead: If you prefer to make this bread dipping oil a few days ahead, I recommend using dried herbs and spices instead of fresh herbs. Also, it is best to use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic, as when raw garlic sits in oil for an extended period of time, food-borne illness can occur. To make ahead, mix all the ingredients (except cheese) in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and store it at room temperature. Finally, I would add the parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Storage: If you are making this olive oil dipping recipe with fresh herbs and fresh garlic, it is best to consume it on the day it is made or store it in an airtight container for an additional day or so. However, if you are using dried herbs and garlic powder, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

Expert Tips:

There is a reason why this recipe went viral on social media. It is not only super easy to make but also ready in minutes. 

With that being said, during our recipe testing, we learned a few lessons that I’d like to share so that you can have the best olive oil garlic dip for bread on your first try:

  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.
  • Serve at room temperature: Olive oil tends to become cloudy and thicken when refrigerated. Therefore to maintain its ideal, fluid consistency and make it easier (and more pleasant) to dip, I recommend serving this bread oil dip at room temperature. 
  • Warm the bread: If you have the time, serve your dipping oil with warm bread as they do in fancy Italian restaurants.
  • Serving children: This easy bread dip is perfect to serve to family and friends, especially during the holiday season. To adjust the recipe for children, omit the red pepper flakes and use less of the overpowering dried herbs like rosemary and thyme. 
  • Dip it “well”: If you let the bread sit in the oil for a good minute or so, it absorbs even more of its delicious flavor.
  • Serving suggestions: While you can serve this bread and olive oil appetizer by themselves, for a special occasion, you can also make it a part of your meat and cheese platter. And if you want to amp up your weeknight dinner, try drizzling it on fish before roasting it in the oven.
  • Salad Dressing: I am pretty sure that you won’t have leftovers, but if you do, this olive oil bread dip makes a great salad dressing.
Person drizzling olive oil spread for bread into a jar.

FAQs

What kind of oil do you dip bread in?

The most commonly used and recommended oil for bread dipping is extra virgin olive oil (EVOO). A good olive oil for bread dipping is one that uses olives from a single origin. EVOO is preferred for its fruity and peppery flavors that pair well with various types of bread. However, while it is not common, you can also use commercially sold infused olive oils, avocado oil, or walnut oil to make this dipping oil for bread.

How to season olive oil for dipping bread?

Seasoning olive oil for dipping bread involves infusing it with a variety of flavors. In most cases, olive oil is infused with a combination of dried or fresh herbs (such as thyme, basil, rosemary, and oregano), spices and seasonings (like red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper) and acid (like lemon juice, red wine or balsamic vinegar.)

How long does bread dipping oil last?

If you make a version of this recipe using dried herbs and seasonings, you can store it for a long time, potentially up to a month. However, if you use fresh ingredients such as fresh garlic and Parmesan cheese, it should be used within 5 days.

Why dip bread in olive oil?

Dipping bread in olive oil is a practice enjoyed in Mediterranean cultures, often a part of the dining experience, reflecting the region’s culinary heritage where olive oil is harvested and produced locally. Additionally, olive oil adds a rich flavor to the bread. The fruity and peppery flavors of oil paired with bread create a delightful experience.

If you try this bread dip recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Bread dipped in olive oil dipping sauce in a person's hand.
Print

Bread Dipping Oil Recipe

Homemade Bread dipping oil just like they do in your favorite Italian restaurant! Made with extra virgin olive oil, dried spices (or fresh herbs), lemon juice, and parmesan cheese, this Italian-restaurant-style olive oil bread dip is guaranteed to impress.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 329kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced or one teaspoon of garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese shredded (optional)
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place dried basil, thyme, oregano, rosemary, and red pepper flakes in a bowl. Pour in the olive oil. Give it a mix.
  • Add in the garlic, lemon juice, and parmesan cheese. Stir to combine and serve with crusty bread on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This bread dip oli recipe makes a cup of dipping oil, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer with bread on the side. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Fresh herbs: If you are growing your own herbs, you can use fresh herbs instead of dried herbs following the measurements below. Be sure to chop them before using in the recipe.
    • 1 tablespoon fresh basil
    • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano
    • 1/2 teaspoon fresh thyme
    • 1/4 teaspoon fresh rosemary
  • Storage: If you are making this recipe using dried herbs, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If using fresh herbs and fresh garlic, I would recommend storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.

Nutrition

Calories: 329kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 47IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/feed/ 63
Chestnut Puree https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-puree/ https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-puree/#respond Mon, 04 Dec 2023 16:11:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72257 Chestnut Puree vs. Chestnut Spread Before we go into the details of making chestnut puree at home, allow me to…]]>

Chestnut Puree vs. Chestnut Spread

Before we go into the details of making chestnut puree at home, allow me to explain the difference between chestnut puree and chestnut spread. Because even though they both include blending chestnuts to a creamy consistency, chestnut purée and chestnut spread aren’t the same thing.

Chestnut purée, also referred to as marron paste, tends to have a nuttier, earthier taste, as it comes together with a mixture of cooked chestnuts, milk (or water), a little (optional) sugar, and vanilla bean (or extract). Because of its mild, versatile flavor, chefs often use it in sweet and savory recipes. Furthermore, chestnut puree recipes usually remove most excess liquid, creating a more paste-like texture.

Pureed chestnuts in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

By contrast, a chestnut spread recipe, also known as crème de marrons, is much creamier, smoother, and sweeter, combining mashed candied chestnuts, simple syrup (or glucose syrup), and vanilla extract. This mixture’s sweeter notes, in turn, make it a go-to for sweeter recipes, such as desserts (such as French Mont Blanc), a spread for toast, and pastry fillings. In fact, one of the most popular brands of chestnut sauce is the sweet French chestnut spread called Creme de Marrons de L’Ardèche by Clément Faugier (affiliate link.)

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four simple ingredients to prepare this French chestnut paste recipe, making it one of the easiest, most cost-effective recipes you’ll cook up this season.

Ingredients for the marron paste recipe from the top view.
  • Chestnuts: Selecting suitable chestnuts is critical to making this recipe smooth and nutty. If you buy cooked chestnuts from a store, make sure that they don’t have any added sugar and that the only ingredient is, in fact, “chestnuts.” My favorite brand is Blanchard & Blanchard’s organic whole chestnuts (affiliate link), which are already roasted and peeled. If you prefer to cook fresh chestnuts, I recommend cooking them following my recipe for boiling chestnuts. Alternatively, you can also cook them using my oven-roasted chestnuts, air fryer roasted chestnuts, or even fire-roasted chestnuts recipes, but please be aware that if you use these methods, you will end up with a chestnut puree with a slightly smokey flavor.
  • Liquid: To make the classic version of this French chestnut recipe, I recommend using whole cow’s milk to simmer your chestnuts. This simple addition will give your puree a delicious creaminess and temper its earthiness. However, you can also use almond milk or water for a vegan chestnut puree recipe.
  • Sweetener: Granulated sugar is the most common ingredient in sweetened chestnut puree, but natural sweeteners, like cane sugar, coconut sugar, or brown sugar, would also work. Furthermore, darker sugars will give your recipe a deeper, toffee-like taste. You can also add pitted dates to your cooking liquid for a healthier, more natural sweetness, as they’ll soften and infuse the mixture with their fruity, caramel undertones. If you’d prefer to make an unsweetened chestnut puree, omit the sugar in this recipe.
  • Vanilla: Vanilla bean—or even vanilla bean paste (affiliate link) —makes a great addition to this chestnuts puree recipe, lending it sweet, delicate, and aromatic notes. However, if you’re looking for a less expensive, more everyday ingredient, you may use 1-2 teaspoons of vanilla extract (affiliate link) instead. Just be sure to add the vanilla extract to your puree only after you finish simmering, as adding it during cooking will evaporate its alcohol.
  • Kosher Salt

Optional Add-Ins & Recipe Variations

  • Chocolate or Cocoa powder: Adding cocoa powder or chocolate to your marron paste would work wonderfully to give it a complex richness and make it a delicious chestnut recipe you can use in your recipes. The chocolate chestnut puree also makes an incredibly delicious snack you can literally eat from the jar with a spoon. Simply add a few tablespoons of your favorite chocolate chips or cocoa powder while the chestnuts are still warm during the pureeing process.
  • Alcohol: If you want to create authentic Hungarian chestnut puree at home, mix in a tablespoon of rum or cognac to your recipe. Then, you can quickly whip up a chestnut puree dessert by serving it with more sugar, another pour of rum, and a topping of whipped cream.
  • Make it savory: If you want to make your chestnut recipes savory—just like you would for my hearty Chestnut Stuffing!—begin by substituting this recipe’s cooking liquid for vegetable stock or chicken broth. Then, instead of adding vanilla bean, steep your favorite fresh herbs, like thyme, sage, or rosemary, in the broth. Simmer the chestnuts as usual, then remove the sprigs from the mixture before pureeing.

How to Make Chestnut Puree?

This chestnut paste recipe comes together in a snap with only thirty minutes and four ingredients. Even beginner chefs can enjoy this simple chestnut dish’s earthy, mild nuttiness.

The steps to making the sweetened chestnut puree in a collage of images.
  1. Mix the ingredients: Add the chestnuts, milk, sugar, and vanilla bean to a saucepan and heat it over medium-high heat.
  2. Simmer the milk: Bring the mixture to a boil, then turn the heat down to medium. Stirring frequently, let the liquid simmer for 20-25 minutes or until the milk reduces to ¾ cup and chestnuts are softened.
  3. Strain the chestnuts: Place a mesh strainer over a bowl and pour the milk-chestnut mixture into it. Save the removed liquid in the bowl and remove the vanilla bean. You can also do this with the help of a slotted spoon.
French chestnut spread after it is pureed in a food processor.
  1. Puree the chestnuts: Place the cooked chestnuts into the bowl of your food processor. Process them until pureed, stopping a few times to scrape the sides of the bowl.
  2. Adjust consistency: Depending on the recipe in which you plan to use your puree, you may adjust its consistency by adding the reserved cooking liquid as you blend your chestnuts.

How to Store and Freeze?

You won’t want to let a single teaspoon go to waste after making this easy chestnut puree. If you wish to store it for the next day or freeze it for months, these pro storage tips have you covered.

  • Store: To store your chestnut puree, first bring it to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. You can then store it in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: Freezing is an easy way to keep this recipe fresh for up to three months. Simply let your puree reach room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze it. A day before you are ready to serve, thaw it in the fridge overnight. You may find that the paste may become watery or separate after thawing. If this occurs, give it a good stir to return it to its original texture.

How to Use Chestnut Puree?

One of the most common ways to enjoy chestnut puree is like the French do: spread it on toast or use it as a topping for yogurt. But why stop there? With your freshly made chestnut puree, you can create dishes that go far beyond the classics. Below is a variety of ideas for incorporating this rich, flavorful mashed chestnut recipe into a range of sweet, savory, and creamy recipes:

  • Mont Blanc: This iconic French dessert begins by placing orange syrup and whipped cream on top of a small round of white cake, topped with a meringue. Once assembled, chefs often cover the whole dessert with a thin layer of whipped cream, followed by a thick coating of chestnut paste squeezed in the shape of vermicelli noodles. This vermicelli-style mont blanc strikes a decadent balance between nutty, sugary, and delicate flavors.
  • Monte Bianco (Italian): Similar to the French Mont Blanc, this simple Italian version calls for a vermicelli-style serving of sweetened chestnut puree topped with whipped cream—a quick and sweet way to make a five-star dessert!
  • Filling for pastries: Not only is this four-ingredient puree delicious by itself, but it also makes an incomparably delectable chestnut filling for cookie sandwiches, croissants, eclairs, and crepes.
  • Flavoring for baked goods: Want to give your baked goods a smooth, nutty taste? This marron paste makes the perfect addition to all your favorite baked recipes, from cakes to muffins, cookie batters, and even bread puddings for a uniquely delicious flavor.
  • Topping: Pack your breakfast with an extra dose of tasty nutrition by using your chestnut puree to top your morning Chia Seed Oatmeal, Overnight Steel Cut Oatmeal, or Almond Flour Pancakes. You can even start your day on the lighter side by layering your chestnut blend into a Yogurt Parfait.
  • Blend into smoothies, custards, or ice cream: Try adding some sweetened chestnut puree to your favorite smoothie, custard, or ice cream recipes. Adding a dollop of this chestnut paste is an easy way to switch up your regular treats with new flavors.
  • Stuffing and savory puddings: Who says chestnut puree can’t be savory? This simple ingredient makes an excellent addition to savory dishes like Chestnut Stuffing and Chestnut Puree Soup, and it even works as a flavor-packed soup thickener.
  • Cheese platters: One of the easiest ways to serve this gourmet paste is alongside a plate of crackers and candied chestnuts, taking your Meat and Cheese Platter to the next level. Your chestnut lovers will thank you.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a French chef to make a chestnut puree worthy of a Parisian café. Here are a few pro tips to help you make a chestnut recipe that’s perfectly creamy, flavorful, and customizable.

  • Good quality chestnuts: It’s no surprise that chestnuts are the star ingredient of this puree recipe. And not all chestnuts are created equal. My recommendation is to purchase Italian or American chestnuts instead of Chinese chestnuts, as they tend to have a richer flavor and it is easier to peel them. However, if all you can find is the Chinese variety, then my recommendation is to boil them to use in this recipe. Finally, it is probably obvious, but the chestnuts we are using here are totally different from water chestnuts, so be sure to look for the right chestnuts.
  • Remove inner skin: If you’re boiling your chestnuts, be sure to remove their inner (fuzzy) skin before pureeing them. However, because this layer often clings to the walnuts harder than other layers, don’t worry if your chestnuts break during removal.
  • Keep a close eye on it: While simmering your cooking liquid, keep an eye on the mixture, stirring occasionally while gently breaking the chestnuts with the back of a spoon. As the cooking progresses, this liquid will thicken, and you might begin to see some scorching (especially if you are using milk as your cooking liquid) near the end. Stirring will keep the mixture from burning and encourage a more consistent thickening.
  • Adjust consistency: Depending on the recipe you plan to use, you may want this puree to have a thicker or thinner consistency. If you prefer a denser, more paste-like texture, strain all the cooking liquid from the chestnuts before pureeing. For a creamier, more delicate texture—more like the consistency of the chestnut spread—reserve the cooking liquid after straining the chestnuts and add it to the food processor until the puree reaches your desired consistency.
  • Adjust the sweetness: Although it may seem like a lot, two tablespoons of sugar is very mild in this recipe—especially if you’re not using the cooking liquid in your paste. However, feel free to adjust the amount of sugar you use according to your tastebuds and selected recipe.
  • Adding vanilla: Because of its mild yet rich notes, vanilla bean (or vanilla pod) is ideal for this mashed chestnut recipe, but vanilla bean paste (affiliate link) would also work. If you don’t have either, you can also use vanilla extract, but be sure to add it at the end of preparation, as the alcohol will evaporate during the simmering process.
  • Blending: I use a food processor to give my chestnut puree an ideally creamy texture, occasionally stopping and scraping the sides. However, a blender or a potato masher would also work if you don’t have a food processor on hand.

FAQs

What is chestnut puree made of?

Chestnut puree is a simple, creamy mixture made with only four ingredients: chestnuts, a liquid (such as milk or water), sugar, and vanilla bean.

Can you freeze chestnut puree?

Absolutely! To freeze your puree, let it cool first. Then, place it in an airtight container with extra room at the top to accommodate any expansion. Once secured, you can freeze your chestnut paste for up to three months.

Is chestnut cream the same as chestnut puree?

Not quite. Chestnut cream—also known as a chestnut spread or creme de marron—is a sweeter, creamier recipe than chestnut puree, and you can often find it in desserts and sweet recipes. Chestnut puree is thicker, milder, and more versatile, having uses in both sweet and savory recipes.

How to sweeten chestnut puree?

Suppose you prefer your chestnut puree on the sweeter side. In that case, you can enhance its flavor by adding more sugar, whether it’s traditional granulated sugar, cane sugar, or brown sugar. You can also sweeten your paste by adding dates to the cooking liquid and blending them into your chestnut mixture once soft.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Creme de Marron recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chestnut Puree in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chestnut Puree Recipe

Whether you make a batch to use in your dessert recipes during the Christmas season or you just want to spread some on your morning toast for breakfast with a European flair, this chestnut puree is sure to add a delicious and unique touch to your meals.
Course Condiment
Cuisine French
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 238kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups cooked chestnuts* or 16 oz cooked chestnuts drained – 350 g.
  • 2 cups whole milk or almond milk or water
  • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar or cane or coconut sugar
  • ½ vanilla bean or 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Pinch of kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place chestnuts, milk, sugar, vanilla bean, and salt in a saucepan over medium-high heat.
  • Bring to a boil, turn down the heat to medium heat, and let it simmer, stirring frequently, for 20-25 minutes or until the milk is reduced to ½ cup. After the first 15 minutes, it starts to thicken quite a bit, so keep a close eye on it.
  • Place a mesh strainer over a bowl and carefully strain the chestnut and milk mixture, saving the liquid at the bottom. Remove the vanilla bean.
  • Transfer the chestnuts to the bowl of a food processor and process until pureed, stopping and scraping down the sides a few times.
  • Depending on the recipe you plan to use your chestnut puree, adjust its consistency by adding the reserved liquid as it is blending.

Notes

    • Yields: This recipe yields about 1 ½ cups of pureed chestnuts. I listed it as 4 servings but you can adjust the serving size according to the recipe you are using it in. The nutritional values below are per serving based on 4 servings.
  • Chestnuts: You can buy already cooked and peeled chestnuts from the store or cook your own chestnuts. If you purchase it from the grocery store, make sure the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts. If you decide to cook them yourself, I recommend following my boiled chestnuts recipe. Alternatively, you can cook chestnuts in the oven or roast them on an open fire, but please be aware that the end product might have a slightly smokier taste.
  • Sweetener: While the most popular sweetener used in this recipe is granulated sugar, you can use cane sugar, brown sugar, or even coconut sugar as well. The darker sugar varieties provide a toffee-like taste. Alternatively, for a healthier option, you can substitute sugar with a few pitted dates.
  • Vanilla: If you can’t get your hands on a vanilla bean, you can substitute it with vanilla extract. However, if you use vanilla extract, add it at the very end after the cooking is complete. Otherwise, all the alcohol (and flavors of vanilla) in the vanilla extract will evaporate during the cooking process.
  • Vanilla bean: When using a vanilla bean, it is best the scrape the beans out of the vanilla pod using a sharp knife. You can still put the whole (scraped) vanilla pot in the cooking liquid for flavor.
  • Storage: Bring the pureed chestnuts to room temperature and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Freeze the leftover chestnut puree in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 48mg | Potassium: 529mg | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 216IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-puree/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 28 Nov 2023 16:41:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72183 Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you…]]>

Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you might like our Fingerling Smashed Potatoes as well.

Air fried fingerling potatoes on a plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Air-frying fingerling potatoes require only a handful of basic ingredients to achieve their tasty texture and incomparable flavor. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Fingerling potatoes: As the name suggests, you will need fingerling potatoes for this air fryer potato dish. Though you don’t need to peel your potatoes before using, be sure to remove any blemishes from the potato skin and cut the potatoes evenly—preferably halved lengthwise. While we used the yellow (one color) variety, this recipe would also work with colorful fingerling potatoes, which are usually sold at grocery stores during the holiday season.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my fingerling potatoes their thorough seasoning and crisp outsides. However, any other neutral-flavored vegetable oil, like avocado oil, will also work.
  • Parsley: Both fresh and dried parsley will give this fingerling potato recipe a five-star presentation and a pop of bright, garden-fresh taste.
  • Seasonings: I’ve found that the best seasoning mix for this dish is garlic powder, salt, and pepper—a simple, balanced, and savory combination. However, you can use other spices like paprika, ground cumin, and ground coriander if they match the flavor profile of the dish you are serving them with.

Substitutions and Other Seasoning Options

  • Garlic butter: My buttery Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to take these air-roasted fingerling potatoes to the next level and turn them into a restaurant-quality side. If you happen to have some on hand, simply use a tablespoon of it instead of using olive oil. 
  • Parmesan cheese: Who can say “no” to the nutty, rich, cheesy taste of garlic parmesan fingerling potatoes? While I don’t recommend adding the cheese to the potatoes before air frying them, I highly recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its buttery flavor. 
  • Lemon juice or vinegar: Give your fingerling potatoes an authentic English spin by drizzling them with lemon juice or vinegar. This simple addition adds a bright tang that immediately lightens the potatoes’ heartier base.
  • Spice mixture: The best way to customize this air-fried potato recipe is to use a spice mixture that matches the other dishes on your menu. Try flavoring your fingerling potatoes with my Blackening Seasoning for smoky, spicy, and bold Cajun flavors. Or, use Italian Seasoning or Mediterranean Spice Mix for a more herbaceous, zesty finish.
  • Fresh herbs: Sprinkling your air fryer fingerling potatoes with fresh rosemary or chopped thyme is an easy way to give this dish a sophisticated, herbal finish. However, many different herbs (i.e., fresh parsley, chives, sage, or cilantro) would also work if they match the flavors in your other dishes.

How to Cook Fingerling Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Once you learn how to air fry fingerling potatoes, you’ll likely never go back to cooking them in the oven. These hassle-free instructions will show you how to get perfectly tender-crisp potatoes in six steps.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to air fryer fingerling potatoes.
  1. Mix the seasonings: Add the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper to a large bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly mixed.
  2. Coat the potatoes: Add the fingerling potatoes to the olive oil mixture and toss them until they have an even coating.
  3. Layer the basket: Arrange the coated potatoes in the air fryer basket in a single layer, avoiding overcrowding.
  4. Cook: Air fry the fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes, shaking the air fryer tray halfway through. When done, the potatoes should be tender when pierced with a knife. If they need more time after 15 minutes, cook them in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  5. Serve: Transfer the air-fried fingerling potatoes to a serving platter, and—if desired—sprinkle it with fresh or dried herbs.

How to Store and Reheat?

After making fingerling potato recipes in the air fryer, you don’t have to sacrifice a single bite of leftovers. Though I recommend enjoying this recipe on the day you make it, these storage tips will keep your potatoes ready to eat days after preparation.

  • Store: You can store your cooked fingerling potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place your fingerling potatoes in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

How to Serve Air Fried Fingerling Potatoes?

Air-frying fingerling potatoes is a great way to add a tender, savory taste to any meal, whether it be a weeknight dinner, a simple snack, or a feast for a special occasion. Below are a few serving suggestions to help you with menu planning:

  • Main proteins: Few combinations are as tasty as this simple yet delicious side dish and a hearty, protein-packed main course. For a light, zesty Mediterranean menu, I recommend serving your potatoes alongside perfectly portioned Chicken Skewers in the Oven or my tangy Greek Yogurt Chicken. Or, for a more decadent spread, my Baked Chicken Parm is a crisp, rich, and cheesy dish guaranteed to impress any dinner guest.
  • Seafood: Inspired by the classic fish-and-chips pairing, this easy side dish makes a great addition to dozens of seafood menus. I love balancing the hearty savor of these air fryer potato wedges with fan-favorite recipes, like my smoky and light Baked Blackened Cod and zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon Fillet.
  • Snack: Making roasted fingerling potatoes in the air fryer is a quick, simple way to please the whole family with a tasty snack, appetizer, or game-day finger food. To brighten their hardier taste, serve these crispy potatoes with your favorite tomato-based sauce, like ketchup or Basil Tomato Sauce. Or, serve them with creamy sauces, like Ranch Dressing with Greek Yogurt or Blue Cheese Sauce Without Cream, for a tangier, richer flavor.
  • Potato Salads: If you are a fan of roasted potato salads, consider trying your crispy air fryer fingerling potatoes as an innovative twist. These potatoes can not only elevate your potato salad with their crunch but also serve as a crunchy addition when chopped and sprinkled over salads.

Expert Tips

While making this fingerling potato recipe is quite easy and straightforward, during our recipe testing, we learned a few important things to help you get crisp, tender, and flavorful potatoes on your first try. Below are a few helpful tips for success:

  • Dry and clean: Begin by giving your potatoes a good scrub and thoroughly patting them dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. Damp potatoes won’t coat well with the seasoning mixture, and this oiled exterior is necessary to help the potatoes crisp up in the air fryer.
  • Single layer: When cooking fingerling potatoes in the air fryer, it’s essential not to overcrowd them in the basket. Air frying only works if the hot air can evenly circulate throughout the chamber, so if not all of your potatoes fit in the basket, I recommend cooking them in batches. 
  • Shake the basket: I suggest shaking your air fryer basket halfway through air frying your fingerling potatoes to ensure even cooking. This step will also help you ascertain how much more time your potatoes will need before eating.
  • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
  • Air fryer brand: Every air fryer is different, so depending on which brand you own, you may have to adjust your potatoes’ cooking time and temperature accordingly. 
  • No need to soak: Some recipes suggest soaking the potatoes first to remove excess starch, but you do not need to do that for the recipe.

FAQs

Have more questions about air-fryer fingerling potatoes? Don’t stress! Below, you’ll find everything you need to know, from how long to cook fingerling potatoes to master tips for maximum crispiness.

How long to air fry fingerling potatoes?

I recommend air frying your fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, depending on your air fryer brand and potato size, you may have to adjust the timing. To test whether your potatoes are ready to serve, try piercing them with a knife. If the blade easily enters and exits the potatoes’ flesh, you can remove your potatoes from the heat and serve. If the blade still encounters resistance, continue cooking your potatoes in one-minute increments until ready.

Are fingerling potatoes similar to Yukon Gold?

Though both are buttery, rich, and firm, fingerling potatoes and Yukon Gold potatoes have several critical differences. First, Yukon Golds are larger potatoes that are more spherical than fingerling potatoes, which are smaller and more elongated. Furthermore, fingerling potatoes have a slightly nuttier profile, a less creamy texture, and thin skins. However, both are versatile and popular in many traditional recipes.

Why didn’t my fries get crispy in the air fryer?

Suppose that your potatoes don’t come out as crisp as desired. In that case, there are two main possibilities: Either you didn’t thoroughly dry your potatoes before coating them in your olive oil mixture, or you may have overcrowded the pan, thereby constricting airflow throughout the air fryer chamber.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

Air fryer veggies strike the ultimate balance between crisp, tender, and nutritious flavors. These quick sides are just what you need to fill your cookbook (and dinner table!) with perfectly customizable flavors.

If you try this air fryer fingerling potatoes recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Fingerling potatoes roasted in air fryer on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

A delicious recipe for Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes that are great for serving as a side dish with main dishes or finger food with dipping sauces. Gluten-free and vegan.
Course Side Dish, Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 120kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 pound fingerling potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved lengthwise (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon dried parsley flakes or 2 teaspoons of freshly chopped parsley plus more for sprinkling on top
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the fingerling potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer without overcrowding the air fryer basket.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, 12-15 minutes, shaking halfway through. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer onto a serving platter. If desired, sprinkle it with fresh herbs.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound of fingerling potatoes, which is about 3 cups. It is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Dry them thoroughly: It is important to make sure that the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process.
  • Adding parmesan: I initially tested this recipe by adding the shredded parmesan cheese to the oil and garlic mixture, but then we found out that the quick air frying process burned the cheese before fully cooking the potatoes. Therefore, I  recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its delicious umami flavor. 
  • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
  • Store: Air fried fingerling potatoes are best right after they are fried. However, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 484mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
Chestnut Stuffing https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/ https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/#comments Sat, 18 Nov 2023 20:54:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72033 Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings…]]>

Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings a special addition to the holiday table. Classic and simple, and a wonderful make ahead, let’s just say this will be one more task you can check off your holiday to-do list.

If you are interested in more chestnut recipes, we have a delicious recipe for Cream of Chestnut Soup, too. But don’t stop there. Get to cooking throughout November with plenty of Thanksgiving Veggie Sides and Friendsgiving Food Ideas.

Chestnut stuffing in a casserole dish from the top view.

Ingredients

Whether you call it chestnut dressing or stuffing, the ingredients for this side dish remain the same. I provide plenty of tips when it comes to bread and chestnuts, too. We will need:

  • Bread: Go for white bread, sourdough bread, Italian bread, or cornbread, cut into ½-inch cubes with a sharp knife. Brioche is another option, however, store-bought brioche is very sweet and will alter the taste if you make a chestnut brioche stuffing. If you have a good bakery nearby or have the time to make Brioche at home, I say go for it. I personally think that it is worth all the effort.
  • Unsalted butter: Unsalted butter is best, but salted butter can be used, just make sure to adjust the salt in the recipe. Olive oil can be used as a dairy-free option.
  • Vegetables / Aromatics: A classic combo of onions and celery, along with fresh garlic for some punch, gives this chestnut sage stuffing recipe so much flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Savory herbs including fresh sage, parsley, and fresh thyme will provide the best flavor, but you can substitute dried herbs if you are short on time.
  • Large eggs: Eggs bind and hold the stuffing together and give it that sought-after stuffing texture. Beat the eggs together separately before adding to the chestnut turkey stuffing mix.
  • Stock: Keep it vegetarian with Vegetable Stock, or use Chicken Stock, turkey stock, or low-sodium store-bought chicken broth instead.
  • Seasonings: I like to keep the seasoning simple with salt and pepper to allow the flavor of the chestnuts to shine.
  • Chestnuts: Use cooked and peeled chestnuts rather than raw ones. Feel free to cook your fresh chestnuts by following any one of our recipes. We recommend Boiling Chestnuts for their optimal texture. Fire Roasted Chestnuts and Air Fried Chestnuts are quick and easy, and Roasted Chestnuts for stuffing are a little bit harder in texture, so I recommend chopping them into smaller pieces. For convenience, you can also buy pre-cooked chestnuts online (affiliate link) or at grocery stores, just make sure ‘chestnuts’ are the only ingredient (no sugar) and be sure to drain them before using. Alternatively, you can use leftovers of unsweetened pureed chestnuts as well.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While the basic ingredients I listed above are more than enough, you can customize this chestnut dressing for turkey according to your tastebuds with a few delicious ingredients. Here are a few ways to do it:

  • Meat: Pancetta, sweet Italian sausage (casings removed and crumbled), or bacon are delicious and add a meaty bite. My favorite is chestnut pancetta stuffing, but sauteed crumbled sausage is delightful as well. The key is to make sure to sautee your meat of choice before adding it to the stuffing mixture.
  • Other veggies: This is where you can get creative. I like the addition of thinly sliced mushrooms or fennel.
  • Heavy cream: For a richer chestnut stuffing, substitute ½ cup of the stock with heavy cream.
  • A touch of sweetness: One small cubed apple or a handful of dried cranberries or raisins adds a pop of sweet flavor that would pair beautifully with the nutty flavors of this dressing recipe.
  • Nuts: While it will no longer be a chestnut stuffing, you can swap chestnuts for toasted and chopped walnuts or pecans instead.

How to Make Chestnut Stuffing

Making this turkey stuffing with chestnuts couldn’t be easier. I have got you covered whether you want to bake it in a baking dish or stuff it into the turkey. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make stuffing with chestnuts.
  1. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch shallow casserole dish with softened butter.
  2. Saute vegetables: In a large saute pan over medium-high heat, melt butter. Then, saute onions and celery until softened, about 5-7 minutes.
  3. Add aromatics: Reduce to medium heat, add the garlic, and saute for 1 minute. Add the sage and saute for an additional minute. Remove from heat and allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  4. Mix bread and herbs: In a large bowl, toss the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme.
Step by step images showing how to make chestnut dressing for turkey.
  1. Make stuffing mixture: Add eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and vegetable mixture to the bread mixture, gently tossing until just combined.
  2. Add the star ingredient: Gently stir in the chopped chestnuts.
  3. When it comes to cooking it, you have two options:
    1. Bake in a casserole dish: Transfer the mixture to the shallow baking pan and spread into a single layer. Bake, uncovered until it is golden brown on top, about 35-40 minutes. Serve warm.
    2. Stuff the turkey: Transfer the chestnut stuffing for turkey into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Bake the turkey as needed until the internal temperature of the stuffing reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This old-fashioned chestnut stuffing recipe is a wonderful make-ahead dish. Here’s how I like to make it ahead, store, and reheat leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stuffing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes, or until warmed through.

What to Serve With Chestnut Stuffing?

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and not much different than making any other stuffing, I think there are a few things to pay attention to. Here are a few helpful tips for the best chestnut stuffing recipe:

  • Use day-old bread: Stale bread is best for stuffing as the dry texture absorbs all the moisture from the stock. If you only have fresh bread on hand, cut it into cubes and spread out onto a rimmed baking sheet to dry out overnight, or go for toasted bread by placing the bread cubes in a preheated 375 degrees F oven until slightly dry, about 7-10 minutes.
  • Store-bought bread cubes: If you are short on time, feel free to use Pepperidge Farm stuffing cubes or those clear bags of bread cubes you find throughout the grocery store this time of year.
  • Amount of liquid: We are looking for a texture that is ‘moist but not soggy’. To achieve this, the stock may have to be adjusted based on the type of bread you use. For best results, start with the 2 ½ cups in the recipe card, then add additional stock ⅛ cup at a time if you find the stuffing mix is a little dry.
  • Adding meat: If you are using meat, make sure to cook it through before adding it in.
  • Do not overmix: When you are mixing the chestnut turkey dressing, it is imperative that you are doing it in a gentle way. You do not want to break the bread cubes, as this will create a crumbly, mushy texture. The bread cubes will absorb the liquid and will produce a nice texture when gently tossed.
Vegetarian chestnut stuffing in a bowl from the top view.

FAQs

What is the origin of chestnut stuffing?

Stuffing with chestnuts is said to have been around for more than 200 years, with the first recipe in print found in The Frugal Housewife by Susannah Carter in 1772.

Are chestnuts supposed to be soft?

This is more about personal preference. Boiled chestnuts will be soft and creamy, whereas fire-roasted or roasted chestnuts will be harder. If you make roasted chestnut stuffing, cut them into smaller pieces.

Can chestnut stuffing be frozen?

Even though you can technically freeze this dish, we do not recommend freezing as the texture will be mushy once thawed. That being said, if you would like to freeze the chestnut stuffing, do so by transferring it to a freezer-safe airtight container with room at the top for expansion. Freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw the frozen stuffing overnight in the fridge. Reheat in a 325-degree oven for 15-20 minutes, or until warmed through.

What is the difference between stuffing and dressing?

While the two terms are used interchangeably, the name you use largely depends on the region you are from and the cooking method. Technically speaking, ‘stuffing’ is cooked inside the cavity of the turkey, whereas ‘dressing’ is baked exclusively outside the turkey in a separate baking dish.

Other Stuffing Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this recipe for Chestnut Stuffing, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chestnut dressing in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chestnut Stuffing Recipe

Chestnut Stuffing, a classic Thanksgiving (or Christmas) dinner favorite, combines cooked chestnuts with a medley of vegetables and fresh herbs, creating a rustic, flavorful side dish that's a hit at any festive gathering.
Course American
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 287kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (2 oz) plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh sage chopped
  • 1 pound day-old white bread ~10 cups, cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 2 ½ cups vegetable stock or chicken or turkey stock would also work
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups cooked chestnuts* roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch casserole dish with softened butter.
  • Melt butter in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery and saute for 5-7 minutes until softened.
  • Add the minced garlic and saute for an additional minute, being careful not to burn it. If necessary, reduce the heat.
  • Add the chopped sage and saute for 1 minute. Take the skillet off the heat and set it aside to cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme in a large bowl. Toss to combine.
  • Add the eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and the cooked vegetables, lightly tossing everything until just combined. Do not overmix.
  • Using a spatula, gently fold in the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the mixture to the prepared baking dish and spread it evenly, lightly pressing in the dish. Bake uncovered for 35-40 minutes until it is lightly browned on top. Alternatively, you can transfer the chestnut stuffing into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Roast turkey as needed until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a stuffing good for 8 servings. It is enough the fill the cavity of a 14-20 pound turkey if you prefer to stuff it into your turkey. Otherwise, you can bake it in a 9X13 casserole dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Stale bread: Using a day-old (or dry) bread is key to making this recipe. You can cube the bread the night before and store it uncovered to dry it out. Or, you can bake the cubes on a baking sheet in a 375-degree F oven for 10 to 12 minutes without browning. However, make sure that they are fully cooled before using them in this chestnut stuffing recipe.
  • Chestnuts: You can purchase already-cooked chestnuts from the store. Just make sure that the only ingredient in the packaging is chestnuts. Alternatively, you can buy raw chestnuts and cook them yourself. I highly recommend buying Italian chestnuts (instead of Chinese) as they are easier to peel. You can boil chestnuts, roast them in the oven, or even roast them in an open fire following our recipes. 
  • Moisture: If you feel the chestnut dressing appears dry, you can add more stock in ⅛ cup increments to your preferred moisture. Remember that the stock will evaporate slightly during the cooking. It is best not to make this stuffing too moist.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare the dressing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Just make sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Covering the top: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover this dressing with foil while it was baking in the oven. However, if yours is browning too quickly (especially if you are cooking multiple things in your oven), you can cover it with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last 5-10 minutes to ensure it is fully cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 287kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 874mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 530IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/feed/ 4
Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Nov 2023 18:28:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71889 Ingredients You’ll Need Let me tell you something, you do not have to give up flavor to make a green…]]>
Aysegul Sanford sitting on stairs facing the camera.

Yes, You Can Make This Classic Without The Canned Mushroom Soup

The first time I had green bean casserole without cream of mushroom soup was at a friend’s Thanksgiving many years ago. Until then, I had only known the version made with canned soup, so I was shocked by how different it tasted.

Gone was the mushy texture and the overly salty sauce. Instead, there were crisp, tender green beans coated in a creamy sauce that was seasoned just right. I loved it so much that I went back for seconds.

When I decided to make my own version at home, I knew I wanted the same fresh, umami-rich taste without relying on canned soup. The challenge was to replace those umami flavors that we all expect from the traditional recipe. 

After testing it several times, I found the answer. A simple homemade roux, combined with two cheeses (mild cheddar for creaminess and Parmesan for savory umami depth), was the best substitute for cream of mushroom soup in green bean casserole.

From there, you can top it off with the classic fried onions or give it your own twist by topping it with panko or caramelized onions.

So, whether you are not a fan of mushrooms or just want a homemade alternative to the canned stuff, this from-scratch green bean casserole is the one you will want to make every holiday season.

And I am grateful to hold your hand through the process. So, let’s make it together, shall we?

Ingredients You’ll Need

Let me tell you something, you do not have to give up flavor to make a green bean casserole with no mushroom soup.

A quick homemade roux combined with cheese and fresh herbs gives it a creamy, savory sauce that’s just as comforting as the classic version. You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few things to keep in mind before you start:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Fresh green beans: Choose fresh, firm, and unblemished green beans (also known as string beans). Ensure that you clean and dry them as thoroughly as possible, trim their ends, and cut them into 2-inch pieces. 

Unsalted butter: You may also use salted butter instead, but be sure to adjust the other seasonings to avoid over-salting your recipe. 

All-purpose flour: I use regular all-purpose flour in this recipe, but if you prefer a gluten-free option, you can substitute your favorite 1:1 gluten-free baking flour.

Vegetable stock: I am keeping this recipe vegetarian, which is why I’m using vegetable stock, but my chicken stock recipe works just as well. If you’re using store-bought, opt for a low-sodium option to better control the amount of salt in your no-mushroom green bean casserole.

Cheese: I’m using a mix of white cheddar and parmesan to add a rich, savory flavor that replaces what you’d normally get from mushroom soup. If you do not have white cheddar, yellow cheddar, or Colby Jack can be substituted.

Herbs, spices, and seasonings: I am using fresh thyme, ground nutmeg, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper, which are the classic spices most green bean casserole recipes typically use. If you like spice, you may also add a pinch of red pepper flakes. 

French-fried onions: Store-bought crispy onions provide a crisp topping for your casserole.

How to Make No Mushroom Soup Green Bean Casserole

I get it; letting go of the shortcut of canned mushroom soup may seem intimidating, but I promise you that it is worth it. With a little technique and guidance, you’ll see it is not that difficult. 

Below are my step-by-step instructions with detailed notes from my recipe testing to help you succeed on your first try:

Person washing and trimming green beans.

Step 1 – Prepare the green beans: Start by washing, drying, and trimming the ends of your fresh green beans. Cut them into two-inch pieces and set aside.

If you’re using frozen or canned green beans, you can skip the blanching steps that follow. Just be sure to increase your baking time to about 17-18 minutes so the casserole heats through evenly.

Step 2 – Boil water and prepare the ice bath: Add water and salt to a large pot and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. As this water heats, fill a separate large bowl with ice and water and set it aside.

Person blanching green beans to prepare for making green bean casserole.

Step 3 – Boil the Green Beans: Add the green beans to the boiling water and cook until crisp-tender, approximately 5-7 minutes in total. Be careful not to overcook them during this step; they should still maintain their shape and firm texture.

Step 4 – Cool the green beans: Using a slotted spoon or strainer, transfer the cooked green beans directly to the ice water bath. 

Let them sit in the ice bath for 5 minutes, or until they reach room temperature. Once cooled, remove them from the water, spread them on a clean kitchen towel, and pat them dry as much as possible.

Pro Tip: Do not skip drying them, as it is key to the success of this recipe. Removing the excess liquid prevents diluting the roux and helps preserve its rich and creamy texture.

A collage of images showing how to make the sauce for green bean casserole without mushroom soup.

Step 5 – Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 375°F (190°C) and butter your baking dish.

Step 6 – Sauté butter and garlic: Before starting this part of the recipe, ensure all your ingredients are ready, as the rest of the process proceeds quickly and requires constant attention.

Melt the butter in a large skillet over medium heat, then add the garlic and saute it for 30 seconds.

Step 7 – Make The Roux: Add the flour to the melted butter and whisk constantly for about 5 minutes, until the mixture is lightly browned. 

A full five minutes of whisking might sound like a lot, but it is not. If you skip this step, you’ll end up with a raw flour taste in the final product, so be patient and work those arm muscles.

Gradually pour in the stock and heavy cream. Whisk the mixture constantly for about 10 minutes, or until it has thickened, adjusting the heat as necessary to prevent burning.

Pro Tip: As you whisk, you will notice that the mixture starts to thicken. While I say it will take 10 minutes, rather than relying on the clock, pay attention to the texture and feel of the mixture.

When it gets to a level where it coats the back of a wooden spoon, it should be ready.

Step by step images showing how to mix the sauce with green beans to make no mushroom string bean casserole recipe.

Step 8 – Season the Roux: Remove the roux from the heat and whisk in the cheddar cheese, thyme, nutmeg, pepper, and red pepper flakes. It will get even thicker with these additions, and that’s what we want.

Step 9 – Add the green beans: Fold in the blanched green beans into the sauce and mix until they are evenly coated with the mixture.

Person preparing green bean casserole for baking with and without crispy fried onions on top.

Step 10 – Fill the casserole dish: Transfer the green bean mixture to the prepared dish and spread it evenly throughout.

Step 11 – Bake and serve: Bake your green bean casserole for ten minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onions in an even layer over the top and bake for an additional 5 minutes, or until the onions turn golden brown.

6 Lessons I Learned During My Recipe Testing

  1. Do not overblanch the green beans: When boiling your green beans, be sure not to over-blanch them. Cooking them too long will result in a mushy casserole. Just blanch them until they have a nice bite but still have a firm texture.
  2. Be patient while making the roux: This is the main difference between using a can of mushroom soup and making your own. The important thing here is to never leave side of it. As you whisk, pay attention to the texture and consistency of the mixture. Add the liquids gradually while whisking constantly to avoid clumps.
  3. Taste for seasoning: After finishing the roux, give it a taste and add more as needed. I kept the amount of salt listed in the recipe card to a minimum, as the saltiness of the cheese can vary from brand to brand.
  4. No need to cover it with aluminum foil while baking: During my initial research in preparation for this recipe, I found some recipes that instruct the user to cover the top with foil during baking. I tested this recipe three times and never needed to do so, as I believe adding the fried onions at the last minute helps prevent them from browning too quickly, eliminating the need to cover the casserole while baking. 
  5. You can make it even more umami-rich: I think adding Parmesan cheese compensates for the lack of umami taste from not using canned mushroom soup or mushrooms. However, if you’d like a bit more depth, you can add one tablespoon of soy sauce or one teaspoon of Worcestershire sauce to the roux. You can add more if you want, but keep in mind that a little goes a long way with these salty ingredients.
  6. Yup, you can add bacon: It will no longer be vegetarian, but cooked turkey bacon (or regular bacon) makes a great addition to this green bean casserole recipe. I recommend cooking it until crispy, chopping it up, and sprinkling it on top of your casserole.

FAQs

How do you make green bean casserole less soupy?

Since this recipe doesn’t use canned soup, it’s unlikely it will turn out runny. However, if your sauce feels too thin, let it cook a bit longer or let it cool before serving.

How do I make green bean casserole without fried onions?

If you still want a crunchy topping without using fried onions, you can add toasted panko, crushed crackers, seasoned croutons, or even cornflakes. For extra depth, caramelized onions add a rich, sweet flavor that pairs perfectly with the sauce.

Is it better to use fresh, frozen, or canned green beans in green bean casserole?

I’ve tested this recipe with all three options. Fresh green beans give the best texture and flavor. Frozen beans are a great second option, as long as you thaw and dry them thoroughly before use. Canned beans will work in a pinch, but they tend to be too soft and can make the casserole mushy. If you use frozen or canned beans, skip the blanching step and bake the casserole for 17-18 minutes.

What Goes Good With Green Bean Casserole?

No one can resist the creamy decadence of a thick green bean casserole. Not only is this recipe one of the best Thanksgiving vegetable sides, but it also works perfectly for a Friendsgiving potluck or even a cozy Sunday supper. Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

Green bean casserole without mushroom soup on a wooden spoon.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Green Bean Recipes You Might Also Like

I love having a few green bean recipes on hand that are easy to make and go with just about any main dish. Below are a few others from the archives:

  • If you’re looking for something crispy and satisfying, Air Fryer Green Bean Fries are a great alternative to heavier, fried snacks. They’re coated in a garlicky panko-parmesan breading and cooked in the air fryer in minutes.
  • This Vegetarian Cornbread Stuffing, made with jalapeño cheddar cornbread and canned green beans, is yet another great recipe that uses green beans.
  • For an easy, one-pan side, 15-minute Buttery Garlic Green Beans are always a reliable choice. Easy to make, buttery, and garlicky, it is one of my top side dishes on the blog.
Green bean casserole recipe made without mushrooms in a 9 X 13 casserole dish.
Print

Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup Recipe

Making Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup is easy, and let’s face it, it is much healthier because it is made from scratch! Follow our foolproof recipe to make the best homemade green bean casserole and impress your friends with this delicious version of the classic Thanksgiving side dish.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 397kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds fresh green beans* cleaned, ends trimmed, and cut into 2-inch pieces
  • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 ¾ cups vegetable stock or chicken broth
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 4 ounces shredded white cheddar cheese approximately 1 1/2 cups
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese* shredded approximately ¾ cup
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme minced
  • teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for the blanching water
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup French fried onions 2 ounces

Instructions

  • To blanch the green beans, place water and a pinch of salt in a large pot over medium-high heat. Bring it to a boil.
    A collage of photos showing the assembly and baking of the no mushroom soup green bean casserole recipe.
  • Meanwhile, fill a large bowl with ice and water. Set it aside.
  • Carefully add the green beans to the boiling water. Cook until crisp and tender, 5-7 minutes.
    A collage of images showing the green beans cooling and drying.
  • Using a slotted spoon or a spider strainer, transfer the green beans into the ice water. Let them cool to room temperature for about 5 minutes. Drain.
  • Spread out the blanched green beans on a clean kitchen towel and pat dry as much as you can.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F (191 degrees C). Butter a 9X11 or 9X13 casserole dish with a tablespoon of butter and set it aside.
    Images showing the buttering of the casserole dish and cooking butter.
  • In the large skillet, melt the rest of the butter over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds.
  • Add the flour and whisk constantly until lightly browned, for about 5 minutes.
    Photos showing the making of the roux for the green bean casserole.
  • While continuously whisking, gradually pour in the stock, followed by the heavy cream (again while gradually pouring), until thickened for about 10 minutes. Adjust the heat as necessary to avoid burning.
  • Off the heat, whisk in the cheddar cheese, parmesan, thyme, nutmeg, kosher salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using).
    Photos side by side showing the cheese and spices being add to the sauce.
  • Fold in the green beans and toss until they are evenly coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish and spread it out evenly.
    Green beans added into the sauce.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onion rings over the top of the casserole dish and bake for an additional 5 minutes until the fried onion rings are golden brown.
  • Let the sauce cool for 10-15 minutes to set before serving.
    A collage of photos showing the assembly and baking of the no mushroom soup green bean casserole recipe.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This easy green bean casserole recipe makes about 6-7 cups, enough for 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Fresh, frozen, or canned green beans, which one should you use? I tested this recipe both with fresh green beans and frozen (and thawed) green beans, and they were both great. You can technically use canned beans, but I wouldn’t recommend it, as they tend to be too soft. Still, if you decide to use canned beans, skip the blanching and add them directly to the roux. However, be sure to drain and dry them thoroughly before adding to avoid diluting the mixture’s consistency. 
  • Using Fresh mushrooms: I can almost hear you ask, What if I don’t mind using some fresh mushrooms? While the main goal of this recipe is not to use canned mushroom soup, you can definitely add fresh mushrooms to the mixture. I recommend using 8 oz of cremini (or baby bella) mushrooms. Simply saute the sliced mushrooms with a tablespoon of butter, remove them from the pan, and prepare your roux. Drain the sautéed mushrooms and add them to the sauce mixture, then add the green beans and toss until thoroughly coated.
  • How to make it ahead: To make this casserole ahead of time, prepare the recipe until the step in which you transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish. Then, let the mixture cool down, cover it tightly with aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator for up to one day in advance. When ready to eat, bake as directed.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store your leftover green bean casserole in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days. To reheat your casserole, place it in a 350°F (175°C) oven for 7-10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Although it is technically possible, I don’t recommend freezing this green bean casserole, as it will likely become mushy after thawing.

Nutrition

Calories: 397kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 2196mg | Potassium: 383mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2102IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 325mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/feed/ 8
Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste.…]]>

It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

Ingredients

Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
  • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
  • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

Other Seasoning Ideas

Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

  • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
  • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
  • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
  • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
  1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
  3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
  4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

How to Store and Reheat?

To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

  • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions:

This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

  • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
  • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

Expert Tips

Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

  • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
  • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
  • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
  • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
  • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

Can you air fry red potatoes?

Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

What temperature to air fry potatoes?

Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
  • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
  • Sprinkle it while it is still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
  • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71576 While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for…]]>

While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it.

Butternut squash cooked in air fryer on a white oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Butternut squash: Fresh, unblemished butternut squash is the key to making air fryer roasted squash. When selecting your squash, look for ones with an intact stem, a dark beige color, and matte skin. Once your squash is ready, peel and cut it into 1-inch cubes. Be careful when cutting it into cubes. If you are new to it, check out my foolproof guide to cutting butternut squash before you start. Also, to simplify your meal prep, you may use store-bought, pre-cut butternut squash for this recipe. However, remember that these cubes tend to be larger, so you may need to cut them into smaller, 1-inch cubes before tossing them in your seasoning mixture. 
  • Olive oil: I use olive oil to help my seasoning mix adhere to the butternut squash and give each cube a beautifully roasted exterior. However, you may also use avocado oil or coconut oil if you prefer.
  • Garlic powder: Though both have a robust garlicky flavor, I recommend using garlic powder instead of minced garlic for this recipe. Garlic powder allows for a more even flavor coating, ensuring every bite of your squash explodes with a rich, gourmet taste.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to give your air fryer butternut squash cubes a deliciously savory, sophisticated flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other spices: Want to infuse your air-fried squash with warm fall flavors? Add one teaspoon of ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, and a pinch of nutmeg to your seasoning mix for a fall-ready side no one can resist.
  • Sweetener: For a sweeter version of this recipe, prepare your air fryer butternut squash with a teaspoon of brown sugar, maple syrup, or coconut sugar—tossed in with your other seasonings. I recommend using a small amount of sweetener (no more than 1 teaspoon), as doing so might caramelize or burn the squash while it is air frying. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can drizzle it with maple syrup over the air-fried butternut squash after the cooking is completed.
  • Fresh herbs: Add a light, herbaceous flavor to your recipe by sprinkling your squash with whatever fresh herbs pair with your main dish, such as parsley, sage, rosemary, or thyme.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash?

Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple instructions. In six steps and fifteen minutes, your squash will come out delectably caramelized, rich, and soft.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. If you bought your squash as a whole, cut it into cubes using our guide on how to cut butternut squash.
The steps to making butternut squash in air fryer are laid out in a collage of photos.
  1. Toss the cubed butternut squash: Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add the ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup (or sweetener of choice) to the mix. Then, toss the ingredients to ensure each butternut squash cube has an even coating of the seasonings.
  2. Transfer the seasoned butternut squash: Place the cubed butternut squash into the air fryer basket, ensuring they lie in a single layer. If your cubes don’t all fit, air fry them in two batches.
  3. Cook: Air fry the butternut squash for 15 minutes or until fork tender, shaking the basket halfway through.
  4. Check for doneness: I think the best way to check doneness (and tenderness) when air frying butternut squash is to pierce a cube with a knife. The batch is ready to eat if the blade gently enters and exits the air fryer squash cube. If the cube is still tough, cook the basket in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Once you’ve roasted the butternut squash in your air fryer, transfer the cooked cubes to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the squash with a teaspoon of maple syrup for additional sweetness.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

It’s no secret that air fryer-roasted butternut squash is best on the day you make it. However, these pro storage tips will ensure that no bite will go to waste when putting away your leftover squash.

  • Store: When storing your butternut squash, first let the leftovers reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-roasted squash, place it in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.

Ways to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash

When you air fry butternut squash cubes, you’ll unlock countless other recipes to fill your table with sweet, savory, and garden-fresh flavors. Below are just a few of my favorite ways to incorporate this winter squash into my menus:

  • Serve it as a healthy Thanksgiving side dish: What better way to celebrate the holiday season than with air fryer winter squash? This hassle-free recipe makes for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish, complementing your favorite holiday mains with gorgeous color, caramelized taste, and simple prep.
  • Add it to salads: This recipe makes the most delicious crispy roasted squash, which pairs beautifully with any of your fall salads. I especially like using it in Ina’s Butternut Squash Salad or Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Feta Salad for a surprisingly complex, rich, and healthy dish.
  • Turn it into soups: Tender, mild, and exquisitely caramelized, air-roasted butternut squash is one of my favorite recipes to add to creamy soups. My Thai Butternut Squash Soup is a vegan dish brimming with aromatic, nutty flavors, while Butternut Squash Chicken Soup will warm your belly with a hearty, nutritious taste.
  • Add it to pasta or pizza as a topping: Believe it or not, air fryer cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect addition to all your Italian favorites, including pasta and pizza recipes. With this easy air fryer recipe, you can add a sumptuously sweet flavor to all your go-to weeknight meals.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Food Network star to roast butternut squash in the air fryer. This easy guide will give you expert guidance on everything from slicing tips to seasoning suggestions.

  • Equal-sized cubes: For best results, it is imperative that your squash cubes are similar in size. There’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of your butternut squash cubes, so keeping your cubes uniform will ensure no piece of squash comes out over- or under-cooked.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket: The key to proper air frying is adequate air circulation throughout the chamber. Therefore, you mustn’t overcrowd your basket when cooking, arranging your squash in a single even layer so that hot air reaches each side of your squash cubes. This positioning will ensure your squash cubes develop an even golden brown exterior and tender insides. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to cook your butternut squash in two batches if they don’t all fit in the basket.
  • Shake halfway through: Be sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the cooking process to ensure even air frying on all sides of the butternut squash.
  • Each air fryer is different: We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Pot Air Fryer, and the results were very similar. However, keep in mind that each brand of air fryer is different. Therefore,  your butternut squash may need more or less time, depending on the brand you own. When in doubt, check the doneness halfway through the cooking process by inserting a sharp knife into your squash and continue to cook it in one-minute increments until fork-tender.
  • Check doneness: Remember that this recipe’s recommended cooking time may change depending on your air fryer model and the size of your squash cubes. To check whether your butternut squash is ready to serve, I recommend using the “knife test.” In other words, insert a knife into one of your squash cubes and see whether it smoothly enters and exits the veggie. If it does, your air fryer squash is ready to eat.
  • Sugar: If you add sugar to your recipe, I recommend starting with a small amount— one teaspoon at most—to avoid over-caramelizing. If you prefer your butternut squash sweeter, you may drizzle or sprinkle it with additional sugar right after removing it from the air fryer (while it’s still hot).
  • Experiment with seasoning: Feel free to experiment with your squash’s seasoning blend based on what you’re serving it with. Depending on your menu, you may consider adding additional ingredients, like ground cinnamon, brown sugar, parsley, or even ground cumin.
  • Air fryer butternut squash fries: If you want to air fry butternut squash fries, cut your squash lengthwise into French fry-shaped pieces. Then, follow the recipe as directed, air frying them for 15 minutes at 375 degrees F.

FAQs

Want to know more about roasting squash in the air fryer? This handy FAQ will answer all your most pressing questions, whether you’re wondering about recommended cooking time or proper veggie prep.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air frying squash is an easy way to transform your winter squash into a deliciously tender, caramelized, and flavorful side. Even better, you can even use your air-fried squash in other recipes to cut down on prep time.

Should I peel butternut squash before air frying?

Yes, I recommend peeling your squash using a vegetable peeler before air frying it to eliminate unwanted toughness and ensure even cooking.

How long to air fry butternut squash?

When cut into 1-inch cubes, air fry your squash for about 15 minutes at 375 degrees F., shaking the basket halfway through. Remember, though, that every air fryer is different, so your squash may need more or less time, depending on what brand you own. To check for doneness, insert a knife into a cube and ensure it enters and exits the squash easily.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Also Like

Preparing air-roast butternut squash is an exceptionally tender, flavorful, and quick way to pack nutrition into your weekday meals. For even more delectable veggie recipes, this collection has just a few fan favorites that will satisfy the whole family.

If you try this Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted butternut squash on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Recipe

Made with just a few simple ingredients, this Air Fryer Butternut Squash makes a great side dish or addition to salads, pasta, and pizza dishes. With many seasoning options, you can take this basic recipe and customize it to your liking.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 90kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 cups butternut squash cubes* from a 2.5 pounds squash (peeled)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • Pinch of nutmeg optional
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup or brown sugar plus more for drizzling if preferred

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup. Give it a good toss, ensuring that all the butternut squash cubes are coated with the seasonings.
  • Transfer the seasoned butternut squash into the air fryer basket in a single layer. If they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for 15 minutes or until fork tender, making sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the process.
  • To check tenderness, pierce a cube with a knife. If it goes in and out gently, the squash is done. If not fully tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the butternut squash cubes with a teaspoon (or more) of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, made with 2 ½ pounds of squash, yields about 5 to 6 cups of air-fried cubed butternut squash, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Halved Squash: If you prefer to use halved squash instead of cubed squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves recipe.
  • Cutting butternut squash: If you are new to cutting squash, check out our guide on How To Cut Butternut Squash into cubes.
  • Evenly sized: For best results, it is important that your squash cubes are similar in size. Please keep in mind that there’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of the cubes, so keeping them uniform will ensure they are evenly cooked.
  • Adding sweetener: We intentionally limited the amount of sugar (maple syrup or brown sugar) to a small amount (only 1 teaspoon) as too much sugar might cause squash cubes to over-caramelize and potentially burn. If you prefer your dish to be sweeter, feel free to drizzle it with maple syrup after it is cooked (while it is still warm.)
  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place the cubed squash in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.
  • Frozen Butternut Squash Cubes: We also tested this recipe using a 15-ounce bag (standard size) of frozen butternut squash cubes that we bought from the grocery store. If you prefer to use frozen squash, you can follow the recipe as written but adjust the amount of oil and seasoning based on the weight of your squash. In our case, we halved the seasoning and oil. You do not need to wait for it to thaw. Just extend the air frying time to 20 minutes. Finally, be aware that because the butternut squash is frozen, when you air fry it, it will lose most of its moisture and the cubes will become smaller.

Nutrition

Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 394mg | Potassium: 507mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 14886IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/#comments Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:03:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71692 Ingredients Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get…]]>
Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butternut squash: The most essential ingredient in this air fryer recipe is—you guessed it!—butternut squash. Begin by selecting a butternut squash with a firm texture, matte surface, and no bruises. Then, cut it in half lengthwise with a sharp knife. Though slicing butternut squash may seem daunting, you’ll find all the pro tips you need in my foolproof guide on How to Cut Butternut Squash. You also don’t need to peel your squash before using it in this recipe, though you may use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin if you prefer.
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is crucial to giving your air roast butternut squash a moist, tender, and perfectly crisp taste. However, you may also use any other mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, melted butter, or ghee.
  • Seasonings: All you need is garlic powder, kosher salt and pepper to bring out the natural flavors of the squash. Optionally—depending on your recipe—you may also sprinkle your squash with cinnamon, nutmeg, cayenne pepper, and pumpkin spice for an extra warm, sweet, and spicy taste.
  • Optional sweetener: Though not necessary, you may also add light sweeteners like maple syrup or brown sugar to your whole squash to enhance its caramelization and give it a sweet flavor.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves

There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half.
  1. Cut the butternut squash: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Be sure to hold it firmly around its middle with your non-dominant hand. Using a sharp chef’s knife in your free hand, trim off the stem by cutting off about half an inch. Then, while holding it in its side position, cut the squash in half lengthwise through its center, beginning from the top and working your way to the bottom. Remember that you may have to jerk the knife back and forth while applying pressure to loosen the blade while cutting. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds and pulp from the core of the cut squash. You may either discard them or save the seeds to roast later.
Images showing how to air fryer halved butternut squash.
  1. Season the squash halves: Brush the cut side of the squash halves with olive oil and season them with garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  2. Air fry the butternut squash: Place the halved squash cut side down into the basket of the air fryer and cook them for 22 minutes.
  3. Flip the squash: Flip the squash halves so their cut sides face up and cook them for an additional 10 minutes.
  4. Check for doneness: Insert a sharp knife into the neck (i.e., the vertical top) of the squash. If the knife pierces the flesh easily, it’s ready to remove from the heat. If the knife encounters some resistance, continue cooking the squash in one-minute increments until done.

How to Store and Reheat?

Making this air-fried butternut squash recipe is one of the easiest ways to enjoy savory, tender squash all week long. None of your favorite veggies will go to waste with these expert storage tips.

  • Storage: You can store your leftover squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash leftovers, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.

How to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash Halves in Recipes?

Exquisitely tender and expertly flavored, there are dozens of butternut squash recipes to make in the air fryer. These tasty cooking ideas will fill your table with rich, flavorful meals no matter when the craving strikes.

  • Use the flesh: My favorite way to warm up during the chilly winter months is to transform this savory air fryer butternut squash recipe into a warm, hearty meal. My Butternut Squash Soup is luscious, bright, and savory, while my vegan Thai Curry Butternut Squash Soup is a faster way to fill your bowl with bold, aromatic flavors. You can even turn your air-roasted butternut squash into a rich and creamy pasta sauce or a decadent pie filling for a fan-favorite Butternut Squash Pie.
  • Stuff it: Visually stunning and packed with nutrition, Stuffed Squash is a gourmet meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.
  • Mashed butternut squash: Transform your air-fried squash halves into the perfect Thanksgiving side dish using a five-star mashed butternut squash recipe. Like my Sweet Potato Mash, this recipe is fluffy, rich, and flavorful—but with half the calories!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a squash expert to make a delicious side dish fit for a restaurant. These pro tips will ensure your air fryer butternut squash recipe is rich, caramelized, and tender every time.

  • Size of your squash matters: When making roasted butternut squash in the air fryer, you must select a squash that will fit in the basket of your air fryer. Therefore, take a minute when selecting your vegetable to ensure it is an appropriate size for your type of air fryer.
  • Air frying time: How long it takes to cook butternut squash in the air fryer may vary depending on the size of your squash and the brand of your air fryer. In this recipe, I cook my squash halves for 22 minutes cut-side down and another 10 minutes after flipping. However, I recommend checking the doneness of your air-fried squash using the knife test—inserting a knife into the neck of your squash—to tell if your veggie is appropriately tender. If the knife encounters resistance when inserted into the squash’s flesh, continue cooking it in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  • No need to peel: You don’t have to peel your butternut squash halves before adding them to the air fryer. Not only does keeping the skin cut down on prep time, but it also helps give you a good grip when scooping out the flesh to use in other recipes. However, you may peel the squash before air frying if preferred.
  • Start with skin side down: The key to cooking butternut squash halves in the air fryer is beginning the cooking process by placing the squash slices skin side down. This orientation ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Add the sweetener at the last minute: If you choose to make air fryer butternut squash halves with maple syrup, brown sugar, or other sweeteners, wait until the last 5-10 minutes of cooking before adding the ingredient. Limiting these sweeteners’ exposure to high heat will help prevent burning and over-caramelization.

FAQs

Have more questions about this easy air fryer recipe? This simple guide has everything you need, whether you’re wondering about the air frying process or proper squash preparation.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air-roasted butternut squash (whether you cook it in cubes or whole) is a tasty, tender, and quick alternative to oven-roasting, and it even helps free up oven space when preparing multiple dishes at a time.

Do butternut squash halves need to be peeled before cooking?

No, you don’t have to remove the butternut squash skin before cooking. Though some prefer removing the skin beforehand, leaving the skin on helps trap moisture in the veggie during the cooking process, and it makes it easier to scoop out the flesh if you plan on using it for other recipes.

Other Butternut Squash Recipes You Might Also Like

Make the most of squash season by filling your kitchen with all your favorite butternut squash recipes. These recipes have everything you need, from delicious holiday sides to easy weeknight meals.

If you try this Air Fried Halved Butternut Squash recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves Recipe

If cooking the whole butternut squash sounds daunting, try cooking them in the air fryer. The good news is that with this recipe, making Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves is not only easy but also convenient compared to other methods.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 32 minutes
Total Time 37 minutes
Servings 1 butternut squash
Calories 379kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole butternut squash approximately 2.5 pounds, cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. As you are cutting, you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it.*
  • Brush the cut sides of the butternut squash with olive oil and season with garlic powder, salt and pepper.
  • Place the butternut squash halves cut side down* and cook for 22 minutes.
  • Flip the butternut squash halves and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
  • Insert a knife in the “neck” of the squash. If it pierces easily, it should be ready. If it does not feel tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole butternut squash with two halves, which is good for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cutting the squash: It is imperative that you use a sharp knife and take your time as you are cutting the squash. If you are new to the process, be sure to check out our how-to guide to cutting butternut squash like a pro.
  • Sweetener: If you prefer, you can use a sweetener like maple syrup or brown sugar. However, we recommend brushing (or sprinkling) your butternut squash halves with the sweetener of your choice in the last 5 minutes of air frying to prevent over-caramelization or burning.
  • Start with skin side down ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Storage: You can store your leftover halved squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash halves, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.
  • Cubed Butternut Squash: If you prefer to air fry cubed butternut squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 2665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79728IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/feed/ 2
Turkey Injection Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/#respond Tue, 31 Oct 2023 20:02:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71619 Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work The beauty of this homemade turkey injection blend recipe is that it uses…]]>

A Foolproof Solution For A Super Juicy Turkey

Aysegul Sanford sitting from the front.

Growing up in Türkiye, we didn’t celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago.

Over the years, I tried every roasted turkey method I could find: brining, basting, covering it in butter,  but none gave me a bird that was quite as moist and well-seasoned as the ones I made after discovering turkey injection.

How I Discovered the Trick:

A couple of years ago, a friend invited us to her house for Thanksgiving dinner, and when I tasted the turkey she made, I couldn’t believe how juicy it was. Come to find out, her mother-in-law, a true Southern belle, apparently only makes her Thanksgiving turkey this way. 

Some melted butter, a few pantry spices, and flavoring agents were injected all over the bird. The difference was night and day. The meat was moist, seasoned all the way through, and every bite had that richness I had been chasing for years.

Why It’s So Effective:

Injecting a turkey before cooking works because it delivers seasoning and moisture directly into the thickest parts of the turkey that need it most (hello, breast meat). The fat from the butter helps the turkey stay juicy during roasting, while the liquid evenly distributes the seasoning throughout in as little as four hours of resting.

The Result:

A juicy bird that is consistently tender, buttery, and, dare I say, moist. Since that day, I have tested this recipe four different times and learned a thing or two. 

Don’t let the fancy word “injection” or the need for an injector (which can be found in most grocery stores) deter you from trying this recipe.

I tested it on four different turkeys, so I can share every detail, from equipment and seasoning ideas to how to inject the turkey correctly, ensuring your mixture does not escape and pool at the bottom of the roasting pan.

Person injecting a turkey with this turkey injection seasoning.

Equipment You Will Need

While I usually refrain from using special equipment in my recipes, this one is different, as you will need a meat injector (or a syringe) to inject the mixture into the turkey.

Luckily, it is not hard to find. Most grocery or hardware stores sell turkey seasoning injection kits during the holiday season. And once you make the investment, you can use it for injecting other types of meat as well.

The injector kit and the needle tip needed to make this recipe.

For this recipe, you will need:

Baking sheet or large plate: It may seem like you need something to catch leaks, like a roasting bag, but through my recipe testing, I found that the leakage from the injected areas was minimal. So, you do not need anything other than a baking sheet or a large plate when injecting the bird.

Meat injector: I recommend purchasing a stainless steel syringe with a needle that has one opening at the tip. I’ve found it gives you better control over the flow of the mixture as you inject it, and prevents it from leaking out. If you are in the market for one, this Stainless Steel Meat Injector Kit is the one I recommend.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work

The beauty of this homemade turkey injection blend recipe is that it uses basic, everyday ingredients. I shared the exact measurements in the recipe card, but below are some detailed notes from my recipe testing to help you customize this recipe to your own preferences.

Ingredients needed to make the recipe from the top view.

Butter: I prefer using unsalted butter so I can control the amount of salt in the injection. However, salted butter can be used if that’s all you have; simply adjust the amount of seasoning accordingly. 

You can also substitute half (or all) of the butter with olive oil or another mild oil, such as avocado oil.

Chicken stock: I use my homemade chicken stock, but a store-bought low-sodium chicken stock can also be used. Ensure it’s at room temperature before use.

Alternatively, you can use turkey stock for a richer taste.

Pro Tip: For a deeper, savory taste, whisk in a teaspoon of Better Than Bouillon (roasted chicken flavor) or a pinch of MSG/Umami Powder. It’s a simple way to get that restaurant-style turkey right at home.

My turkey injection seasonings: When it comes to seasoning your injection, you have a few options:

  • Keep it simple: In my version, I kept the seasonings simple by using basic ingredients, such as lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder, garlic powder, and Kosher salt.
  • Add more spices: You can add other spices, like as paprika, black or white pepper, cayenne pepper, or even poultry seasoning.
  • Enrich with fresh herbs: You can also use fresh herbs like chopped rosemary, sage, or thyme. Instead of adding them directly to the mixture, it is best to steep them in melted butter. This way, the flavors are transferred to the injection without clogging the injector. 

Special Note on Brining and Salt: You can brine and inject your turkey. If you do both, omit the salt from your injection mixture entirely to prevent oversalted meat.

Turkey: This recipe yields 12 oz (355 ml) of turkey injection, ideal for a 14- to 16-pound bird. It is essential that the material is fully thawed before beginning the injection process.

How to Make an Injection for Turkey

Once you have all the ingredients, making this DIY turkey injection takes just 10 minutes. Here’s how I make it:

Two images side by side showing how to make an injection for turkey.

Step 1 – Melt the butter: Place the butter in a saucepan over medium heat and cook until just melted. There is no need to bring it to a boil, as we do not want the mixture to be too hot.

Step 2 – Add the remaining ingredients: Remove the melted butter from the heat and add the chicken stock, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder, and Kosher salt.

Step 3 – Let it (slightly) cool: Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly mixed, then let the liquid cool for a few minutes.

Pro Tip: The temperature of the mixture is important here. We do not want to inject a cold turkey with very hot liquid. However, if you let it cool for too long, the butter will solidify, and it will clog the injector.

How to Inject Turkey With Butter

The method below works whether you are injecting turkey for roasting, smoking, or deep-frying.

A collage of images showing how to prepare a turkey injection mixture and inject it into the bird.

Step 1 – Dry the turkey: Before beginning the injection process, place the turkey on a sheet pan or a large enough plate and dry thoroughly on all sides using paper towels. A dry turkey will be easier to manage and will not slide off as you are injecting.

Step 2 – Fill the injector: Place the injector tip into the injection liquid and pull the plunger back until the syringe is filled. If the butter separates, gently plunge back and forth until everything re-incorporates and emulsifies.

Step 3 – Inject turkey with seasoning: Insert the tip of the turkey injector into the thickest parts of the turkey meat, starting from the breast and moving down to the thighs.

Pro Tip: As you are injecting the turkey injection,  go in at least one inch deep at a 45-degree angle, pushing about ½ ounce per site.

You may begin pulling the tip out as you slowly inject the liquid, but don’t force it.

Stop your injection just before reaching the turkey’s skin. If you hit a bone with your injector, pull the needle back slightly and continue the injection process.

Person shown as she injects the turkey and then covers it with plastic wrap.

Step 4 – Inject evenly throughout the bird: Work your way around the wings, breast, thighs, and legs, 20-24 times in total. Try not to massage or distribute the liquid after injecting, as the solution will naturally flow into the meat as it rests in the fridge. If any solution drips from a puncture, gently press the spot with your finger and move on to another nearby spot.

Step 5 – Let it rest: Place the turkey onto a large cooking pan, cover it with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and refrigerate it at least 4 hours or overnight.

When to Inject Turkey?

The best time for injecting a turkey depends on your cooking method and the amount of time you have for preparation. Unlike a traditional brine, an injection works from the inside out, so the flavors start infusing the moment the liquid is added.

  • Roasting or smoking: Inject the turkey at least 4-6 hours before cooking, overnight, or up to 36 hours in advance. 
  • Deep-frying: Inject the seasoning 30-60 minutes before cooking. This short rest is enough for the flavors to settle without drawing out excess moisture.
  • Short on time? While the turkey will benefit from a couple of hours of resting, in a pinch, it is okay to inject it right before cooking; the mixture will still baste the turkey internally as it cooks.

Seasoning Variations

As I worked on this recipe, I came across numerous flavor combinations for this simple turkey injection recipe. It makes so much sense because you can use this basic recipe and flavor your turkey from the inside out with just a few additional ingredients.

Below are a few flavor variations that you can try:

  • Beer and butter poultry injection: Beer adds a tender texture and rich flavor to the turkey. If you want to go for it, omit the lemon juice and chicken stock, and use six ounces of beer (such as brown ale or lager) instead. I think this combo makes the best turkey injection recipe for smoking or grilling.
  • Sweeter injection: For a slightly sweeter injection, melt a teaspoon of honey in the hot butter mixture. This will give you a mild, caramelized-like taste. You can also make an apple cider turkey injection recipe or an apple juice turkey injection by replacing the lemon juice with apple cider, apple juice, or orange juice (without pulp).
  • Creole or Cajun turkey injection recipe: For a bold, spicy twist, swap the Worcestershire, garlic powder, and onion powder for a tablespoon of Cajun or blackening seasoning, a pinch of cayenne pepper, and a teaspoon of hot sauce for extra heat. 
  • Garlic Butter Injection: Yes, this recipe contains garlic powder, but the garlic flavor is mild. If you prefer a more pronounced garlic flavor, you can steep a clove (or two) of fresh, minced garlic in melted butter for a couple of minutes, then drain it before mixing it with the remaining ingredients.

Everything I Learned After Testing This Recipe on Four Turkeys

I learned a great deal while working on this recipe. Turns out there’s more to injecting a Thanksgiving turkey than one might think. It is no rocket science, but paying attention to a few things makes a big difference. Below are my notes from all my recipe testing:

Thaw your turkey completely: If you are using a frozen turkey, ensure it’s fully thawed before starting the injection process. Otherwise, the injection will not spread evenly throughout the meat. 

Let the butter cool slightly: Your liquid injection shouldn’t be boiling. If it’s too warm, it may begin cooking the meat, resulting in overcooked or unsafe turkey after the final cooking process. I recommend letting the mixture cool for about 10 minutes.

Work quickly: Butter tends to solidify as it sits. So if it thickens and stops flowing through the injector, run the syringe and needle tip under hot tap water for 15-20 seconds, which will help loosen it.

Practice makes perfect: One of the reasons why I had to test it four times was that I had never injected a turkey before. If you are a newbie like me, start injecting on the less meaty parts (such as wings and drumsticks) of the bird to practice and get a feel for it before injecting the more tender portions, like the breast meat.

Avoid the cavity: When injecting your bird, try not to penetrate beyond the meat and into the turkey’s inner cavity, as it won’t infuse the meat unless the needle lands within its fibers.

Ensure food safety by refrigerating the injected turkey immediately after preparation: Always inject the turkey while it’s chilled, never frozen, or at room temperature. Allowing the turkey to heat and cool repeatedly can allow unwanted bacteria to grow, making the meat unsafe to eat. After injecting, refrigerate it immediately to allow the flavors to absorb and prevent bacterial growth. Be sure to discard any leftover turkey injection that has come into contact with raw meat.

FAQs

Does injecting a turkey make it juicier?

Yes, injecting adds moisture and flavor directly into the meat, helping the turkey stay juicy and evenly seasoned as it cooks.

How to inject a turkey without an injector?

While an injector works best, you can use a sharp knife to make small slits or pockets in the turkey and spoon the injection into them. The flavor won’t spread as evenly, but it will still add moisture and taste to the meat.

Can I use an injected turkey to make gravy?

Absolutely! All the juices from an injected turkey make an excellent base for turkey gravy, adding rich, savory depth to every bite.

Can you inject a Butterball turkey (or smaller cuts)?

Yes! This turkey injection recipe works perfectly for Butterball turkeys and other poultry cuts, such as turkey breast, thighs, or drumsticks. Simply adjust the amount of injection based on the size of the meat. You can refrigerate any leftovers in an airtight container and gently reheat before using again.

Can I brine and inject a turkey?

Yes, you can do both. Brine the turkey for 12-24 hours first, then rinse and pat it dry before injecting. Simply omit the salt from your injection mixture to prevent over-seasoning.

Other Ways To Flavor Turkey

It is no secret that turkey meat needs more seasoning and flavoring than most other meats, but the good news is that there are so many ways to flavor it. Below are a few of my go-tos:

  • If you prefer a quicker method with a similar promise, try my Compound Butter for Turkey recipe. Spreading your bird generously with seasoned butter is yet another good way to make it juicy.
  • For smaller cuts, such as turkey tenderloins or breast, I always use my Turkey Loin Marinade. It is an easy way to season the turkey inside out.
  • From now on, you no longer need to spend money on store-bought turkey seasoning, as it is easy to make at home with my Turkey Dry Rub recipe, which uses basic ingredients like dried herbs, spices, and brown sugar.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Person injecting marinade into a turkey's thigh.
Print

Turkey Injection Recipe

Here’s a simple turkey injector recipe made with butter and chicken broth. Use this easy recipe to add flavor and moisture to your turkey so it is perfectly juicy all throughout. It can be used for the whole turkey or the turkey breast (or other parts.)
Course Dinner, Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Injecting Time 20 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 926kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter One 4 oz. stick
  • 1 cup chicken stock at room temperature (or turkey stock)
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 turkey 14-16 pounds – fully thawed if frozen, cleaned and dried with paper towel

Instructions

  • Place the butter in a saucepan over medium heat and cook until just melted. Do not let it turn brown.
  • Off the heat, add the chicken stock, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder, garlic powder, and Kosher salt. Whisk until everything is incorporated. Let it cool for a few minutes. It doesn’t have to be cold, but rather just close to room temperature.
    A collage of images showing the making of the injection seasoning.
  • Place the injector tip into the butter mixture and pull the plunger back to fill the syringe. If the mixture separates, you can “agitate” the butter solution by plunging back and forth a couple of times to emulsify and incorporate all the ingredients.
  • Prior to injecting the bird, make sure that any air pockets in the syringe are removed. To do so, point the syringe upwards and gently push the plunger until all the air is extracted.
    Person drying the turkey and filling the syringe with the injection mixture.
  • Inject the marinade into the bird (you can start from anywhere) by inserting the tip at a 45-degree angle, distributing ¼ ounce per site at least 1 inch deep. You can start to pull the tip out as you slowly inject, but do not force it. Stop the injection just before you reach the skin.
  • Continue this process throughout several areas of the turkey, including the wings, breast, thighs, and legs, for a total of 20 to 24 times. Don't be tempted to massage or distribute the liquid because it will self-absorb as it rests in the fridge. If you notice the solution escaping from a different pierced area, apply slight pressure using your finger to prevent the solution from oozing out while injecting it into an adjacent area.
    Person injecting a turkey and covering it before storing it in the fridge.
  • Once your turkey is fully injected, loosely cover it with stretch film and refrigerate it for 4 hours or overnight (no more than 36 hours).

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 ounces (1 1/2 cups) of injection fluid, which is ideal for a turkey that is between 14-16 pounds. The nutritional values below do not include turkey, and they are for the whole injector recipe.
  • Make-Ahead: You can technically make this recipe ahead of time, but if you do, you still need to warm it up on the stove. Therefore, I do not recommend making it ahead.
  • Storage: If you decide not to use the whole marinade, be sure to discard the rest to prevent contamination.

Nutrition

Calories: 926kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 94g | Saturated Fat: 58g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 25g | Trans Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 248mg | Sodium: 2906mg | Potassium: 502mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 2821IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/feed/ 0
Turkey Wings Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/#comments Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:29:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71401 Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe…]]>

Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe hits the spot, I have so many other turkey recipes guaranteed to delight your tastebuds—without having to cook the entire turkey! My Baked Turkey Tenderloin is an elegant, herby main worthy of a food magazine spread, while my Turkey Drumsticks packs all the juicy, savory goodness of the whole bird in perfectly portioned pieces.

Southern style turkey wings garnished with thyme from the top view.

Why Does This Recipe Work?

If you’ve ever tried baking turkey wings in the oven like you would cook chicken wings, chances are, you’ve ended up with dry, flavorless meat. However, I’ve designed this recipe to give you juicy turkey wings packed with savory flavor every time you prepare it. 

During our recipe testing, we learned two important lessons:

  1. Gentle heat is the best: You probably already know this, but turkey meat tends to be tougher than chicken, requiring a different cooking method. While you can technically roast turkey wings in the oven like you would with chicken wings (and they will look nice and crispy), the meat ends up being tough and dry.
    In our quest for a solution, we came across a Southern turkey wings recipe. In this method, the wings were cooked low and slow, with a bit of extra liquid added to the baking pan. Following in the food steps of the Southerners, we were able to achieve turkey meat that was juicy and tender on the inside, complemented by a beautifully browned, crispy exterior.
  2. Start with a cover and then remove it for browning. Another trick we learned was to bake them covered for an hour, followed by an additional thirty minutes uncovered. This initial covered phase helped wings retain moisture, ensuring a juicy interior, while the subsequent uncovered phase allowed them to develop a crispy exterior.

Ingredients

Tired of bland, flavorless wings? This recipe combines fresh, rich, and flavorful ingredients to make the best seasoning for turkey wings—a savory combination of fresh herbs and spices no one can resist. Below is everything you’ll need:

Turkey wings seasoning, oil, stock and turkey wings from the top view.
  • Fresh turkey wings: Whole turkey wings have three distinct parts to them: the drumette, the wingette (also known as the “flat”), and the tip or “flapper.” The turkey wing tips are small and have little meat, so they’re prone to burning. Therefore, I recommend removing the tips and saving them to make turkey stock. While you can cook turkey wings as a whole, I prefer cutting them before roasting. If you’d like some help with this step, you can buy your turkey wings whole, cut them yourself, or ask the local butcher at your grocery store to cut them for you. If you prefer using frozen turkey wings, be sure to fully thaw them first. No matter how you buy your turkey wings, though, just be sure to avoid smoked turkey wings (which come pre-cooked), as they’ll dry out while making this recipe.
  • Oil: I prefer olive oil to give my slow-roasted turkey wings their iconic crispy exteriors and tender, succulent insides. However, another mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
  • Turkey wings seasonings: In my opinion, the best seasoning for turkey wings comes with a savory mix of pantry-ready ingredients, including onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, Kosher salt, and black pepper. To add extra-fresh overtones to your seasoning, I also recommend adding dried thyme and parsley to the mixture. You may also add cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for an extra kick of spice, though this ingredient is optional.
  • Stock: Use either chicken broth or turkey stock to give your baked turkey wings extra succulent meat.
  • Fresh herbs: Though this garnish is optional, fresh herbs—like parsley, thyme, and rosemary—will transform your tender baked turkey wings into a gourmet meal, infusing each bite with herby, bright flavors.

How to Make It

This oven-baked turkey wings recipe takes only a handful of simple steps, giving you tender, juicy turkey no matter when you prepare it. 

  1. Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
A collage of images where a person is showing what to season turkey wings with.
  1. Dry the meat: Place the turkey wings on a cutting board and use paper towels to pat dry each piece on all sides. Once dry, transfer the wings to a large bowl.
  2. Season the turkey wings: Drizzle olive oil over the turkey wings and sprinkle them with an even coating of onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper. 
  3. Marinate turkey wings: Toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Then, cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat sit in the turkey wing marinade for a minimum of 30 minutes in the fridge. If possible, I recommend marinating the turkey wings overnight to ensure they soak up as much flavor as possible.
Step by step images showing how to make turkey wings fall off the bone.
  1. Add the stock: When ready to bake, place the marinated turkey wings in a Dutch oven or casserole dish and add the stock to the base.
  2. Roast the turkey wings: Cover the dish with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven. Then, bake the turkey wings for one hour. After one hour, remove the foil and cook them in the baking dish for another 30 minutes. You may remove your slow-baked turkey wings from the oven when their thickest portions reach an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. However, it is OK to let the meat cook until it reaches a maximum of 180 degrees F.
  3. Serve: Transfer the roast turkey wings to a serving platter when ready. Drizzle them with the juices in the pan for maximum juiciness and flavor, then garnish the meat with fresh herbs.

How to Make Turkey Wings Crispy?

For extra crispy baked turkey wings, broil them for a few minutes. Here is how I do it:

Crispy turkey wings on a wire rack.
  1. Remove the cooked turkey from the pan after baking and transfer the wings to a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. 
  2. Place the meat under the broiler for 1-2 minutes or until the skin crisps up. However, keep a close eye on the turkey to avoid burning, as this meat can go from perfectly juicy to thoroughly dry in very little time.
  3. Let the broiled turkey wings rest for 5 minutes before serving.

How to Store, Reheat, Freeze, and Thaw?

One taste of these oven-fried turkey wings, and you won’t want to sacrifice a single bite. Storing your turkey wings is a cinch with these pro tips, giving you easy meal prep for days on end.

  • Store: After slow-cooking turkey wings in the oven, first cool them to room temperature, and then place them in an airtight container. Store them in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Allow the baked turkey flats and drummettes to come to room temperature. Once they’ve cooled, place them in an airtight container, ensuring they are well-covered to prevent freezer burn. These turkey pieces can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: I recommend thawing your frozen turkey overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: To reheat your turkey wings, place them in a casserole dish with the juices and warm them in a 350-degree Fahrenheit oven for 10-15 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Recipe Variations

The best-baked turkey wings recipe is one that you can customize according to your personal preference. Below, I’ve included some of my favorite ways to switch up this delectable main to satisfy all your cravings.

  • Marinade: Take this easy recipe to the next level; marinate turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a casserole dish that will accommodate all the wings comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Southern-style: Looking for an authentic Southern recipe for turkey wings? To make this fresh, flavorful variation, add hardy vegetables (such as bell peppers and onions) into your cooking liquid. If preferred, you can strain the juices post-cooking, place them in a small saucepan, and reduce them until they thicken to a sauce-like texture. Then, serve your turkey wings and veggies over a bed of rice and drizzle them with the sauce for a five-star meal that tastes straight out of Tennessee.
  • Smothered: Preparing smothered baked turkey wings is an easy way to give each bite decadently rich flavors. To make the sauce, use the leftover pan drippings to make turkey gravy and pour it over the freshly baked turkey wings. Alternatively, I’ve also seen examples where people prepare cream of mushroom turkey wings instead of cooking their own gravy. If you prefer that shortcut, warm up the cream of mushroom soup and smother the meat just before serving.
  • Cajun seasoning: Give your meat a kick of savory, smoky flavor by baking Cajun turkey wings in the oven. All you need to do is change the seasoning for the turkey wings and use our spicy and bold Blackened Seasoning instead.
  • Lemon pepper turkey wings: To add bright, citrusy zest to your baked turkey wings, I recommend swapping out our recommended poultry seasoning mixture for a five-minute Lemon Pepper Seasoning.

What To Serve With Turkey Wings?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving up a platter of turkey wings and stuffing for a small holiday gathering or making your favorite comfort foods for Sunday supper. These ideas will fill your table with delectable sides, whether you’re preparing your go-to Thanksgiving Veggie Sides, Friendsgiving Recipes, or looking for creative ideas for your next Football Food spread.

Turkey wings and rice in a bowl with a person drizzling rice over the meat.
  • Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving: Not a fan of cooking the full bird? Make this easy recipe instead! Serving a menu of turkey wings and Cornbread Dressing with a side of Maple Cranberry Sauce is an automatic hit among guests, especially when paired with my creamy Green Bean Casserole recipe. Or, if you’re looking for a rich, filling side, my Mashed Sweet Potatoes or Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes will fill every fork with the velvety taste of seasoned potatoes.
  • Sunday dinners: With this iconic menu, you’ll never run out of turkey wing dinner ideas. All your Sunday supper guests will be satisfied when you pair your wings with cheesy classics like my Vegan Mac and Cheese and Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread. You can even add a touch of Southern goodness by baking a batch of Sweet Potato Biscuits. Or, for a quick and easy meal, you can serve a spread of baked turkey wings and rice using any of your favorites, from wild rice to brown jasmine rice or even white rice.
  • Game day: No game day menu is complete without your go-to dip recipes. Your guests won’t be able to resist dipping their tender turkey meat in creamy, tangy, and light sauces, like my Yogurt Ranch Dip or Blue Cheese Dip.

Expert Tips

It is no secret that slow-baked turkey wings are a great option when trying to serve a lot of people with minimal time in the kitchen. However, there are a few lessons we learned during our recipe testing. Below are our foolproof tips for success:

  • The size of the turkey wings matters: There is a direct correlation between the size of the wings and the cooking time. For instance, young/small turkey wings will need less time in the oven than big turkey wings. Therefore, it’s best to buy wings that are similar in size to ensure even cooking. For reference, when testing this recipe, I used four wings totaling about three pounds. Furthermore, I don’t recommend using wing tips, as there is very little meat on them, and they will overcook when following this recipe.
  • Marinate longer: If you have the time, let the meat marinate overnight. While a 30-minute marination is effective, letting it sit longer ensures the flavors meld and deepen, yielding more flavorful meat.
  • Even layer: Ensure that the drummettes and wingettes are on an even layer in the baking dish. Overcrowding the dish will result in under or over-baked meat.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where people bake their wings at higher oven temperatures—like 350, 375, or even 400 degrees F. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings, whereas cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.
  • Cover it well: If you own a Dutch oven with a lid (such as this Le Creuset Braiser – affiliate link), this is the time to use it. The tight-fitting lid of a Dutch oven is ideal for keeping the meat’s juices contained, giving you succulent, moist turkey wings while cooking them in the oven. However, if you don’t have a Dutch oven, just be sure to tightly cover your casserole dish with aluminum foil to ensure it is fully sealed.
  • Turkey wing temperature: Technically, your turkey is safe to eat when the thickest part of the wing reaches 165 degrees F. when tested with a digital thermometer. However, please be aware that following the recipe below, your wings could register for up to 180 degrees. But, because we are cooking it low and slow and in a bit of liquid, this is okay. As a matter of fact, it is recommended for the most tender turkey wings. According to science writer Andrew Zimmerman Jones, “As you cook the turkey, muscle fibers contract until they begin to break up at around 180 F. Bonds within the molecules begin to break down, causing proteins to unravel, and the dense muscle meat to become more tender.”
  • Experiment with the recipe: Feel free to take this basic recipe and cooking method and experiment with various seasoning blends, serving styles, and favorite side dishes to make it your own.

FAQs

What temperature to bake turkey wings?

To achieve maximum tenderness, I recommend cooking your turkey wings (covered) at a low temperature, like 300 degrees F., for one hour, followed by thirty minutes uncovered.

How long to cook turkey wings in the oven?

When making slow-cooked turkey wings in the oven, I suggest cooking them for one hour, covered, at 300 degrees F. Then, bake the meat for an additional 30 minutes, uncovered, at the same temperature. This cooking time will ensure your meat comes out both tender and crisp without being dry or lacking in flavor.

Why are my turkey wings tough?

Your turkey meat will be tough if you cook it in a high-temperature oven for a long time without any liquid.

How to make turkey wings tender?

We found that the best way to tenderize turkey wings is to cook them at a low temperature (I recommend 300 degrees F.) for a long time (about 1 ½ hours.) Cooking the meat covered for the first hour and uncovered for the last half-hour ensures that the meat cooks evenly without drying.

Do you boil turkey wings before baking?

No, I don’t recommend boiling your turkey wings before baking them, as this additional step will strip the meat of their natural juices, leaving them flavorless and rubbery.

How long to marinate turkey wings?

When you marinate your turkey wings, let them sit in your seasoning mixture or your favorite turkey marinade for a minimum total time of thirty minutes. However—if possible—I recommend letting your meat marinate overnight in the fridge for extra deep, developed flavors.

Do you cover turkey wings when baking?

Yes, we do recommend covering them for the first half of roasting and then removing the cover for the last 30 minutes to ensure browning on the skin.

At what temperature are turkey wings done?

The internal temperature for turkey wings should reach a minimum of 165 degrees F. before serving. However, it is okay to cook wings until they reach 180 degrees F. to give them time to crisp up and tenderize.

How many turkey wings in a pound?

The number of wings in a pound depends on the size of the turkey, as large turkey wings weigh more than small turkey wings. However, the wings I used in this recipe were of medium size, weighing 0.7 pounds each with the drumette and wingette (three pounds total).

Other Turkey Recipes You Might Also Like

Can’t get enough of this tasty turkey dinner’s rich, tender taste? These other turkey dishes will fill your plate with savory, succulent, and flavorful meals every night of the week.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Baked Turkey Wings recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked turkey wings freshly baked in a casserole dish.
Print

Baked Turkey Wings Recipe

Baked Turkey Wings perfectly seasoned with a simple spice mixture and then roasted in the oven low and slow, resulting in wings that boast crispy skin and succulent meat.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 545kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds turkey wings drumettes and flats separated, and tips removed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika for a smoky flavor
  • 1 tablespoon dried thyme
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 cup chicken stock or turkey stock
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme or parsley as garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
  • To prepare the turkey wings, place them on a cutting board and pat dry each piece on all sides using paper towels. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  • Drizzle the turkey wings with olive oil and sprinkle them with onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper.
  • Toss to combine. Cover the seasoned wings with stretch film and let them marinate for at least 30 minutes in the fridge. You can let them marinate overnight if you have the time.
  • When ready to roast, transfer the wings into a casserole dish or a Dutch oven. Add the stock, making sure to not pour it directly over the turkey (we do not want all the spices to wash away.)
  • Cover the dish tightly with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven and bake for 1 hour. After 1 hour, remove the cover and continue cooking for another 30 minutes. During this time, the turkey will reach the ideal 165 degrees F. when a meat thermometer is inserted into the thickest part of a drumette. However, it is okay to let the meat cook after it exceeds the 165 degrees F. mark (up to 180 degrees F.).
  • When ready to serve, transfer the turkey wings onto a serving platter, drizzle them with the juices in the pan, and garnish with fresh herbs.
  • Alternatively, if you prefer them to have a crispy skin, you can remove the wings from the pan onto a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. Place them under the broiler and roast for a minute or two while keeping a very close eye on them.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6-7 pieces of wings made up of drumettes and wingettes. Depending on the weight and size of your wings, this amount might change. However, we think it is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Wings: You can buy whole wings and cut them yourself (here is a tutorial on how to cut turkey wings into segments) or ask your butcher to cut them for you.
  • Size of the wings & cooking time: There is a direct correlation between the size of your wings and the time it will take them to roast thoroughly. The best way to measure doneness is by using a meat thermometer. If the wings register between 165 degrees F and 180 degrees F, they should be safe to eat.
  •  Marinade: Alternatively, you can marinade turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a baking dish that will accommodate all the pieces comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where wings are baked at higher oven temperatures. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings. Instead, cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.

Nutrition

Calories: 545kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 161mg | Sodium: 797mg | Potassium: 678mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 622IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/feed/ 2
How To Cut Turkey Wings https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/#respond Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:22:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71471 While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier…]]>

While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier process. Thankfully, nowadays, you can find turkey wings sold separately in supermarkets, making it easier for the consumer.

You can certainly ask your butcher to do it for you, but if that is not an option, this short tutorial is here to show you how.

Turkey wings cut into sections from the top view.

Equipment You Will Need

Cutting turkey wings into segments is a relatively easy task that requires a few basic kitchen tools, which you probably already have. You will need:

  • A sturdy cutting board: While any cutting board will work for cutting raw turkey wings, having a dedicated cutting board specifically for poultry is recommended. Most chefs recommend using a plastic cutting board that is easier to clean, so that is what we recommend.
  • A sharp knife: While a sharp Chef’s knife would work, if you have a smaller knife like a boning or pairing knife, it would be ideal. Poultry sheers could work as well, but cutting through turkey wing joints with kitchen shears proves to be more challenging than with chicken wings.

Parts of A Turkey Wing:

Before diving into how to section a turkey wing, it is essential to understand the fundamental parts of a turkey wing.

A turkey wing typically has three parts: the drumette, the wingette (or flat), and the wing tip (or flapper). The joints are the points where these parts connect. If you put your index finger in these joints, you can easily feel the natural gap between each section.

Three parts of a turkey wing on a cutting board with text over the image.

Now, you can cook turkey wings as a whole, but because of their uneven size and thickness, cutting them helps with even cooking and easier consumption. Plus, by separating wings into sections, you can achieve consistent browning and crispiness, especially if you are frying or roasting them in the oven.

This is especially true when it comes to the wing tip. Since it has very little meat and tends to burn easily, it is often used to make turkey stock.

How to Cut Up A Turkey Wing into Parts?

A collage of images showing how to cut a turkey wing into segments.
  1. Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on your cutting board. Dry it thoroughly on all sides. Turn it to its back, ensuring that the skin connecting the wingette and drumette lays flat on the cutting board.
  2. Cut the skin: Carefully cut the skin flap until you reach the joint. This step will give us more control when breaking the joints.
  3. Break the bone: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette. Simply use your index finger to locate the natural gap between the bones. Take the wingette with one hand and the wing tip with the other. Gently pull them away from one another to “crack” the joint. While this is an optional step, doing so will help you find and cut through the joint easily.
  4. Separate the wingette from the drumette: Place your knife over the joint and carefully apply pressure while adjusting the angle to cut through it. Be careful not to cut through the bone. Instead, aim for the cartilage and soft tissue of the joint.
Person cutting the wing tip of a turkey wing.
  1. Cut the wing tip: Locate the joint between the wing tip and the wingette. Run your knife through the joint to loosen it. If it is resisting, use both hands to break the joint to make it easier to separate them. 
  2. Examine for bone fragments: After cutting, check each joint to make sure that there are no small bone fragments left.

Expert Tips:

Cutting turkey wings might seem straightforward, but for the best results, there are a few nuances to consider. Below are some tips to help you refine your technique and make the process even smoother:

  • Safety first: Remember to always use caution when using sharp knives on slippery surfaces like raw poultry. Take your time as you cut through skin, and always make sure it is securely positioned on the cutting board to avoid any accidents. 
  • Do not skip the drying: While it may come as an unnecessary step, drying the skin on the wings will make it easier (and safer) to handle the wings and cut the joints. If they are still slippery, use a paper towel to grip and hold them.
  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Sanitize: Cross contamination is always a major concern when working with poultry. Therefore, it is important to thoroughly clean and sanitize all equipment and surfaces that come in contact with raw meat.

If you try this method, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of giving it a try.

Turkey wing sections on a cutting board from the top view.
Print

How To Cut Turkey Wings

Learn How To Cut Turkey Wings into segments at home using this step-by-step tutorial.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 turkey wing
Calories 338kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Boning knife or any other smaller (easy to control) sharp knife
  • 1 Cutting Board (plastic) Ideally used only when handling poultry

Ingredients

  • 1 Turkey Wing

Instructions

  • Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on the cutting board and pat it dry on all sides using paper towels. Position it so that the skin connecting the drumette and wingette is flat against the cutting board.
  • Cut the skin: Gently cut the skin flap up to the joint so that you can have better control as you “break” the joint.
  • “Crack” the joint: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette using your index finger. Try to feel the natural separation between the bones. Hold the wingette in one hand and the wing tip in the other and carefully pull them apart to expose the joint.
  • Separate the wingette from the drumette: Position your knife over the exposed joint and apply pressure. You would have to adjust as needed to cut through, navigating your way between the bone and the soft tissue.
  • Remove the wing tip: Locate the joint connecting the wing tip and wingette. If you can, cut through it. If it is tight, manually break the joint holding each piece with one hand and crack the joint. You may have to go back and forth with the knife to achieve a clean cut.

Video

Notes

  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Need a delicious recipe to use your wings? Be sure to try our Baked Turkey Wings recipe.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Protein: 35g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 120mg | Sodium: 94mg | Potassium: 412mg | Vitamin A: 19IU | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/feed/ 0
Cauliflower au Gratin https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/ https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/#comments Thu, 12 Oct 2023 22:38:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7676 Ingredients This baked cauliflower au gratin recipe requires a short list of simple ingredients, with cauliflower as one of the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Over the years of hosting holiday dinners, I’ve learned to keep a short list of dependable sides that work for any special occasion. This recipe I adapted from Ina Garten’s cauliflower gratin, has been on that list for more than a decade. It is creamy, cheesy, and somehow wins over even the most proud cauliflower skeptics.

Here is how I made the existing recipe better & foolproof:

  • You get the exact amount of cauliflower you need: Her recipe says “two heads of cauliflower,” but let’s face it, that can mean anything. One head can be tiny, another can be huge, and the difference can easily throw off the sauce. By giving you the exact weight of florets, you end up with the right balance every single time. No more guessing, no more ending up with a dish that feels too saucy or not saucy enough.
  • This method prevents watery results: Cauliflower holds a lot of moisture, and if it is cooked too long or cut too small, it releases that moisture straight into the sauce. Par-cooking it just until tender and draining it well helps keep the texture right where it should be. The sauce stays creamy instead of thinning out in the oven.
  • It is easy to customize: I made sure to include some time-saving tips (i.e, using pre-cut cauliflower), or swapping in a gluten-free flour blend, or changing up the cheeses so you can make it yours.

Ingredients

This baked cauliflower au gratin recipe requires a short list of simple ingredients, with cauliflower as one of the main ingredients. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are ingredient notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for scalloped cauliflower recipe in individual portions.

Cauliflower: The key to this recipe is to have 3 pounds of cauliflower florets. In other words, we want 3 pounds total after cutting into pieces and removing the stalks and stems.

I found the best way to ensure enough cauliflower to fill a 9 x 13-inch baking dish is to purchase a 3-pound and a 2-pound head of cauliflower.

Pro tip: If you are short on time, nowadays most stores sell pre-cut, packaged cauliflower, which works perfectly in this recipe. Be sure to check the expiration date and choose a package with firm florets.

Unsalted butter: I almost always use unsalted butter in my recipes so that I have control over the amount of salt, but salted butter would also work. Just be sure to taste for seasoning before adding more.

Fresh cloves of garlic: While I prefer fresh garlic cloves, you can use garlic powder. If you want to take this cauliflower au gratin casserole to the next level, do yourself a favor and use roasted garlic.

Flour: While I am using all-purpose flour, you can use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend (I like King Arthur‘s GF Flour) as well. Choose a blend that includes starches like tapioca, potato, or corn for the best texture.

Whole milk: Low-fat milk can be used in place of whole milk, but it will not be as creamy. There is also a higher chance of curdling if a lower-fat milk is used.

Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and nutmeg elevates the dish to new heights. For an extra kick, a pinch of cayenne pepper can also be added.

Cheese: I am following the Barefoot Contessa’s cheesy cauliflower gratin recipe and using a mix of Gruyere and Parmesan, but sharp cheddar, Swiss, or Fontina can be used in place of the Gruyere.

I do not recommend using pre-packaged shredded cheese because most companies use anti-caking agents to keep it fresh, which can affect the consistency of the cheesy sauce.

Bread crumbs: Yet unlike Barefoot Contessa’s recipe, I went with Panko breadcrumbs for extra crunch. For extra indulgence, you could try crushed Ritz crackers mixed with a bit of melted butter for a salty, buttery crunch.

Optional garnish: Fresh parsley gives it a beautiful finish and color. Fresh chives would be a nice addition, too.

How to Make Cauliflower Gratin?

If you are looking for an easy cauliflower au gratin recipe, you have come to the right place! There are three main parts to making a cauliflower gratin, but I can assure you your efforts will be worth it. Here’s how to do it in a few basic steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cauliflower gratin recipe.

Step 1 – Boil cauliflower: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C). In a large pot, place the cauliflower florets, a few teaspoons of salt, and enough water to cover everything.

Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes, or until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife. Drain the cauliflower very well; shaking the colander helps remove extra moisture, so the sauce doesn’t turn watery later. Set aside.

Step 2 – Make a roux: Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and stir for 30 seconds until fragrant. Add the flour and whisk constantly for 1 minute, until it resembles a smooth paste (but not browned).

Pro Tip: Take your time to cook the flour while constantly whisking, even if it feels like a full minute is too long. This step cooks out the raw, unpleasant taste of flour, because once it’s in there, you can’t fix it later.

Step 3 – Make the white sauce: While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a gentle boil and cook for 2-3 minutes, or until slightly thickened.

Look for nape: A simple way to check if the sauce has the right thickness is to dip a wooden spoon in it. When you remove the spoon, the sauce should cling to its back rather than being runny. This is referred to as “nape” in French.

A collage of images showing how to prepare gratin of cauliflower.

Step 4 – Add the cheese: Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4  cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.

Step 5 – Add cauliflower: Add the cooked cauliflower florets and toss to combine. Transfer the mixture to a 9 x 13-inch baking pan. Sprinkle the top with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese, and panko breadcrumbs.

Ina Garten's cheesy cauliflower gratin before and after it is baked.

Step 6 – Bake: Bake for 25-30 minutes, until the cheese is bubbling and the top is golden-brown with crisped breadcrumbs. At this point, the cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork, and you should see little cheesy pockets forming between the florets.

Step 7 – Garnish and serve: Allow to cool for 5-10 minutes. Garnish with a sprinkle of parsley, and enjoy.

Cauliflower gratin in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side from the top view.

Expert Tips From My Recipe Testing

As you can see, the recipe for this creamy side dish is pretty straightforward. However, I learned a few lessons during our recipe testing that I think are important to share to help you end up with the best cauliflower au gratin of your life (I know it is quite a bold statement, but I mean it.):

How to prevent the watery gratin: Be sure to drain the cauliflower after it is parcooked. I would even recommend letting it sit in the colander for a few minutes so all the liquid fully drains. Additionally, make sure that your roux is cooked until slightly thickened.

You should not have this issue if you follow these steps, but if you do, you can bake it a bit longer (keeping a very close eye on it) to help the liquid evaporate.

Browning: If the cauliflower is tender, but the top hasn’t browned enough, place it under the broiler for 1 minute or until browned to your liking. Make sure to check it often to avoid burning.

Blanching the cauliflower: Make sure to cook the cauliflower in a large pot of boiling salted water and keep a close eye on the texture. We are not cooking the cauliflower all the way through, just enough to parboil it into tender cauliflower florets, as it will continue to cook in the oven.

Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.

Patience is key with the bechamel sauce: When you are making the roux (aka bechamel sauce), patience is the key. Do not rush, and be sure to cook the flour with the butter for at least 1 minute so that you cook out the raw flavor of the flour. For ease, make the roux with a wooden spoon, then switch to a whisk when you begin adding the milk. And whatever you do, do not leave it unattended.

Cold milk vs warmed milk: Slightly warmed or room temperature milk mixes better, but I tested the recipe with cold milk, and it worked just as well.

Don’t fret about consistency: Upon first making the cheese sauce, it may seem a little loose, but keep in mind that some of the moisture will evaporate in the oven, and it will thicken as it bakes.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This scalloped cauliflower recipe is a wonderful make-ahead and can be stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so properly, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Blanch the cauliflower and make the creamy sauce up to 2 days in advance. Store each separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator. Or, make the entire casserole dish 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge at least 30 minutes before baking.
  • Storing Leftovers: Leftover gratin of cauliflower can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing: Cauliflower gratin can be frozen, but keep in mind the texture may be affected after thawing and reheating due to the water content in cauliflower. For best results, cool the gratin completely (to prevent ice crystals from forming) and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container with a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen gratin overnight or up to 24 hours in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Reheat leftovers, uncovered, in a preheated 350°F (177°C) oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen but thawed cauliflower gratin, it could take up to 30 minutes. If reheating from frozen, bake at 350°F (177°C) for 45 minutes – 1 hour, tented with aluminum foil, then remove the aluminum foil during the last 15 minutes of baking.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Cauliflower Au Gratin in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Cauliflower Au Gratin Recipe

This Cauliflower Au Gratin is creamy, cheesy, and baked until golden on top. Tender cauliflower is coated in a smooth Gruyere and Parmesan sauce, then finished with a crisp panko topping. It makes a comforting side dish for weeknights or holidays.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 8 Servings
Calories 301kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 heads cauliflower cut into bite-sized florets (total of 3 pounds of florets) *
  • Kosher Salt
  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 ¼ cups whole milk
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ¾ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • Pinch nutmeg
  • 1 ¾ cups Gruyere cheese shredded, divided – 6 ounces – Swiss or Cheddar cheese would also work
  • ¾ cup grated Parmesan cheese divided
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C).
  • Place the cauliflower florets in the stock pot and a few teaspoons of salt and cover with water.
  • Cover the pot and bring it to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Drain and shake to remove any excess water. Set aside.
  • Meanwhile, melt the butter in a large skillet* over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds to soften.
  • Add the flour. Whisk constantly until the flour is cooked (but not browned) for 1 minute.
  • While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a boil and cook for 2-3 minutes or until thickened but still smooth.
  • Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4 cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.
  • Add the cauliflower florets and toss to combine.
  • Place the mixture into the baking dish and smooth it out evenly.
  • Sprinkle the top of the mixture with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese and panko bread crumbs.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes until the cheese is bubbling and the top is browned. The cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Cool for 5 minutes, garnish with parsley if desired and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a 9 X 13 casserole full of cauliflower gratin, which is ideal for serving as a side dish for 8 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cauliflower florets: The total weight of the cauliflower (3 pounds) is in reference to the cauliflower florets, not the whole head of cauliflower. During my recipe testing, I found the stalks weigh about 1 pound each per head, so pick up a 2-pound and a 3-pound cauliflower head to get 3 pounds of florets in total. 
  • Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this dish a day in advance. Simply follow the recipe until you place the cheese and cauliflower mixture into the casserole dish (until step 11.) Bring to room temperature and cover well. Keep it in the fridge until you are ready to bake. When ready, follow the recipe as written and bake.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers of this cauliflower casserole (after they come to room temperature) in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. 

Nutrition

Calories: 301kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 59mg | Sodium: 904mg | Potassium: 598mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 683IU | Vitamin C: 71mg | Calcium: 504mg | Iron: 1mg

Variations

Cauliflower gratin is a gorgeous recipe that can be elevated or adapted based on what you are craving. Below are a few variations of this basic recipe that you can also try:

  • Roasted Cauliflower Au Gratin: If you enjoy the smoky roasted flavors, instead of blanching your cauliflower, you can roast them in the oven. To do so, drizzle the florets with a tablespoon of olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Bake for 15-20 minutes or just until softened. Transfer it to your baking dish and drizzle the creamy cheese sauce over the cauliflower. Then bake your roasted cauliflower gratin following the recipe as written.
  • Broccoli Cauliflower Au Gratin: For more of a healthy and veggie-packed version, you can swap out half the cauliflower for an equal amount of broccoli instead. You can blanch them at the same time, so it is just a quick and easy swap.
  • Potato and Cauliflower Gratin: If you want to incorporate potatoes into this dish, it is totally possible and easy to do so. Simply swap out one pound of cauliflower for one pound of peeled, cubed Yukon Gold potatoes. I recommend cutting the peeled potatoes into bite-sized chunks and boiling them in water until al dente. Be sure to drain them well before adding them to the cheese sauce with the cauliflower florets.

What to Serve It With?

Decadent yet easy cauliflower au gratin is a beautiful side dish for holidays and special occasions. It is a great veggie side for Thanksgiving and a fun addition to Friendsgiving menu ideas. But it is delicious enough to enjoy with any main dish when you are craving a cheesy, delectable vegetable side dish. Serve it with:

FAQs

What is cauliflower au gratin?

Cauliflower au gratin is a twist on the French potatoes au gratin that features delicious cauliflower coated in a cheesy bechamel sauce, then topped with breadcrumbs and baked until golden brown and bubbly.

Why is my cauliflower gratin watery?

A watery cauliflower au gratin can be due to overcooked cauliflower, too thin bechamel sauce covering the dish while baking, or too low an oven temperature. To remedy this, place it back in the oven, uncovered, to allow some of the moisture to evaporate.

Can you make cauliflower au gratin ahead of time?

Yes, easy cauliflower gratin is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and can be made 1 day in advance. Simply parboil the cauliflower, drain and set it aside. Then make the roux and assemble the gratin. Instead of baking it right away, bring it to room temperature, cover, and refrigerate. On the day you are ready to serve, top it off with breadcrumbs and cheese and bake as directed.

Can cauliflower au gratin be frozen?

Yes, you can freeze cauliflower au gratin. Keep in mind, however, that freezing the gratin may affect the texture upon thawing and reheating. Simply bring it to room temperature and transfer it to a freezer-friendly container. Cover well (to avoid freezer burn) and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

Other Cauliflower Side Dishes You Might Like:

It is no secret that this cauliflower bake makes a delicious side dish to serve along with any of your favorite main dishes. Here are a few other cauliflower recipes that you might also like to try:

  • If you are looking for a cozy, plant-based dish, my Vegan Cauliflower Risotto is a great place to start. It’s creamy, comforting, and made with nutritional yeast, miso paste, and tahini. 
  • For something warm and cozy, try my Cauliflower Celery Root Soup. This vegan and gluten-free soup is silky smooth, perfect for a cold winter day.
  • And if you want something bright and more satisfying, my Roasted Cauliflower Salad is delicious. It’s made with lentils, dates, and a tahini dressing.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/feed/ 9
French Apple Cake https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/#comments Fri, 29 Sep 2023 17:16:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1966 If you have ever wondered what to bake with apples, this easy apple cake will offer the perfect solution. Adapted…]]>

If you have ever wondered what to bake with apples, this easy apple cake will offer the perfect solution. Adapted from the incredible David Lebovitz (who actually adapted it from Dorie Greenspan’s cookbook Around My French Table), it is a great alternative to my other favorite fall-inspired apple dessert, Almond Flour Apple Cake.

And if you have plenty of fresh apples on hand or just want to celebrate apple season, be sure to also check out my Apple Cranberry Cake and Apple Roses.

French apple rum cake sliced from the top view with a knife on the side.

Ingredients

This French apple rum cake requires just a short list of simple ingredients, many of which are probably already in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter allows you to control the level of salt in the cake, but salted butter can also be used. If you decide to use salted butter, be sure to omit using salt in the batter.
  • Apples: I used a mix of Honeycrisp apples and Granny Smith apples, but you can use any variety of apples. Some other good baking apples include Fuji, Golden Delicious, Braeburn, Jonagold, and Pink Lady.
  • All Purpose Flour
  • Baking Powder
  • Kosher Salt
  • Whole Eggs: Use large eggs for the most consistent texture.
  • Coconut Sugar: Since we only share desserts made with natural sweeteners, I made this easy fresh apple cake with coconut sugar, but you can use your favorite dry granulated sugar, like regular white sugar or brown sugar.
  • Dark Rum: Dark rum transforms it from a regular apple cake to an easy French apple rum cake with a touch more elegance. My favorite rum to use here is Myer’s or Mount Gay.
  • Vanilla Extract: If a fresh apple cake with rum is not your cup of tea (or prefer a no-alcohol version), you can skip the rum altogether and use a full tablespoon of vanilla extract in its place.

Optional Add-Ins

If you want to jazz things up a bit, you can add one, two, or all of the following to make this apple cake recipe just the way you want it.

  • Ground Spices: Sprinkle in 1-2 teaspoons of ground cinnamon and a dash of fresh nutmeg, or give it a nice warmth with 1 teaspoon of apple pie spice mix.
  • Nuts: Toss in some toasted, chopped walnuts, pecans, or slivered almonds for extra crunch.
  • Dried Fruit: Give it even more sweetness with raisins or golden raisins.

How to Make an Apple Cake?

For a fast and easy method, I like to bake the apple cake in a springform pan. With that being said, you can use a regular cake pan, just make sure to grease the pan well before adding the batter. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Prep equipment: Place the oven rack in the middle position. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Generously butter an 8-inch** round springform pan. Line the bottom with parchment paper, place it on a sheet pan, and set it aside.
  2. Melt butter: Melt the butter in a small saucepan. Set it aside to cool while you prepare the rest of the batter.
  3. Prepare the apples: Remove the core and peel the apples, then cut into 1-inch chunks.
  4. Mix dry ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, and salt.
A collage of images showing how to mix the batter to make this apple cake recipe.
  1. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together eggs and sugar until thoroughly mixed and glossy. Then, whisk in the rum and vanilla.
  2. Make apple batter: Add half of the flour mixture into the wet ingredients, followed by half of the melted butter. Alternate once more with the rest of the flour and remaining butter and stir until just combined. Fold in the apple chunks, making sure each one is coated with the batter.
  3. Bake: Transfer the batter to the prepared pan and smooth the top with a rubber spatula. Bake for 50 minutes, or until golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the center of the cake comes out clean.
Fresh apple cake in a spring form cake pan before baked and after baked.
  1. Cool: Allow to cool for 5-10 minutes, then run a knife around the edges to gently loosen the cake from the pan. Remove the sides of the springform pan or gently remove from the cake pan. Transfer to a cake platter or large plate. Cool for at least 1 hour.  Sprinkle it with powdered sugar (if preferred), before serving.

How to Store This Apple Cake?

This easy French apple cake recipe is a great make-ahead cake that you can enjoy throughout the week. While it is best on the day it is made, it keeps fresh if stored properly. Here is how I do it:

  • Storage: The apple rum cake will keep fresh for up to 3 days at room temperature, covered on the kitchen counter. Since the cake itself is very moist, it’s best to store it covered with a cake dome, overturned bowl, or with a few toothpicks inserted throughout the top of the cake and then tented with plastic wrap.
  • Freezing: Due to the high ratio of liquid coming from the apples, I do not recommend freezing this cake.

How to Serve?

Whether you want to enjoy this apple cake as the French do or give it more of an American spin, some of my favorite ways to serve include:

A slice of rum apple cake on a plate with a fork on the side.
  • Ice Cream: Serve it slightly warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream, such as Honey Vanilla Ice Cream or more decadent caramel ice cream.
  • Cream / Sugar: Finish it with a dollop of creme fraiche, mascarpone cheese, Maple Whipped Cream, or a simple sprinkle of confectioner’s sugar.
  • Sauce: Drizzle it with storebaught caramel sauce, date caramel sauce, or fruit preserves.
  • Coffee / Tea: The sweet apple cake goes particularly well with bitter espresso or a mild cup of tea, such as Earl Grey.
  • Wine: Serve it as the French would, with a chilled glass of Sauternes (a sweet dessert wine) or an after-dinner beverage, like Calvados or Brandy.

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for this homemade apple cake recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d like to share to ensure the best results. Below are a few lessons I learned while testing the recipe:

  • Use room temperature ingredients: When all the ingredients are roughly the same temperature, it makes for a more cohesive batter. In this case, make sure to allow time for the butter to cool down and allow the eggs to come to room temperature.
  • Prevent the apples from oxidizing: For some added insurance, you can toss the diced apples with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to prevent browning. The fresh citrus juice adds a nice little tang, too.
  • Cubed Apples: As you can see in the pictures, this cake is a bit different than your usual fluffy apple cake recipe. Rather, it is cubed apples covered with cake batter. Due to the high moisture content of the cubed apples, it doesn’t rise as much as you would expect.
  • Use the right pan: I used an 8-inch springform cake pan for easy removal. You can also use a 9-inch springform pan, just note that the cake will be thinner. If you do not own a springform pan, a regular 8 or 9-inch cake pan will do, just make sure to thoroughly grease the bottom and sides, and line the bottom of the pan with a circle of parchment paper.
  • Pay attention to baking time: Bake times will vary based on your oven. Start checking the cake at the 50-minute mark, and continue to bake in 5-minute increments until golden brown and springy.
  • Browning: If you use coconut or brown sugar as your sweetener, the top of the cake will brown more compared to using granulated sugar.
  • Cool completely: For best results, cool in the pan for 5 minutes, loosen the sides, and then transfer to a cake plate. It is best if you let it cool for at least an hour. 

FAQs

What country did apple cake originate from?

There are many different variations of apple cake throughout the world thanks to regional and religious influences. The first version of French apple cake, tarte tatin, which is technically more like an upside-down version of apple pie, was invented by the Tatin sisters at their hotel Lamotte Beuvron in the 19th century.

What is a substitute for dark rum in apple cake?

Simply replace the dark rum with more vanilla extract. Feel free to use up to one full tablespoon of vanilla extract.

What’s the difference between apple pie and apple cake?

Apple pie is an apple dessert where apples are the filling between two crusts made from shortcrust pastry. Apple cake, on the other hand, is diced apples surrounded by a batter made primarily of butter, flour, and sugar.

Other Baked Goods with Apples You Might Also Like:

Wondering what you can make with fresh apples? Well, you have come to the right place. Here are a few other apple recipes you might also like:

If you try this French Apple Cake, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cake sliced on a plate from the top view.
Print

French Apple Cake Recipe

This French Apple Cake is a simple yet classic fall cake featuring cubed apples folded in batter that is flavored with dark rum. Made with just a few everyday ingredients, it is a French apple dessert that you can make with only 15 minutes of hands-on time.
Course Cake
Cuisine French
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Cooling time 1 hour
Total Time 2 hours
Servings 8 slices
Calories 266kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more for greasing the pan (110gr.)
  • 4 large apples ~2 pounds, I used a mix of Honey Crisp and Granny Smith Apples
  • ¾ cup all-purpose flour 110 gr.
  • ¾ teaspoon baking powder
  • teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • ¾ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar*
  • 2 tablespoons dark rum
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon powdered sugar optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Generously butter an 8-inch** round springform pan. Line it with parchment paper, place it on a sheet pan, and set it aside.
  • Place butter in a small saucepan and heat until fully melted. Let it cool off the heat while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Core and peel apples, then cut them into 1-inch chunks. Set them aside.
  • Whisk together flour, baking powder, and salt in a small bowl. Set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together eggs and sugar until thoroughly mixed. Whisk in the rum and vanilla.
  • Whisk half of the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients, followed by half of the now-cooled melted butter.
  • Stir in the rest of the flour mixture and butter. Whisk until fully combined.
  • Fold in the apple chunks and make sure that they are fully coated with the batter.
  • Transfer the batter to the prepared cake pan and smooth the top with a spatula. Place the cake pan on a sheet pan (we do this to catch any bubbling juices.)
  • Bake for 50 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then run a knife through the edges to loosen the cake from the pan.
  • Transfer to a cake platter (or a wire rack) and let it cool for at least an hour before serving. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with a small amount of powdered sugar before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes an 8-inch cake (8 slices). The nutritional values below are per slice.
  • Sugar: You can substitute coconut sugar with an equal amount of brown sugar or granulated sugar. If you use granulated sugar, the surface of the cake will not brown as much.
  • Cake pan: A 9-inch springform pan would also work, but the cake will be thinner. If you do not own a springform, you can make this in a cake pan, but make sure to grease it well so that it will come out easily.
  • No alcohol version: If you prefer to use no alcohol or just want to skip the rum altogether, use a full tablespoon of vanilla extract in its place.
  • Storage: This cake will keep fresh for up to 3 days at room temperature, covered on the kitchen counter. Since the cake itself is very moist, it’s best to store it covered with a cake dome, overturned bowl, or with a few toothpicks inserted throughout the top of the cake and then tented with plastic wrap. Alternatively, you can cut it into slices and store in an airtight container.
  • Serving suggestions: A dollop of crème fraîche is possibly the most French way of serving it, but you can also top it off with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
  • Cubed Apples: As you can see in the pictures, this cake is a bit different than your usual batter-heavy apple cake recipe. Rather, it is cubed apples covered with cake batter. Please be aware that due to the high moisture content of the cubed apples, it doesn’t rise as much as you would expect.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 71mg | Sodium: 124mg | Potassium: 129mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/feed/ 23
Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick…]]>

Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
  • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
  • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
  • Extra-virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
  • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

Substitutions 

Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

  • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
  • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots and Balsamic Maple Brussels Sprouts recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

  1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
  1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
  2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
  3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
  4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
  • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
  • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

  • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
A close up of the dish from the top view.

What to Serve It With?

Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

Expert Tips

When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
  • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

FAQs

Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
  • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
  • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
  • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
  • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
    • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 20
Air Fryer Garlic Bread https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/#comments Fri, 14 Jul 2023 13:39:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68957 With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air…]]>

With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes.

Air Fryer Garlic Bread on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You can say goodbye to complicated Italian recipes with this super-easy side dish. You only need a handful of ingredients to make air fryer homemade garlic bread.

Ingredients to make garlic bread in air fryer with sliced bread.
  • Bread: During our recipe testing, we found that the best bread for this delicious garlic bread recipe is a French baguette because of its fluffy insides and firm yet crusty exterior. Day-old bread, too, is preferable as it is drier compared to a fresh loaf. However, you can also make garlic bread with white, Italian, or French bread if you don’t have a baguette. If you want to make your own loaf, you could also whip up my favorite crusty bread, aka No-Knead Bread, for an effortless solution. However, remember that the air frying time may need to be modified based on the type of bread you are using. Irrespective of the bread variety, we recommend cutting your bread into ½-inch slices to ensure proper cooking.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter is the best choice for garlic bread because it keeps your side from tasting overly salty when paired with parmesan cheese. However, if you want to make this recipe without cheese, I recommend using salted butter or adding a touch of flaky sea salt or Kosher salt to your butter mixture.
  • Garlic: It’s essential to use finely minced garlic in this recipe to ensure its flavors evenly coat each slice of bread. If you prefer fresh garlic, I recommend using a garlic press (affiliate link) to chop the ingredient into an ultra-fine paste. If you don’t have any fresh garlic in your pantry, you may substitute this ingredient for an equal amount of garlic powder. You could also use Roasted Garlic Cloves instead for a rich, caramelized taste.
  • Parsley: Parsley is essential to giving this dish its herby undertones and a pop of bright color. You can use dried or fresh parsley if you chop it thinly.
  • Shredded parmesan cheese: I usually use shredded parmesan when I make cheesy garlic bread in the air fryer, giving each bite a touch of nutty, rich flavor. However, shaved parmesan or shredded mozzarella cheese would also work.

How to Make Garlic Bread in the Air Fryer?

Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a simple way to enjoy warm, perfectly toasted sides every night of the week—or even a quick snack! Plus, it only takes six steps and no lengthy oven time.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to make garlic bread in the air fryer.
  1. Make the garlic butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese.
  2. Coat the bread slices: Spread about one teaspoon of the butter mixture onto each slice of bread, covering the entire surface.
  3. Transfer the bread: Arrange the buttered bread slices in the air fryer basket. Make sure they lay in a single layer without any overlap. If all your bread doesn’t fit, you may need to cook them in two batches.
  4. Air fry the garlic toast: Toast the garlic bread in the air fryer for approximately five minutes or until golden brown.
  5. Serve: Serve the toasted garlic bread while still warm.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This recipe for garlic bread in the air fryer is an easy way to simplify your meal prep. Prepare this recipe ahead of time for an easy crowd-ready side, or store your leftover garlic bread to enjoy throughout the week.

  • Make-ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, make the garlic butter mixture up to one day beforehand and slice your bread into ½-inch slices. Then, store the butter mixture in an airtight container in the fridge and keep the bread slices separately, spreading the pieces with the softened butter just before air frying. If you’re preparing for a dinner party and won’t have time to spread the slices before cooking, you can also coat the bread slices with the butter mixture one day in advance. Then, arrange them in a single layer on a sheet pan, cover them tightly with stretch film or aluminum foil, and store them in the fridge until ready to cook.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature to make frozen garlic bread for later use. Then, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight freezer-safe container (or Ziploc bag) in the freezer until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices when reheating garlic bread in an air fryer. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

What to Serve with Air Fried Garlic Bread?

Cooking garlic bread in the air fryer is one of the best ways to ensure a five-star meal any day of the week. This simple collection of recipes will satisfy any craving, from creamy pasta to light salads.

Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to toast French bread in the air fryer. With this expert guide, you’ll enjoy deliciously crisp, heartily flavored garlic bread in no time.

  • Evenly sliced bread: When making air fryer garlic bread with sliced bread, slicing your loaf into evenly thick pieces is imperative. The thickness of your slices will directly affect how long they take to cook., so I recommend cutting ½-inch portions to ensure ideal toasting. 
  • Spread butter evenly: An easy way to give each bite of your garlic bread a delectably bold flavor is to spread your butter mixture over your slices evenly. For best results, only about one teaspoon of butter per slice (granted, you are using French baguette slices), as too much will result in soggy bread.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer: Be sure to arrange your garlic bread in the air fryer in a single layer without any overlap to get evenly browned slices. You may have to cook this recipe in multiple batches if you have extra pieces of bread.
  • Different air fryer brands: How long it takes to air fry garlic bread may change depending on the air fryer you own. We tested this recipe both in Ninja Foodie and Instant Pot air fryers. It took slightly shorter to cook Ninja Foodi garlic bread than its Instant Pot air fryer version. Therefore, we recommend using this recipe as a general guide and watching your slices closely to ensure they’re perfectly golden brown before serving.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Because toasting French bread in an air fryer takes so little time, you must watch your bread slices while they cook to keep them from burning—especially when you add parmesan cheese.

FAQs

Making fresh garlic bread in an air fryer is a beginner-ready recipe that comes together with minimal effort. Below, I’ve answered all your questions about this easy dish, taking the stress out of the process.

Can you air-fry garlic bread?

Yes! Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a quick and easy way to ensure robustly flavored, evenly toasted slices any day of the week. And the best part, it is much quicker than making it in the oven.

What is the best time and temperature to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

I recommend air-frying your garlic bread for about five minutes at 350 degrees F. However, this time may change depending on the thickness of your slices and the brand of your air fryer.

How long to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

When making garlic bread in an air fryer that’s not frozen, you’ll need about five minutes at 350 degrees F. to give your slices an ideal warmth and crispiness.

How long to reheat garlic bread in an air fryer?

To warm up garlic bread in an air fryer, preheat your air fryer to 300 degrees F. Then, toast your slices for 2-3 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

How long to toast frozen garlic bread in an air fryer?

To cook frozen garlic bread, set your air fryer to 350 degrees F. and cook the slices for 5-7 minutes or until golden brown.

How to cook store bought garlic bread in an air fryer?

Though instructions may vary between brands, it only takes five minutes at 350 degrees F. to air-fry Texas Toast (prepackaged.) However, keep in mind that the timing might slightly change based on the brand you are using. Therefore, we recommend watching your batches closely when making store-bought air-fried garlic bread.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

No one can resist the hassle-free, tasty eats possible with an air fryer. If you liked this air fryer garlic toast, here are a few other easy air fryer recipes you might also like.

If you try this Air Fryer Garlic Bread recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried garlic bread on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Garlic Bread Recipe (Fresh or Frozen)

Making fresh garlic bread in the air fryer is possibly the easiest and quickest way to treat yourself to a delicious side dish or appetizer. Not to mention, using your air fryer cuts down on the cooking time, allowing you to enjoy your garlic bread in minutes.
Course Bread, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup unsalted butter at room temperature (2 ounces)
  • 5 cloves garlic crushed through a garlic press or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley or chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated (optional*)
  • 1 baguette sliced into ½-inch thick slices

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese (if using) in a bowl.
  • Spread the butter mixture evenly onto each slice of bread, approximately 1 teaspoon per slice.
  • Place the garlic toast slices in the air fryer in a single layer, ensuring that they are not overlapping. Depending on the size of your air fryer, if they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for approximately 5 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Serve immediately while they are still warm.
  • Any leftover browned slices can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. You can reheat in the air fryer at 300 degrees F for 2-3 minutes until warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 slices of French baguette bread. The nutritional information below is per slice.
  • Bread: You can use any other bread you have on hand. Italian bread, sourdough bread, French bread, and even ciabatta would all work. However, keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of bread and air frying time. We recommend slicing in ½-inch slices for the best results. We also recommend day-old bread as it absorbs the garlic-butter mixture better.
  • Parmesan Cheese: If you decide to make this recipe without parmesan cheese, add in 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt into the butter mixture.
  • Garlic: We found that minced fresh garlic was way better than garlic powder. However, the two can be used interchangeably in a pinch. If you do have the time, we recommend trying this recipe with Roasted Garlic or Air Fried Garlic for truly next-level garlic bread.
  • Parsley: If you do not have dried parsley, you can substitute it with fresh, but it should be finely chopped when incorporating it into the butter mixture. Alternatively, you can use other dried or fresh herbs such as thyme, oregano, and rosemary. 
  • Keep in mind that individual air fryer brands may perform differently, so consider this recipe as a starting point and adjust the cook time according to your personal preference.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight Ziploc bag in the freezer until ready to cook.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices before reheating. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 197mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 154IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/feed/ 2
Roasted Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and Maple Balsamic Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Wed, 08 Feb 2023 16:24:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11948 Beet Salad Ingredients The ingredients for this beet salad are all common pantry or fridge staples, so you likely already…]]>

A Restaurant-Quality Salad You Can Make At Home

Aysegul's photo.

Whenever we go out to eat, I always take a look at the salad section on the menu first. It says a lot about the chef: how they think about flavor, texture, and presentation.

I first had a version of this beet salad years ago at a restaurant in New York City, and it completely changed how I thought about beets. 

At first, I thought it was something only a restaurant could pull off, but when I tried to recreate it at home, I realized how naturally the ingredients work together.

The earthy sweetness of the beets, the tangy creaminess of goat cheese, and the crunch of walnuts are so complementary that it’s hard to get it wrong.

Since then, I’ve experimented with different dressings and settled on a maple balsamic vinaigrette with a touch of Dijon mustard. It’s the perfect finishing touch, and whenever I make this salad, friends always ask for the recipe.

Beet Salad Ingredients

The ingredients for this beet salad are all common pantry or fridge staples, so you likely already have most of them on hand. To make things easy, I broke the ingredients into three sets: one for the beets, another for the dressing, and a final set for the salad itself. 

You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card; however, I’ve included some notes from my recipe testing below.

Ingredients for the roasted beet salad with text on each ingredient.

For the Beets:

Beets: I chose a combination of classic red beets and golden beets (also known as yellow beets) to add color and variety. However, pink Chioggia beets, with a beautiful pink and white pattern on the inside, would also work beautifully in this recipe.

Seasonings: A bit of olive oil and salt, and pepper is all you need to roast them in the oven.

For the Salad:

Greens: I love the combination of peppery arugula and spring mix, but feel free to use any earthy, leafy green of your choice. Alternatively, you can use one kind, or take it up a notch and add a handful of baby spinach in the mix.

Shallot: I prefer to use a shallot in this recipe because it has a sweet, mild flavor, but you could also use a red onion for a sharper flavor. 

Crumbled Goat Cheese: The combination of goat cheese, roasted beets, and walnuts is a classic, but if you’re not a fan, another good option is feta cheese. Still, any type of soft cheese would work. 

Walnuts: Plain, chopped walnuts provide the best crunch to this salad. If they aren’t your thing, you could also add chopped pecans or pistachios. To take it up a notch, consider toasted pecans or even maple-spiced walnuts. 

Crisp Apple or Pear: When I first published this recipe in 2023, I didn’t include any fruit. However, I have recently been adding a sliced apple (or a pear would work), and it not only adds a welcome crunch but also pairs beautifully with the earthy flavors of the beets.

Balsamic dressing ingredients for this salad recipe.

For the Dressing:

Maple Syrup: This is my preferred sweetener, but you can also use honey or agave syrup.

Balsamic Vinegar: A good, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena is ideal, but any brand would work here. In a pinch, red wine vinegar is a good substitute.

How to Make Beet Salad?

With just a little bit of prep and some baking time, you can have this stunning, restaurant-quality beetroot salad with goat’s cheese and walnuts on the table and ready to enjoy. 

Just as we broke the ingredients into three sections, we’re also breaking the instructions into three sections:

How to Prepare Beets for Salad

When it comes to cooking the beets, I opted for roasting them in the oven as it is easy and convenient. With that being said, you can cook them in any way you like.

Boil them if that is easier for you or cook them in the air fryer if you are short on time. 

If you are with me, below is how I roast them for this salad recipe:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C).

A person wrapping beets in foil to prepare for roasting in the oven.

Step 2 – Prepare the beets for baking: Cut a sheet of aluminum foil into four 8 to 10-inch squares. Place a beet in the center of the square, drizzle it with ½ tablespoon of olive oil, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper to taste. 

Tightly wrap each beet in foil and arrange them on a baking sheet. If you prefer not to wrap beets in foil, you can first wrap them in parchment paper and then wrap the parchment-wrapped beets in foil.

Step 3 – Bake: Place the foil-wrapped beets in a single layer on a baking sheet and roast for 25-30 minutes, or until tender. 

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I found medium-sized beets are usually ready around the 28-minute mark. However, keep in mind that the exact timing depends on the size of your beets.

You can check doneness by inserting a knife into one of the beets. If it slides in and out easily (that’s the sweet spot for a soft but not mushy texture), it should be good to go. 

A person preparing beets for salad by slicing them and placing in a bowl.

Step 4 – Let them rest: Remove the beets from the oven, unwrap them, and let them cool for about 10 minutes on the counter. Be very careful, they are very hot at this point.

Once they’re cool enough to handle, carefully remove the foil and then peel the skins. You can use a paper towel, your fingers, or even a vegetable peeler.  

Slice them into wedges and set aside.

How to Make the Dressing

I tried a few different salad dressing for this beet salad before I landed on this one. While a basic lemon balsamic vinaigrette would work, I wanted one that is a bit sweeter, tangier, and garlickier, similar to the one I had in that restaurant.

A person shaking salad dressing ingredients in a mason jar.

Step 1 – Combine the ingredients: Place the maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper in a mason jar.

Step 2 – Shake: Tightly secure the lid on the jar and shake to combine the ingredients. Give it a taste and adjust if needed. If it feels too sharp for your taste buds, add a drizzle of maple syrup; if it’s too sweet, a splash of vinegar will help balance it out.

How to Assemble The Salad

Once the beets are roasted and the dressing is ready, this beet root salad recipe comes together in minutes:

A person tossing greens in dressing and adding beets and cheese to the salad.

Step 1 – Assemble the salad: Add the greens and thinly sliced shallot to a large salad bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vinaigrette over the greens and toss gently to combine. I recommend starting with half the dressing, tossing, and then adding more if needed, as you want the leaves lightly coated and not soggy.

Step 3 – Add the beets and nuts: Toss in the cooked beet wedges and chopped walnuts. 

Step 4 – Garnish and serve: Add the crumbled goat cheese over the beetroot salad at the very end so it stays creamy and doesn’t melt into the salad. 

What to Serve With This Beet Salad

Whenever I want an elegant yet simple salad to serve as a light lunch or a holiday side dish, I make this roasted beet and goat cheese salad. It never disappoints.

It also pairs beautifully with cozy soups, meaty or vegetarian mains, or even your Thanksgiving spread as a colorful centerpiece. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

A salad with cheese, nuts, and beets in a bowl from the top view.

FAQs

Can I use canned beets instead of fresh?

Yes, you can, but I find canned beets to lack in flavor compared to freshly cooked beets. Still, it is a good shortcut if you are short on time.

Why roast beets instead of boiling?

I find that roasting caramelizes the natural sugars in beets, resulting in a richer and deeper flavor profile.

Can I make this vegan?

Yes, you can. Simply omit the goat cheese or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Can I serve it warm?

You sure can, and it would be delicious. Though if you go down that route, be sure to add the goat cheese at the last minute so it doesn’t melt.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Salad Recipes You Might Like

This roasted beet salad is one of my favorite Fall Salad Recipes and one that I make often. That being said, I have many other restaurant-quality salad recipes that you might also like:

  • If you’re craving something cozy and seasonal, my 20-minute Harvest Salad Recipe with apples, kale, and figs deserves a spot on your holiday table. 
  • For something warm and elegant, my Roasted Warm Pear Salad is ready in under 30 minutes. With maple-roasted pears, goat cheese, and crunchy pecans, it’s as beautiful as it is delicious.
  • If you love salads with crunch, my Shredded Brussels Sprout Salad features shaved Brussels sprouts, apples, hazelnuts, and creamy goat cheese. It’s light, crunchy, and easy to make ahead.
  • And if you prefer something quick and refreshing, my Mixed Spring Salad is always a hit, pairing beautifully with nearly any main dish.
Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and walnuts with utensils on the side.
Print

Beet Salad with Goat Cheese Recipe

This Roasted Beet Salad with Goat Cheese is a restaurant-quality dish that's perfect for any occasion. With roasted beets, crunchy walnuts, tangy goat cheese, and a homemade dressing, this salad is a sure crowd-pleaser. Serve it warm or cold with soup, sides, or your favorite entree.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 414kcal

Ingredients

For The Beets

  • 4 medium size beets any color would work
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • Salt & pepper

For The Dressing

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad

  • 1 small shallot chopped
  • 6 cups arugula and spring mix 80 gr – arugula + 100 gr spring mix
  • ½ cup walnuts chopped
  • 4 oz. goat cheese crumbled

Instructions

To roast beets for salad:

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Cut four 8-10-inch square aluminum foils. Place a beet in the middle, drizzle with ½ tablespoon olive oil, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
    Person preparing beets for roasting.
  • Cover it tightly with aluminum foil. Repeat the same process with the rest of the beets.
  • Place covered beets on the prepared baking sheet and bake for 25-30 minutes or until they are easily pierced with the tip of a knife.
  • Unwrap the beets and let them cool for 10 minutes on the kitchen counter. Gently remove the skins and cut them into wedges.
    Person preparing beets for the salad.

To make the dressing:

  • Place maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake to combine.
    A mason jar with the beet salad dressing.

To assemble the salad:

  • Place the salad greens and the chopped shallot into a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to ensure all salad greens are evenly coated with the vinaigrette.
    Person drizzling the salad with the dressing and tossing it.
  • Add in cooked beets and walnuts and toss to combine.
    Showing the assembly stages of the beet salad.
  • Garnish with crumbled goat cheese and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups of salad, ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make ahead: You can follow the instructions above to roast the beets and make the dressing ahead of time. For best results, I recommend storing the beets and the dressing in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to two days before serving. When you’re ready to serve, simply assemble the salad.
  • Store: Store your leftover salad in an airtight container or in a large bowl covered with plastic wrap. It will stay fresh in the fridge for a day or two. I don’t recommend storing it any longer than that, as the greens will wilt and lose their freshness.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 414kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 322mg | Potassium: 734mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 752IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 42
Air Fryer Beets https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/#respond Tue, 07 Feb 2023 17:57:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64487 It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer…]]>

It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer Corn, Air Fryer Asparagus, and even Air Fryer Green Beans, air-fried veggies are an easy way to pack major nutrition with few calories and exquisite taste. Plus, unlike veggies roasted in the oven, these recipes take less than 15 minutes to make—with five ingredients or fewer!

Roasted beetroot in air fryer served in a bowl shown from the top view.

Learning how to air fry beets is a simple skill any chef can benefit from. This guide has what you need, from how to cook whole beets in an air fryer to peeling tips.

Ingredients

You only need four basic ingredients to whip up this air fryer beets recipe. Fast, tasty, and gluten-free, this delectable recipe won’t require any last-minute trips to the grocery store.

  • Beets: Many different beet varieties will work for this air fryer recipe. Red beets, golden beets, and Chioggia beets (AKA candy cane beets) are just a few of my favorites. Whichever type you choose, just be sure to peel and cut them into small, 1-inch chunks before cooking them in your air fryer. With that being said, you can roast beets as a whole or with other root vegetables (i.e., sweet potatoes and carrots.)
  • Oil: You can use either olive oil or avocado oil when cooking beets in an air fryer.
  • Salt and black pepper: These two simple seasonings are the key to bringing out your air fryer beets’ earthy flavor and natural sweetness.
Ingredients for air fried root vegetables in bowls from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other root vegetables: Take this easy side dish to the next level by air frying your beets alongside another nutritious vegetable. Air fryer beets and carrots make a tender, filling combination, while air fryer beets and sweet potatoes will tantalize your tastebuds with a mildly sweet flavor. Or, roast all three together for a colorful veggie mix!
  • Seasonings: Herby and light, fresh herbs like mint or parsley make a fantastic addition to your air fryer roasted beets. Or, top your beets with Italian seasoning for an extra earthy flavor.
  • Toppings: If you’re a fan of rich, creamy flavor, you’ll love topping your roasted beets with goat cheese or feta cheese. Add a drizzle of olive oil, and your whole table will ask for seconds.

How to Cook Beets in Air Fryer?

Anyone can prepare roasted beets in an air fryer in minutes. In just five steps, these simple instructions will have even novice chefs making this great healthy side dish.

  1. Prepare the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
A person adding olive oil and salt to sliced beets in a bowl.
  1. Toss the ingredients: Transfer the beet pieces to a mixing bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil, sprinkle them with salt and black pepper, and toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
Roasting beets in air fryer from the top view.
  1. Add beets to the basket: Arrange the seasoned beets in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
  2. Cook beets in the air fryer: Place beets in the air fryer and cook for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the frying process.
  3. Serve: Transfer the air-fried beets to a serving platter and add additional seasoning if necessary.

Can I Cook Whole Beets in Air Fryer?

Yes! You can easily make roasted whole beets in the air fryer and eliminate the extra prep time that comes with chopping. 

With that being said, there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when roasting whole beets in an air fryer, I recommend selecting beets that are small and close to the same size. 

Roasted whole beets air fryer method shown from the top view.

The process and the air frying temperature do not change when roasting whole beets in an air fryer. Simply air fry your whole beets at 400 degrees F. and test for doneness after 15 minutes, flipping the veggies halfway through. Keep in mind, however, that it can take up to 20-25 minutes to roast whole beets in an air fryer, depending on the size of your beets.

You will also need to peel your veggies before placing the whole beets in the air fryer, as peeling them afterward will be more difficult. Using a vegetable peeler will make this step particularly easy.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Air-fried beetroot is fantastic when it comes to easy storage. Whether you freeze your air fry beets for months or save your leftovers for the next day, these storage tips are a meal prep must.

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beetroot in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.

How to Serve Air Fried Beets?

When you roast beets in an air fryer, you can design your menu in countless different ways. These menu ideas guarantee a five-star meal, from crisp salads to hearty mains.

  • Top off a salad: Tender and flavorful, roasted beets from an air fryer make an excellent salad topper. Roasted Beet Salad is one of my favorite beet recipes to prepare during busy weekdays.
  • Serve it as a side with meat: If you want a meal to impress, you’ll adore this sophisticated pair. After cooking beetroot in the air fryer, sprinkle it with feta or goat cheese and fresh herbs, such as fresh mint or parsley, and serve it alongside a hearty protein. Air-fried beets go exceptionally well with elevated meat dishes, such as Instant Pot Lamb Shanks or Reverse Sear Chateaubriand.
  • On top of hummus: Out of all the great combinations, easy roasted air fryer beets and savory hummus are among the greatest. Add your cooked beets to tasty hummus recipes, like my Mediterranean Hummus or Carrot Hummus, and you won’t believe how much variation you can achieve in your snacks.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to this mouthwatering air fryer beet recipe. Following these pro cooking tips, your beets will be perfectly tender and exquisitely crisp every time.

  • Oil: One tablespoon is the ideal amount of oil for 1 pound of fresh beets that are medium-sized. We initially tried making this recipe using a teaspoon of oil as we wanted to use the least amount of oil possible. However, we quickly found out that an adequate amount of oil is an important factor when it comes to ensuring that your beets don’t dry up or lose their tender texture during the air frying process.
  • Peeling and cutting: For the best results, I recommend peeling and cutting your raw beets into 1-inch chunks before air frying them. This is not to say you can not do it later, but we found it much easier to do it beforehand.
Air fryer beets and sweet potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
  • Roast with other root vegetables: If you can’t get enough vegetarian recipes, you’ll love air frying your beets alongside another nutritious root vegetable. Carrots and sweet potatoes are two of my favorite air-fried pairs, and they take the same amount of time in the air fryer to cook properly.
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When air frying beets, it’s essential that you don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket, as too many beets will result in uneven cooking. I also recommend tossing your beets halfway through the roasting process to give each side equal roasting time.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook beets in an air fryer?

The total time it takes to make air fryer roasted beets is 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, there is a direct correlation between the size of the beets and air frying time. For best results, we recommend cutting beets in equal sizes before roasting them in the air fryer.

Is it better to peel beets before or after roasting them in the air fryer?

I highly recommend peeling your beets before cooking them in your air fryer. Unlike boiled beets, air-fried beet skin is much more difficult to remove after cooking.

Can you air fry canned beets?

If necessary, you can roast canned beets in an air fryer. Just be sure to dry each piece as much as possible with a clean paper towel before mixing it with the oil and seasonings.

Can you roast golden beets in the air fryer?

Yes! If you want a zesty, mellow alternative to red beets, air fryer golden beets are an excellent choice. The process and air frying time do not change. Simply follow the air fryer beets recipe below as written.

How to check the doneness of air-fried beets?

To see if your air fryer beets don’t need more cooking, insert a knife into their center. If the blade enters easily, your beets are ready to serve. If the knife finds resistance, you may add a few minutes of cooking time.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

I think we can all agree that air fryer veggies are healthy and easy to make. Not to mention, they make a great side dish. Here are a few more easy recipes to help you satisfy your cravings and get your fill of healthy nutrients:

If you try this Air Fryer Beets recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted carrots and beets in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Beets Recipe

These Air Fryer Beets are a colorful, nutritious, and easy side dish that's suitable for any occasion. Thanks to the speedy air fryer, these veggies are ready in under 30 minutes! Serve them as an elegant accompaniment to a dinner entree, as a topping for your favorite salad, or even for a quick and satisfying snack.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 160kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound beets red, gold or Chioggia beets would all work
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer and prep the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
  • Season the beets: Transfer to a large bowl, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the air fryer: Transfer the beets into the now-preheated air fryer basket and make sure they are in a single layer.
  • Air fry: Air fry for 15 minutes or until they are fork tender. Be sure to turn once halfway through the air frying process.
  • Serve: Carefully transfer them to a serving platter, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beets in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.
  • Roasting whole beets: You can roast whole beets in the air fryer. However, please remember that there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when shopping for beets, purchase beets that are small and equal in size. The ones you see in the photos took about 15-20 minutes, but larger ones would take more time to fry.
  • Using other root vegetables: Thanks to similar air frying times, you can roast sweet potatoes and carrots along with beets.

Nutrition

Calories: 160kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 758mg | Potassium: 741mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 76IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/feed/ 0
Baked Goat Cheese Salad https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Thu, 22 Dec 2022 22:13:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=534 Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t…]]>

Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t get enough goat cheese recipes like this, you’ll adore my other goat cheese-inspired dishes, such as Goat Cheese and Spinach Stuffed Chicken and Goat Cheese Quiche.

Green salad topped off with warm goat cheese rounds from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this recipe for goat cheese salad, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
  • Goat cheese disks (or balls): For the goat cheese croutons, gather fresh thyme, parsley, panko breadcrumbs, garlic powder, an egg, Dijon mustard, kosher salt, black pepper, and an 8-oz. log of fresh goat cheese.
  • For the Salad and the vinaigrette: For the salad and warm goat cheese salad dressing, gather mixed salad greens, olive oil, red wine vinegar, Dijon mustard, shallot, kosher salt, and black pepper.

How to Slice Goat Cheese with Dental Floss?

If you’ve ever tried to cut goat cheese with a knife, you know how difficult it can be. Instead, I recommend using dental floss or kitchen twine to cut perfect, mess-free slices every time. Just be sure to use unflavored dental floss to avoid giving it an unwanted taste. Also, it is best to do this while it is still cold, as goat cheese that is at room temperature will be hard to slice.

Person showing how to slice a log of goat cheese with dental floss.
  1. Line up dental floss: Slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Remember that this recipe calls for eight equal pieces of an 8-oz. goat cheese log.
  2. Lift and twist: Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log.

How to Make Warm Goat Cheese Salad

No one can resist baked goat cheese recipes as easy as this one. Equal parts effortless and tasty, this salad recipe comes together in just 30 minutes (plus the resting time.)

  1. Prepare the baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
Dipping station for baked chevre balls with small bowls.
  1. Prep the dipping station: Place the fresh herbs on a small, shallow plate, and mix them until thoroughly combined. Then, combine panko crumbs and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and black pepper in a separate small bowl. Set all three mixtures aside.
person making goat cheese medallions dipped in herbs, egg and panko breadcrumbs.
  1. Make the cheese balls: Roll each of your eight goat cheese medallions into a small disk (or ball). Then, roll each one into the herb mixture, evenly coating their exteriors. Then, roll the balls into the egg-mustard mixture and let the excess liquid drip. Finally, roll the balls into the panko mixture. Gently press the bread crumbs into the balls to ensure an even coating.
  2. Freeze the goat cheese: Transfer the breadcrumb-coated goat cheese to the prepared baking sheet, and place it in the freezer for 30 minutes. 
a collage of images showing how to make baked goat cheese salad.
  1. Mix the salad dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, salt, and black pepper.
  2. Make the baked chevre: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Once heated, transfer the tray of goat cheese balls from the freezer to the oven, and bake for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Mix the salad: Place the salad greens in a large bowl, drizzle them with the prepared dressing, and toss until evenly mixed.
  4. Serve: Divide the salad among four salad plates. Place two baked goat cheese rounds on top of each salad.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

Making this recipe ahead of time is the easiest way to make busy weeknights a breeze. With such simple prep and storage, it’s no wonder why warm goat cheese salad is a fan-favorite side.

  • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • Store: To store your baked goat cheese salad, transfer your leftovers into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.
Salad placed on two small plates and served with wine on the side.

Expert Tips

This restaurant-quality salad is as easy to make as it is delicious to eat. With these foolproof pointers, you can make it without hassle or stress—just like a master chef!

  • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
  • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
  • Broil until golden brown: To give your goat cheese rounds extra crispiness, broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.

What Goes Well With Goat Cheese Salad?

Almost any of my foolproof main dishes would make a delectable pair with this warm goat cheese appetizer. Below are a few of my favorites to serve alongside this five-star side.

  • Roast Beef Tenderloin: Tender beef and toasted goat cheese is a match made in heaven. Serve it as a side salad for a photo-ready spread for any special occasion.
  • Turkey Tenderloin: Pair this goat cheese salad recipe with juicy turkey tenderloin, and you’ll have a mouthwatering menu ready for anything, from a Friendsgiving potluck to a weeknight meal.
  • Cream of Chestnut Soup: If you’d rather have a vegetarian meal, serve it with soup on the side. This French Cuisine-inspired chestnut soup would pair beautifully with this simple chevre salad for a delicious and visually impressive lunch or dinner.

FAQs

How long do you bake goat’s cheese for?

I recommend baking goat’s cheese for 10-12 minutes at 400 degrees F.

Can you bake goat cheese?

Yes! Baking goat cheese is a great idea because it is hard enough to hold its shape in the oven when baked on its own. However, you could also mix this traditional cheese with other cheeses, like Parmesan, cheddar cheese, and cream cheese, to make delicious recipes like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip.

Should I serve this salad warm or cold?

The best goat cheese for this salad comes straight from the oven, as the cheese balls will be the creamiest at this point. However, you can also serve this salad cold if you prefer your goat cheese to have a firmer texture.

What is the best cheese for salads?

Because of their rich and robust flavors, the best cheeses for salads include feta cheese, goat cheese, blue cheese, and Parmesan cheese.

Other Restaurant Quality Salad Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked goat cheese salad on a small plate with a fork on the side.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Salad Recipe

This Baked Goat Cheese Salad is a French-bistro style salad that is ideal as a light lunch or a side salad with the main dish. Served warm, most of the components of this recipe can be made ahead and then it can be assembled right before serving.
Course Salad
Cuisine American/French
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 175kcal

Ingredients

For The Baked Goat Cheese Rounds

  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 log goat cheese 8oz. – sliced into 8 pieces

For The Salad & Salad Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon dijon mustard
  • 1 small shallot chopped (about 2 tablespoons)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 6 cup mixed salad greens 7 oz.

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh herbs on a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Divide goat cheese into 8 equal portions. You can use a knife, but I find that it is easier to use dental floss or kitchen twine. To do so, slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log. Roll each piece into a small disk (or a ball).
  • Roll each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), followed by the panko mixture pressing gently to ensure that it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, and salt and pepper.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes.
  • To assemble the salad, place salad greens in a salad bowl and drizzle them with the dressing. Give it a big toss.
  • Divide the salad amongst four salad plates and top each plate with two baked goat cheese balls.

Notes

  • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
  • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
  • Broil until golden brown: If you want, you can broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.
  • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • Store: To store the leftovers, transfer them into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 175kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 574mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 998IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 3
Cranberry Poached Pears with Mascarpone https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-poached-pears/ https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-poached-pears/#comments Sun, 18 Dec 2022 15:42:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15503 This post has been sponsored by Vermont Creamery. All opinions are my own. I love to incorporate pears into my…]]>

This post has been sponsored by Vermont Creamery. All opinions are my own.

I love to incorporate pears into my recipes during the fall and winter seasons. Not only are they juicy and delicious, but they pair well with both sweet and savory flavors. If you’re looking for more recipes that feature this tasty fruit, you’ll love my Roasted Pear Salad with Goat Cheese

Cranberry poached pear on a plate from the front view.

Ingredients

This treat is truly the epitome of the Christmas season, with flavor notes of cranberry, cinnamon, orange, and rosemary. If you’ve begun your holiday cooking and baking, chances are you already have many of these ingredients on hand. 

For this recipe, you’ll need Bosc pears, fresh cranberries, orange juice, orange zest, a cinnamon stick, fresh rosemary, honey, mascarpone cheese, hazelnuts, and water. 

Recipe ingredients from the front view.

Ingredient Substitutions

If there’s no time for a trip to the market, or if your local store is a bit understocked, you can still make this recipe with a few simple ingredient swaps. Feel free to substitute based on your preferences, but here are a few suggestions: 

  • Pears: I used Bosc pears in this recipe for their delicate, sweet flavor, but you can also use Anjou pears, or another pear variety, instead. Just keep in mind that Anjou pears cook much faster than Bosc pears, so you’ll need to shorten the cooking time. If you use another variety of pear, keep an eye on them as they cook and adjust the time accordingly. 
  • Mascarpone: While I love the creaminess of mascarpone, you can also use ricotta cheese.
  • Cranberries: I recommend using fresh cranberries if you can find them, as they cook pretty quickly. You can also use frozen cranberries if you’re in a pinch, but keep in mind that they take longer to come to a boil. If you find yourself with some leftover cranberries after making this recipe, why not make a delicious Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup
  • Cinnamon: Cinnamon adds the perfect touch of spice that beautifully complements the sweetness of this recipe. I love to use cinnamon sticks because of their potent flavor, but you can also use ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon instead. 
  • Honey: A drizzle of honey (or more, if you have a sweet tooth) really takes these pears to the next level while allowing you to customize the sweetness of the recipe. If you don’t have any honey on hand, you can use agave or maple syrup instead. 
  • Hazelnuts: Hazelnut is a classic Christmas flavor that pairs so well with this recipe. If you don’t like hazelnuts or if you have a hazelnut allergy, you can substitute pecans or walnuts to achieve a similar taste. 

How to Make This Recipe?

With a simple ingredient list and only 10 minutes of hands-on prep time, this cranberry-poached pears dessert comes together with ease. Their simple elegance, especially when garnished with hazelnuts and fresh rosemary, is truly stunning and worthy of a 5-star restaurant. Here’s how to make them:

A collage of images showing how to make poached pears with step by step photos.
  1. Add ingredients to a pot: To a large pot or dutch oven (with a lid), add the pears, cranberries, orange juice, orange zest, cinnamon stick, honey, and rosemary. 
  2. Add the water: Pour the water over the ingredients.  
  3. Cook: Place the lid on the pot and bring the mixture to a boil over medium heat. Once it reaches a boil, reduce the heat to medium-low and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. You should be able to easily insert and remove a knife when the pears are done. 
  4. Prepare for serving: Right before you’re ready to serve, spoon 2-3 tablespoons of mascarpone into the bottom of each serving bowl. Add a pear to each bowl and top with honey, leftover juices from the pot, and a few cooked cranberries. 
  5. Garnish and serve: Garnish with crushed hazelnuts, fresh rosemary, and another drizzle of honey to taste. Serve. 

How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers?

If your holiday schedule is looking a bit hectic, you’ll be relieved to know that you can easily make this poached pear recipe ahead of time. That way, all you have to do is assemble the pears when you’re ready to serve. You can also store your leftovers to enjoy the next day. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead: To prepare this recipe ahead of time, poach the pears a day in advance (following the instructions above), let them come to room temperature, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Make sure to save some of that yummy liquid for drizzling! When you’re ready to serve, assemble the pears and garnish them to your liking. 
  • Store: To store leftovers, let each poached pear with mascarpone reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for a day or two. 
Poached pears served over a bed of mascarpone cheese garnished with hazelnuts.

What to Serve It With?

Whether you’re planning an intimate gathering, an elaborate Christmas feast, or a casual weeknight dinner, you can never go wrong with serving these poached pears for dessert. 
If you’re in need of some pairing suggestions, I recommend keeping things simple by serving a classic roast. My go-to is Company Pot Roast served with my mom’s Bulgur Wheat Pilaf and a Citrusy Roasted Beet Goat Cheese Salad for a comforting, cold-weather meal that your guests will love.

If You Liked This Recipe, You Might Also Like:

If you try this Poached Pear Dessert recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe was adapted (with several changes) from Eva Longoria’s cookbook Eva’s Kitchen .

cranberry poached pears from the front view.
Print

Cranberry Poached Pears Recipe

This Cranberry Poached Pears recipe is an easy to make dessert with very little hands-on time. Served with creamy and soft mascarpone cheese, these pears are worthy of a festive and colorful VIP dinner or a simple splurge for you and your family.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 5 servings
Calories 279kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 medium-size Bosc pears peeled
  • 2 ½ cups fresh cranberries rinsed
  • Juice of an orange
  • Orange peel
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • cup honey or more to taste
  • 1 sprig fresh rosemary more as garnish
  • 6 cups water
  • 1 cup mascarpone cheese
  • ¼ cup hazelnuts or any other nuts, roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Place the pears, cranberries, orange juice, orange peel, cinnamon stick, honey*, and rosemary in a pot (with a lid) that will accommodate all these ingredients comfortably. I used a 3 ½ quart dutch oven.
  • Pour the water over the ingredients.
  • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil over medium heat. Turn down the heat to medium-low and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until a knife inserted in one of the pears goes in and out easily.
  • When ready to serve, spread 2-3 tablespoons of mascarpone cheese into the bottom of a bowl, place a pear in the middle, and drizzle it with honey (if preferred), the juices from the pot, and a few of the cooked cranberries.
  • Sprinkle the pears with hazelnuts and a few leaves of fresh rosemary. If preferred, drizzle them with more honey to taste.

Notes

  • If you are not a fan of boiling honey, you can stir it in after the pears are cooked and let it steep for 10-15 minutes before serving.
  • Serving suggestion: You can serve this recipe warm or cold, but I think it tastes best when served slightly warmly. 
  • Make ahead: To prep this recipe ahead of time, poach the pears a day in advance (following the instructions above), let them come to room temperature, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Make sure to save some of that yummy liquid for drizzling! When you’re ready to serve, assemble the pears and garnish them to your liking. 
  • Store: To store leftovers, let the cooked pears reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for a day or two.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 279kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 38mg | Sodium: 34mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 550IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-poached-pears/feed/ 8
Cornish Hen in Air Fryer https://foolproofliving.com/cornish-hen-in-air-fryer/ https://foolproofliving.com/cornish-hen-in-air-fryer/#comments Fri, 16 Dec 2022 13:14:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63149 Cooking a cornish hen in an air fryer is one of the easiest main dishes in our recipe book. Perfectly…]]>

Cooking a cornish hen in an air fryer is one of the easiest main dishes in our recipe book. Perfectly crisp and exquisitely seasoned, these mini rotisserie chickens will have you planning air-fried menus every night of the week. If you love this hassle-free protein and want more ways to use your air fryer, you’ll adore making my crispy chicken legs in the air fryer and turkey legs in the air fryer.

Usually available in the freezer section of grocery stores during the winter months, these little birds cook faster than regular chicken. Thanks to their small size, they are an ideal entree for any special occasion (including any holiday dinner) or a humble but delicious weeknight meal.

A roasted small chicken on a serving plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To make this air fryer cornish hens recipe, gather two cornish hens, onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, Kosher salt, black pepper, olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley.

Ingredients for an air fried poultry dish from the top view.

Substitutions & Other Seasonings

From garden-fresh herbs to zesty seasonings, there are dozens of ways to give this air fryer cornish hen recipe irresistible flavor. Become a five-star chef with these simple substitutions.

  • Oil: Melted butter is a decadent and easy substitute for olive oil in this air fryer hen dish.
  • Use any of your favorite seasonings: We used simple seasoning in the recipe card below. However, you can use poultry seasoning to give them a classic, peppery flavor. Or, bring out your chicken’s tender, earthy taste by sprinkling it with Italian seasoning. You can also top your chicken with lemon zest to give it a simple yet sophisticated brightness.
  • Fresh herbs: Nothing balances the succulent savoriness of air-fried cornish hen like a dusting of fresh herbs. Rosemary, thyme, and sage are my favorite additions to this recipe.

How to Thaw Cornish Hens?

To give your dish maximum tenderness, I recommend thawing cornish hens before cooking them in the air fryer. Here are two easy methods that will have your birds ready to roast in no time:

  1. Overnight in the fridge: For hassle-free thawing, transfer each frozen game bird to the refrigerator and let them naturally defrost overnight.
  2. Submerged in cold water: I recommend thawing your cornish hens in a cold water bath to speed up the thawing process. Change the water every 30 minutes to keep it at a cool temperature.

I do not recommend thawing game hens at room temperature, as this process may result in the growth of harmful bacteria.

How to Air Fry Cornish Hens?

You won’t believe how effortless it is to cook cornish hens in an air fryer. With only eight steps, these foolproof instructions will have even beginner chefs preparing mouthwatering chicken.

A person showing how to make a Cornish hen instant pot air fryer recipe.
  1. Dry the hens: Remove the game hens from the fridge and use a few sheets of paper towels to pat dry them on all sides. Let the poultry rest while preparing the rub.
  2. Mix the seasoning: In a small bowl, combine the onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  3. Oil the meat: Rub olive oil evenly over all sides of the cornish hens, including inside their cavities. You should use about one tablespoon of oil total for both hens.
  4. Season the birds: Sprinkle the hens with the rub mixture, evenly distributing the seasoning over all their sides and in their cavity areas.
  5. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
Images showing how to cook Cornish hen in air fryer from the top view.
  1. Place cornish hens in the air fryer: Place the 2 cornish hens in the air fryer basket in a single layer with their breast sides facing down.
  2. Air fry the hens: Cook the game hens in the air fryer for 20 minutes. Then, flip the chicken and air fry them until the thickest part of the bird registers 165 degrees F. with a meat thermometer (15-17 minutes). When done cooking, the chicken’s skin should also turn golden brown and crispy.
  3. Serve: Remove the air-fried cornish game hens from the air fryer. Let the birds rest for 10 minutes, then serve.

Ideal Temperature and Cook Time

If you’ve wondered, “How long do I cook cornish hen in an air fryer?” these foolproof tips on temperature and time will give you crisp, succulent meat every time.

I recommend cooking air fryer cornish game hens at 350 degrees F. It takes about 35-37 minutes to cook two 1¼-pound hens at this temperature.

However, please be aware that how long you cook the meat depends on the size of the birds. It may take up to 40 minutes to air fry a 2-pound game hen, and you may have to cook larger birds one at a time if the entire hen doesn’t fit in the air fryer basket. I suggest you check the meat’s temperature at the 35-minute mark to avoid overcooking. 

No matter what, the thickest part of your bird should reach 165 degrees F. before serving.

How to Store Leftovers & Reheat?

Once you learn how to cook a cornish hen in the air fryer, you won’t want a single bite to go to waste. 

Storing Leftovers:

Be sure to bring cooked cornish game hens to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.

How to Reheat Cornish Hen?

The best part about cooking cornish game hens in the air fryer is that you can easily reheat them with one of the two easy methods listed below. So, try one of the methods below and say goodbye to food waste and hello to easy meal prep!

  • In the air fryer: To reheat cornish game hens in an air fryer, preheat the fryer to 400 degrees and cook the hens for 4-5 minutes. Keep an eye on the meat to avoid overcooking, and flip the birds halfway through the reheating process.
  • In the oven: If you don’t want to reheat them in the air fryer, you can reheat them in the oven instead. Set the oven to 350 degrees F., place the chicken in a baking dish, and add a few tablespoons of water to keep the meat moist. It should take about 10 minutes in the oven for the hen to warm up.

Expert Tips

If you love juicy, crisp, and tender meat, these pro pointers will transform your kitchen into a five-star restaurant. Air frying cornish hens is a breeze with these handy suggestions.

  • Thoroughly dry the cornish chicken: Be sure to thoroughly dry the skin of your hens before putting them in the air fryer. Removing as much liquid as possible will ensure that your chickens come out with perfectly crispy skin.
  • Fully thaw the chicken: I highly recommend thoroughly thawing the cornish hens before placing them in the air fryer. Fully thawing the meat will ensure that it cooks evenly in the air fryer, giving you a succulent interior and a crisp exterior.
  • Breast side down: When you add your meat to the air fryer, position the cornish hens breast side down in the basket. The space within air fryers tends to be small, so this breast-down position will protect your chickens’ breast meat from overcooking.
  • Tie the legs: Tying the legs of your miniature chickens is an optional step. However, trussing your hens with kitchen twine will give your meal an Instagram-worthy presentation and allow easy serving.
  • Let them rest: Be sure to let the meat rest for ten minutes before serving. This resting time allows the meat to reabsorb its juices, resulting in succulent, flavorful chicken.

Side Dishes to Serve With This Recipe:

We love and cook cornish hens so much that I created several menu ideas around it and shared a post to find the best sides to serve with cornish hens. However, if you need quick inspiration, below are a few suggestions:

How to Cook Frozen Cornish Hen in Air Fryer

Though you can technically use frozen meat in this recipe, we don’t recommend cooking a frozen cornish hen in an air fryer. If you cook the meat before thawing it, the frozen hen will likely come out with undercooked insides, and the outside of the hen will be burnt. 

However, if you still want to cook them frozen, we recommend keeping a close eye on them as they air fry. To air fry a frozen cornish hen:

  1. Set your air fryer to 350 degrees F. and cook your bird for 30 minutes. At this point, the outer skin should be fully thawed. 
  2. Remove them from the air fryer and coat them with olive oil and seasoning.
  3. Put them back in the air fryer and continue to cook until the thickest part of the chicken registers 165 degrees F. when inserted with a digital thermometer.

The timing depends on the size of your birds. We recommend that you check on them every 15 minutes and rotate them to ensure even air frying.

FAQs

Even beginner chefs can cook a cornish game hen in an air fryer oven. From air fryer cornish hen cook time to cornish hen air fryer temperature, you’ll find all your answers right here.

Should cornish hens be thawed before cooking?

Yes. For the best results, I recommend thawing your mini rotisserie chickens before cooking them. Thawing will ensure your hens cook evenly and come out tender, with juicy meat and crispy skin.

How do you defrost cornish hens quickly?

The quickest way to defrost cornish game hens is to place them in a cold water bath for 3-4 hours. Be sure to change the water every half hour to maintain the bath’s cool temperature.

Can you cook a frozen cornish hen in an air fryer?

You can technically cook your frozen hens in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for one hour (though the timing might change based on the size), oiling and seasoning them after 30 minutes of cooking. However, I don’t recommend this method, as it often results in undercooked insides and burnt chicken skin.

How long to cook two cornish hens in an air fryer?

When cooking two 1¼-pound birds at once, your cornish hen air fryer cook time will be 35-40 minutes at 350 degrees F. Be sure to flip your chickens halfway through and check their internal temperature. The thickest part of the meat should reach 165 degrees F. before it is ready to eat.

How many cornish hens per person?

Cornish hens generally range from 1-2 pounds and can feed 1-2 people. You can serve smaller chickens (between 1- and 1¼-pound cornish hens), one per person. However, if your hens are larger (closer to 2 pounds each), they’re the perfect size to split between 2 people. You can easily halve a 2-pound hen by cutting it down the middle with kitchen shears, snipping down its breast bone and along the backbone.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this recipe for roasted cornish hen in an air fryer, your tastebuds will go wild for these other air fryer recipes. Fast, easy, and flavorful, these dishes will complete any menu.

If you try this recipe for Cornish Hens in the Air Fryer, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Cornish hens in an air fryer from the top view.
Print

Cornish Hen in Air Fryer Recipe

Learn how to cook Cornish Hen in an Air Fryer with this easy recipe. The air fryer is the perfect tool for cooking these little birds because it yields a crisp, golden-brown skin and a tender, juicy middle. This elegant dish is perfect to serve for a special occasion or dinner party, but it also makes for a delicious, easy weeknight meal.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 2
Calories 975kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cornish hens 1 to 1 ½ pounds each – fully thawed
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Dry the hens: Take cornish hens out of the fridge and pat dry on all sides using a few sheets of paper towels. Let them rest while you are making the rub.
  • Mix the seasoning: Mix the onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper in a small bowl.
  • Oil the meat: Rub the cornish hens with olive oil on all sides and inside the cavity.
  • Season the hens: Sprinkle with the seasoning on the skin and in the cavity area, ensuring that it is equally distributed.
  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F. (176 degrees C).
  • Place hens in the air fryer: Carefully remove the basket and place seasoned cornish hens breast side down in a single layer.
  • Air fry: Air fry for 20 minutes, flip, and continue to air fry until the thickest part of the bird registers 165 degrees when inserted with a thermometer for 15-17 minutes. The skin should be golden brown and crispy as well.
  • Rest and serve: Carefully remove the cornish hens from the air fryer and let them rest for 10 minutes before serving. Sprinkle with fresh parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Prep: Be sure to thoroughly dry the skin of your hens before putting them in the air fryer. Removing as much liquid as possible will ensure that your chickens come out with perfectly crispy skin.
  • Cook time: This recipe was tested with cornish hens that were about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ pounds. There is a direct correlation between the size of the bird and air frying time. If your birds are larger, I would recommend adding 5-10 minutes of additional cooking time, depending on their size.
  • Thaw: I highly recommend thoroughly thawing the cornish hens before placing them in the air fryer. Fully thawing the meat will ensure that it cooks evenly in the air fryer, giving you an evenly cooked chicken with a crisp exterior.
  • Breast side down: When you add your meat to the air fryer, position the cornish hens breast side down in the basket. This is an important step to prevent the breasts from cooking before the rest of the birds.
  • Tie the legs: Tying the legs is an optional step. However, it helps with ensuring that they hold their shape and still look good after they are air fried.
  • Resting time: Be sure to let the meat rest for ten minutes before serving. This resting time allows the meat to reabsorb its juices, resulting in a flavorful poultry meal.
  • Serving suggestions: What to serve them with? Here are a few of our favorite side dishes to serve with this recipe.
  • Store: Be sure to bring air-fried cornish hens to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat the leftovers, you have two options:
    • In the air fryer: To reheat cornish game hens in the air fryer, preheat the fryer to 400 degrees and cook the hens for 4-5 minutes. Keep an eye on the meat to avoid overcooking, and flip the birds halfway through the reheating process.
    • In the oven: Set the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the chicken in a baking dish and add a few tablespoons of water to keep the meat moist. It should take about 10 minutes in the oven for the hen to warm up.

Nutrition

Calories: 975kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 78g | Fat: 70g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 13g | Monounsaturated Fat: 33g | Cholesterol: 455mg | Sodium: 1441mg | Potassium: 1131mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 1150IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cornish-hen-in-air-fryer/feed/ 13
Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/ https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/#comments Thu, 15 Dec 2022 22:08:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11704 If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board,…]]>

If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board, or to perfect light dessert to serve after dinner, these mascarpone stuffed dates are just what you need. They are easy, quick, and addictively delicious!

Need more appetizer inspiration? Be sure to also check out our Bread Dipping Oil, Cheese Apple Appetizer, and Hot Goat Cheese Dip.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on a plate topped off with pomegranate seeds and nuts.

Ingredients

To make this stuffed dates recipe, you will need dates, mascarpone cheese, chopped nuts (I used a combination of walnuts and pistachios), pomegranate seeds, and honey.

When buying dates, look for fresh, plump, and large Medjool dates that are usually sold in the refrigerated section of your grocery store. You can buy pitted dates or remove the pits yourself.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in small bowls from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins:

  • Cheese: You can substitute mascarpone with any spreadable soft cheese. My favorite ones are goat cheese and cream cheese. Alternatively, you can stir in ½ teaspoon of vanilla extract in the cheese to make it even more flavorful.
  • Nuts: You can use any nuts here. I like to stuff my dates with walnuts and salty pistachios, but almonds, hazelnuts, cashews, and pecans would also be lovely. If you have the time, roast your nuts in a skillet for a few minutes for extra flavor.
  • Fruit: Pomegranate arils are wonderful to add a pop of color, but you can also use candied and chopped oranges or dried cranberries.
  • Honey: You can use maple syrup or agave nectar. Or, if you want to make it sugar-free, omit using any sweeteners.
  • Flaky Sea Salt: This is optional, but if you want to take it up a notch, you can sprinkle each mascarpone-filled date with a little flaky sea salt (such as Maldon salt (affiliate link))

How To Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps to making this finger dessert. However, I recommend getting all your ingredients ready before starting so that you can quickly put them together.

Person showing how to stuff dates with mascarpone cheese in a collage of images.
  1. Remove pits: Using a paring knife, slice dates lengthwise, being careful not to cut them all the way through. Remove the pits and set them aside.
  2. Stuff with cheese: Using a small spoon, stuff each pitted date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese. 
person showing how to stuff dates with walnuts and pistachios.
  1. Garnish: Dip the filled dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so that they will stick to the cheese.
  2. Sprinkle: Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts or pistachios. Set them onto a plate.
  3. Drizzle: Drizzle the mascarpone-stuffed dates with a tablespoon of honey. Serve!

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this sweet stuffed dates recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it also stores well. Here’s how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with cheese, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh for up to 3 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container in the fridge. They make the perfect snack or afternoon pick-me-up.

Expert Tips:

This easy recipe is pretty self-explanatory, but here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try.

  • Room temperature: If you make these ahead of time, I recommend bringing them out 30 minutes before serving, as they taste best when they are served at room temperature.
  • Piping bag: You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. And if you decide to make a larger amount, I recommend using piping or a pastry bag (or a Ziploc bag) instead of using a spoon. Simply fill your bag with mascarpone and fill each date one by one.
  • Mascarpone filling: I find that a light drizzle of honey is all you need to sweeten the already sweet dates. However, if you prefer yours sweeter, you can mix honey with mascarpone and use that honey mascarpone mixture as your filling.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this stuffed dates dessert recipe was made by first drizzling dates with a tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil and then warming them up in a 350-degree preheated oven for 10 minutes. If you prefer to serve them warm, you can follow those steps. However, after literally making this recipe for over 10 years, I feel like the room-temperature stuffed dates are just as good.
Stuffed dates with mascarpone and walnuts on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What cheese pairs with dates?

Any mild-flavored soft and spreadable cheeses would pair well with dates. Goat cheese, mascarpone, and cream cheese are a few to name.

What can you stuff inside dates?

You can stuff dates with nuts, nut butters, soft cheese, and chocolate.

Can you put dates in the oven?

Yes, you can. Simply pop them in a preheated 350 F oven for 10 minutes to warm them up.

Other Party Appetizers You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mascarpone Stuffed Date recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Mascarpone Stuffed Dates Recipe

These Mascarpone Stuffed Medjool Dates are topped off with walnuts and pomegranate seeds and drizzled with honey. This easy recipe takes less than 20 minutes to put them all together. These are the perfect little "finger" desserts to impress your guests or even to satisfy your own sweet tooth.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 12 Dates
Calories 134kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 Medjool Dates
  • ½ cup Mascarpone cheese
  • 4 tablespoons pomegranate seeds
  • 3 tablespoons walnuts or pistachios (or both) chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons honey
  • ¼ teaspoon flaky seas such as Maldon salt, optional

Instructions

  • Cut each date lengthwise making sure to not to cut them all the way through. Remove and discard pits.
  • Fill each date with a teaspoon mascarpone cheese. Dip the stuffed dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so they will stick to the cheese.
  • Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts and/or pistachios. Set them on a plate.
  • Drizzle them with honey and if using, sprinkle them with some flaky sea salt. Serve!

Notes

  • I recommend prepping all the ingredients before starting to assemble. I usually put each ingredient in a small bowl so that I can put them together quickly.
  • You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. If making a larger batch, you can fill a piping bag with mascarpone to help you stuff dates faster.
  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with mascarpone, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this recipe warmed the dates in the oven before stuffing them. In this updated version, I decided to skip that step as I think it is an extra step that is not necessary. However, if you prefer that version, feel free to follow the steps below:
    • Preheat the oven to 350 °F. Place dates on a small baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.
    • Bake for 10-12 minutes in the oven. Let cool on the counter for 5 minutes. Fill each date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese.
    • Top the dates with honey, pomegranate seeds, and walnuts. Sprinkle them with flaky sea salt. Serve!
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 12Dates | Calories: 134kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 191mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/feed/ 20
Chestnut Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-soup/#comments Mon, 12 Dec 2022 19:48:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62914 Other than boiling chestnuts, you can follow three other methods if you choose to cook them at home. Follow my…]]>

Other than boiling chestnuts, you can follow three other methods if you choose to cook them at home. Follow my guide for roasting chestnuts in the oven, cooking chestnuts in the air fryer, or, like the popular Christmas song, you can also roast chestnuts on an open fire

If you have some extra chestnuts, be sure to also try our Chestnut Stuffing Recipe.

A soup made from chestnuts in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

The subtly sweet, nutty, and earthy flavor of the chestnuts is the true star of the show in this comforting soup recipe. We’re using other simple ingredients, like fresh veggies and herbs, vegetable broth, and a little cream, to complement the chestnuts and provide a luxurious, velvety creaminess. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a soup made from chestnuts from the top view.
  • For the chestnuts, I chose to boil the nuts, which I’ve found to be the easiest cooking method. In my How to Boil Chestnuts post, I provide detailed instructions for boiling and peeling fresh chestnuts, as well as make-ahead and storage information. If you’re in a pinch, you can buy roasted and peeled whole chestnuts at your local grocery store or even buy chestnuts online (affiliate link). They are also available cooked and peeled in a jar (affiliate link). Just make sure that the only ingredient listed is chestnuts, as we don’t want any unnecessary sugars or additives. Alternatively, you can use unsweetened chestnut puree in this recipe.
  • To make the soup, you’ll need extra virgin olive oil, a shallot or a small onion, a carrot, celery, garlic cloves, fresh thyme, a bay leaf, vegetable broth, kosher salt, white pepper (or black pepper), heavy cream (optional), and grated nutmeg. 
  • To garnish the soup (optional), you can use creme fraiche, chopped fresh chives, or chopped bacon. 

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

This roasted chestnut soup is incredibly versatile, as you can keep it simple and serve it for a cozy weeknight dinner or dress it up with toppings for a decadent holiday meal. Here I’ve provided some suggestions for toppings and listed some ingredient substitutions that might save you a trip to the store. 

  • Shallot: You can use a shallot, a small white onion, or a large leek for this recipe. Leeks are typically harder to find but add a wonderful, delicate flavor to any soup. If you use a leek, make sure to wash it well, as soil tends to get stuck in the layers of the vegetable. 
  • Fresh herbs: I chose fresh thyme sprigs for this roast chestnut soup, but you can also use fresh parsley or sage for a touch of herbal flavor. Feel free to use whatever you have on hand. 
  • Stock: Vegetable broth (or my vegetable stock from kitchen scraps) is a great base for this vegetarian chestnut soup, especially if you’re serving it for vegetarian friends. If you’re not worried about making the soup vegan or vegetarian, you can use chicken stock or a bouillon cube instead. If you choose to use a bouillon cube, boil the water first, dissolve the cube, and then add the veggies. 
  • Crumbled bacon: Topping this soup with crumbled bacon adds a salty, savory element that perfectly complements the dish. Feel free to use your bacon of choice, but I personally love to make turkey bacon in oven or in the air fryer
  • Alcoholic option: For an adult-friendly flourish, finish off each bowl of soup with a tablespoon of brandy or sherry. The alcohol gives the soup a gourmet feel and brings out the nutty flavor profile.
  • Creme fraiche: If you happen to have some store-bought creme fraiche (French for “fresh cream”) on hand, why not add a dollop to your soup? Its nutty, tangy flavor is reminiscent of sour cream and adds a beautiful creaminess to the dish. 

How to Make This Recipe?

With a little bit of hands-on time to prepare the veggies and only 15 minutes of cook time, you’ll have a steaming bowl of this velvety cream of chestnut soup on the table for everyone to enjoy. Here’s how to make it:

A person showing how to cook vegetables in a dutch oven from the top view.
  1. Cook the veggies: Add the olive oil to a large pot or Dutch oven and heat over medium-high heat. Add in the shallot, celery, and carrots and cook for 5-7 minutes, until the veggies are soft.
  2. Cook the garlic: Add the garlic to the pan and cook for one minute.
  3. Add additional ingredients: Place the chestnuts, vegetable stock, thyme, bay leaf, and salt and pepper in the pan and give it a stir. 
  4. Cook soup: Bring the mixture to a boil and simmer, stirring occasionally, for 15 to 20 minutes or until the vegetables are fork-tender. 
A person showing how to puree a soup made with chestnuts.
  1. Purée soup: Remove and discard bay leaf. Using an immersion blender, puree the soup (careful, it’s hot!) until it appears smooth and creamy. 
  2. Add the heavy cream: If using heavy cream, add it to the chestnut puree. Bring the soup to a rolling boil. Give it a quick taste, and season with salt and pepper if needed. Stir in the grated nutmeg right before you are ready to serve. 
  3. Garnish and serve: Ladle into a soup bowl and garnish with your toppings of choice.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

One of the best things about making a big pot of this creamed chestnuts recipe is that you’re almost guaranteed to have some leftovers to enjoy the next day. Whether you plan to meal-prep it for the week or store it away in the freezer, I have you covered with these helpful tips:

  • Store: Before storing, let the soup cool down to room temperature. Spoon it into an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Let the soup come to room temperature and store it in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
  • Thaw: To thaw from frozen, let the soup sit in the fridge overnight before reheating. 
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove, making sure to stir often as it heats up. The soup tends to thicken as it sits, so you may need to add a quarter cup of liquid to thin it out. 

Expert Tips

Making this creamy chestnut soup isn’t rocket science, but I’ve put together a few tips to make things a little easier (and safer) in the kitchen. 

  • Be careful when blending: Whether you’re using a food processor, a regular blender, or an immersion blender to puree the soup, remember that you’re working with very hot soup that may burn you. Take your time and wear oven mitts if needed. 
  • No hand blender, no problem: I prefer to use an immersion blender (aka hand blender) because it yields a super smooth and creamy texture, but you can also use a food processor or a regular blender and puree it in batches for similar results. 
  • Foam on top: You may end up with some foam on top after pureeing the soup. This is normal. You can remove it with a spoon or bring the soup to one last boil while stirring it constantly. It should disappear as you stir it.
A person stirring a creamy chestnut soup from the top view.

What to Serve It With?

The beauty of this recipe is that it suits almost any occasion. Serve it alone for a quick, warming weeknight dinner, or pair it with wine and a gourmet entree or side for a special occasion. Here are my suggestions:

  • Make it a luxurious dinner: Want to make your next dinner party feel extra special? Serve this soup as the perfect starter (with crusty bread) to accompany a spread of gourmet dishes. My go-to gourmet meal is Roasted Cornish Hens as the main course paired with Rosemary Mashed Potatoes and a Butternut Squash Salad
  • Give it a French twist: Transport your friends, family, and guests to Paris with a French-inspired meal. Add a dollop of creme fraiche to make it a French chestnut soup (the French may call it a “chestnut veloute”), and serve with my delicious Chicken Fricassee, Brioche Bread, and these Easy Green Beans for true culinary experience. And don’t forget to grab a bottle of French wine for a full meal that is guaranteed to impress!

FAQs

What do chestnuts taste like?

When roasted, chestnuts have a subtly sweet, nutty, and earthy flavor. Some say the flavor reminds them of a sweet potato!

Are chestnut healthy?

Although they’re small in size, chestnuts are packed with a variety of health benefits. They are a good source of copper, manganese, and vitamin B6, as well as several antioxidants. Check the ingredient label if you’re buying pre-cooked or peeled chestnuts, as they may contain added sugars or other ingredients you’ll want to avoid in order to reap their full health benefits. 

How to prepare chestnuts for soup?

To prepare chestnuts for soup, you’ll want to cook and peel them first. The main two cooking methods are roasting and boiling, which involve either roasting the nuts in the oven or over a fire or boiling them in water on the stove.

How to make chestnut soup vegan?

To make a vegan chestnut soup, omit the heavy cream and garnish it with your vegan toppings of choice. If you want to make the soup “creamy,” you can add a little almond milk instead of heavy cream. You can even make it a vegan Christmas soup by topping it with a tbsp of brandy or sherry to make it festive.

Other Soup Recipes You Might Like

If soup is your go-to winter meal, why not add a few more delicious soup recipes to your book? We love a good soup here on the blog, so be sure to check out the tasty ones below.

If you try this Creamy Chestnut Soup recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of soup made from chestnuts from the top view.
Print

Chestnut Soup Recipe

This Chestnut Soup, also known as Chestnut Veloute, is a silky, creamy, and nutty dish that's perfect for the holiday or winter season. Enjoy it with crusty bread for a decadent weeknight meal, or serve it as a starter to accompany a spread of your favorite seasonal comfort foods.
Course Soup
Cuisine American/French
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 287kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 shallot or ½ small onion, chopped
  • 1 medium-sized carrot chopped (~ ⅓ cup)
  • 1 stalk celery chopped (~ ⅓ cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled and minced
  • 2 ½ cups chestnuts cooked and peeled* – (about 15 oz.) plus more for garnish
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 5 cups vegetable broth
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper
  • ¼ cup heavy cream – optional
  • ¼ teaspoon grated nutmeg

Optional Toppings:

  • 4 tablespoons creme fraiche
  • 2 tablespoons fresh chives chopped
  • 4 cooked bacon strips chopped (or turkey bacon) – non vegetarian option

Instructions

  • Cook the vegetables: Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or large saucepan) over medium heat. Add shallot, carrot, and celery. Cook, stirring regularly, for 5-7 minutes or until vegetables are softened.
  • Add the garlic: Add in the garlic and cook for one minute.
  • Add additional ingredients: Stir in the chestnuts, thyme, bay leaf, vegetable stock, and salt and pepper.
  • Cook the soup: Bring to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until all the vegetables are fork-tender.
  • Puree the soup: Discard the bay leaf. Using an immersion blender, carefully puree the soup until it is creamy.
  • Add the heavy cream: If using, stir in the heavy cream. Bring it to a quick rolling boil. Give it a quick taste and add more if necessary.
  • Add the nutmeg: Right before serving, stir in the grated nutmeg.
  • Serve: Ladle into individual bowls and if preferred, garnish with your choice of toppings.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe makes 5-6 cups of chestnut soup, making it approximately 1 1/2 cups per serving. The calorie information listed below does not include the optional toppings.
  • Cooking Chestnuts: You can use store-bought chestnuts (affiliate link) or boil fresh chestnuts yourself. Alternatively, you can use roasted chestnuts to make this soup recipe.
  • To make it vegan: If you are following a plant-based diet, please omit using heavy cream, creme Fraiche, and bacon. This soup is naturally gluten-free with or without the optional ingredients.
  • Foam on top: You may end up with some foam on top after pureeing the soup. You can remove it with a spoon. Or do what I do, bring the soup to one last boil while stirring it constantly. 
  • Bacon: If you want to cook the bacon on the stovetop, you can cook it in the same pot you will use to make the soup. Simply place the strips in a cold pot, arrange them in a single layer, and cook them over low heat until they are crispy. Transfer them to a paper towel, pour out the excess grease in the pot, and then follow the instructions starting with cooking the vegetables. You can also use Baked Turkey Bacon as a topping.
  • Store: Let the soup cool down to room temperature before storing. Transfer it into an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Let it come to room temperature and store it in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
  • Thaw: To thaw from frozen, let the soup thaw in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove, making sure to stir often as it heats up. The soup tends to thicken as it sits, so you may need to add a quarter cup of liquid to thin it out.

Nutrition

Calories: 287kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1484mg | Potassium: 533mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 3511IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-soup/feed/ 22
Smashed Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 22 Nov 2022 20:41:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62341 When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and…]]>

When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook, so I have lots of potato recipes here on the blog. Whip up Mashed Potatoes with Rosemary or cook a batch of Red Potatoes in the air fryer for a classic Thanksgiving dinner, make a Caper Potato Salad for a cold side dish, or throw together Muffin Tin Potatoes for a party-ready appetizer. 

Roasted fingerling potatoes on a plate with chives from the top view.

Ingredients

Fingerling smashed potatoes are so buttery and creamy on their own that they don’t need many ingredients to jazz them up. In this recipe, we’re simply sprinkling on a little garlic powder and topping with fresh herbs to enhance their mild flavor. 

Ingredients for oven roasted potatoes in bowls from the top view.

To make this recipe, you’ll need a pound of fingerling potatoes (you can use colorful ones if they’re available), olive oil, garlic powder, fresh thyme, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and fresh chives (optional).  

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While you can follow this recipe exactly as written for a classic, great side dish, you can also customize it to suit the occasion or your preferences. Load them up with cheese and bacon for a great Game Day recipe, or top them with lots of fresh herbs for a holiday party. Here are some more suggestions: 

  • Potatoes: I used fingerlings for their small size and mild, buttery taste, but you can also substitute different types of potatoes in this recipe. Try Yukon Gold potatoes (also called Pee Wee potatoes), Honey Gold potatoes, or any other variation of a petite gold potato. 
  • Oil: The olive oil in this recipe helps the potatoes crisp up nicely, but you can also substitute butter for a richer, creamier taste. Just make sure to use melted butter so you can apply it evenly to the potatoes before baking. 
  • Herbs: If you have leftover herbs in your fridge from all your holiday cooking, feel free to add them to this recipe. You can substitute fresh rosemary in place of thyme and turn this recipe into delicious garlic rosemary smashed potatoes. Or use chopped green onions instead of chives if you can’t get your hands on them. Any other fresh herbs you have on hand, such as parsley, would also work. 
  • Garlic: We’re using a little bit of garlic powder in this recipe to enhance the buttery, mild flavor of the potatoes. I would not recommend substituting fresh garlic, as I found that it was prone to burning during the baking process. If you’d like to add extra garlicky flavor, whip up my Roasted Garlic Butter recipe and brush it onto the potatoes once they’re done baking. 
  • Other topping ideas: For a fun take on loaded baked potatoes, top your smashed fingerlings with parmesan cheese and chopped bacon bits. If you love turkey bacon, you can make my Oven Baked Turkey Bacon or Air Fried Turkey Bacon recipe, chop it, and sprinkle it over the potatoes. 

How to Make Crispy Fingerling Potatoes?

This recipe requires minimal prep and baking time, making it the perfect easy, last-minute, and crowd-pleasing dish for any occasion. Plus, smashing the potatoes is oddly satisfying! Here’s how to make them:

A person showing how to make par boiled potatoes from the top view.
  1. Boil the potatoes: Add the potatoes to a medium saucepan or large pot and fill with cold water until the potatoes are covered by an inch. Add a large pinch of salt to the pan, bring the salted water to a boil, and simmer for about 10 minutes, or until the potatoes are al dente and fork tender. Keep in mind that the potatoes may need more or less cooking time depending on their size. You should be able to easily insert and remove a sharp knife when done.  
  2. Drain the potatoes: Use a colander to drain the potatoes and place them back in the pan to “dry” for a few minutes. 
  3. Preheat the oven: While the potatoes are drying, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. 
  4. Season the potatoes: In the same pan, sprinkle the potatoes with olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper. Gently toss to evenly coat the potatoes with the seasonings and oil. 
  5. Transfer to a sheet pan: Transfer the potatoes to a rimmed baking sheet and arrange them in an even layer. 
A person showing how to smash potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.
  1. Smash the potatoes: Use a ramekin, the bottom of a glass or jar, the bottom of a small bowl, or a potato masher to gently smash the potatoes until they’re all about ½ of an inch thick. If your smashing tool gets sticky, brush or spray it with a little oil. 
  2. Bake: Bake the smashed potatoes in the hot oven for about 15-20 minutes until crispy and lightly golden brown. Make sure to flip them at the halfway mark. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the smashed crispy fingerling potatoes from the large baking sheet to a serving plate or platter, sprinkle with chives (optional), and serve. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

For a perfectly timed holiday dinner party or gathering, you can make these potatoes ahead of time and bake them right before the rest of your dishes are ready. They’re also super easy to store and reheat so that you can look forward to leftovers the next day. Here are some tips: 

  • Make-ahead: If you’re busy juggling multiple recipes for a big dinner or event and don’t have much time, you can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: Let the roasted smashed fingerling potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a cast iron skillet with hot oil until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating. 

What to Serve Them With?

There are endless ways to serve these melt-in-your-mouth, crispy smashed fingerling potatoes. Pair them with dipping sauces for a Game Day appetizer, serve them with your favorite main dish, or get creative with leftovers. If you’re still wondering what to serve with fingerling potatoes, here are a few suggestions:

  • As a crowd-favorite appetizer: These crispy fingerling potatoes will fit right in with all your favorite Game Day Foods. Serve them as grown-up french fries with an herbed sauce, such as Basil Tomato Sauce, Yogurt Dill Sauce, Blue Cheese Dressing without Sour Cream, or Yogurt Ranch Sauce. Or, simply top with a drizzle of Pesto Dressing
  • To serve with main dishes: With a sprinkling of fresh herbs, you can transform these crispy smashed potatoes into a sophisticated side dish to serve with an elegant main for an impressive family dinner. These potatoes pair beautifully with a holiday classic like Baked Turkey Tenderloin or chicken dishes such as Air Fried Chicken Legs, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken. You could also serve them with this next-level Porchetta recipe for an impressive meal. 
  • Got leftovers?: If you have leftover potatoes, why not turn your fingerling smash into a fingerling hash? Use them as breakfast potatoes and add them to a breakfast hash (don’t forget the bacon and lots of cheese), or throw them in a frittata for extra flavor. 
Smashed down potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.

Expert Tips

These crispy fingerlings are a breeze to make for even a beginner chef, but following my tips will eliminate guesswork and help you achieve pro results on your first try. Here’s what I recommend:

  • Aim for equal-sized potatoes: If you can, try to buy fairly equal-sized potatoes to ensure even roasting. 
  • Smash with care: While you may be tempted to smash the potatoes with all your might (I was tempted, too), doing so may break the skin of the potatoes or cause split fingerling potatoes. I recommend using the bottom of a ramekin or jar (or a potato masher) to gently smash the potatoes down so that their surface area measures about ½ inch in thickness. Here is a quick visual.
  • Arrange in a single layer: When arranging the crushed fingerling potatoes on your baking sheet, make sure they form an even layer without overlapping. This will help them roast evenly and get nice and crispy on the outside. 
  • Let them dry: After boiling, it’s important to drain the potatoes and return them to the still-warm pan to let them “dry” for a few minutes. Don’t skip this step, as it makes a world of difference in preventing the potatoes from retaining excess moisture and helping them get crispy in the oven. 
  • Use extra oil for maximum crispiness: If you prefer extra crispy skin with crispy edges, oil is your best friend. Once the potatoes are done baking, remove them from the oven and brush them with an additional tablespoon of olive oil (or avocado oil) for the crispiest results. Broil them for 1-2 minutes, keeping a close eye on them so that they don’t burn.

FAQs

What are fingerling potatoes?

Fingerling potatoes are miniature, oblong-shaped potatoes that come in different colors and sizes. These waxy potatoes usually have thin skins, and they have a mild, buttery flavor when roasted.

How are fingerling potatoes different?

Fingerling potatoes are unique, finger-shaped small potatoes that are harvested when they are fully mature. They are usually confused with new potatoes or baby potatoes, which are also smaller potatoes but are harvested before they’re fully mature.

Can smashed potatoes be made ahead?

Yes, you can easily make smashed fingerling potatoes ahead of time. On the day you plan to bake them, boil and smash them, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. Brush them with oil and pop them in the oven when you’re ready to serve.

Can you eat the skin of fingerling potatoes?

The skin of a fingerling potato is fully edible. When they’re smashed, brushed with oil, and oven-roasted, the skin gets super crispy while the inside stays creamy and soft.

What is the difference between mashed and smashed potatoes?

Mashing potatoes is the process of boiling potatoes and then mashing them completely for a smooth, creamy texture. For smashed potatoes, boil fingerling potatoes before roasting and gently smash them down until they form a thin, disk-like shape. Roast and serve.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

An easy potato recipe is always my go-to for the perfect side dish, appetizer, or snack for a crowd. If you and your family are looking for more ways to prepare this versatile vegetable, browse some of my favorite recipes below for inspiration: 

If you try this Smashed Fingerling Potatoes recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted potatoes with chives on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

Smashed Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

These Smashed Fingerling Potatoes, seasoned with salt, garlic powder, and fresh thyme, are perfectly crisp on the outside with a buttery, creamy center. Serve them sprinkled with chives for an elegant holiday side dish, or pair them with a dipping sauce for a fun Game Day appetizer. Plus, they're easy to make and require minimal ingredients!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 183kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb fingerling potatoes scrubbed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Boil the potatoes: Place potatoes in a medium saucepan and fill it with cold water until covered by an inch. Season the water with a generous pinch of salt. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer until potatoes are fork-tender for about 10 minutes. They should be al dente. Please be aware that you may have to adjust the timing depending on the size of your potatoes.
  • Drain the potatoes: Drain the potatoes in a colander. Place them back into the pan, and let them dry for a few minutes.
  • Preheat the oven: Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 450 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Add the oil and seasonings: Add olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper into the saucepan with the potatoes and give it a gentle toss to ensure that they are coated with the olive oil mixture.
  • Prep for baking: Transfer the potatoes onto a baking sheet on a single layer.
  • Smash the potatoes: Using a potato masher, the bottom of a jar, or a ramekin, gently smash each potato to about ½-inch thickness. If it gets sticky, feel free to brush (or spray) the bottom of the glass or ramekin with a little bit of oil.
  • Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for about 20 minutes until they are lightly golden browned, making sure to turn them halfway through the baking process.
  • Serve: Transfer smashed potatoes onto a plate and sprinkle with chives if using.

Notes

  • Make-ahead: You can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready to bake. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: After roasting, let the potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a lightly oiled cast iron skillet until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating.

Nutrition

Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 490mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 71IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
35+ Friendsgiving Food Ideas https://foolproofliving.com/friendsgiving-food-ideas/ https://foolproofliving.com/friendsgiving-food-ideas/#respond Fri, 18 Nov 2022 18:06:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62169 If you’re a fan of holiday potlucks, then you’ll love this delicious collection of easy things to make for your…]]>

If you’re a fan of holiday potlucks, then you’ll love this delicious collection of easy things to make for your next Friendsgiving celebration. All your friends—beginner chefs included!—can whip something up from this ultimate party menu. Not only are these recipes a cinch to serve, but they also have everything from Friendsgiving snack ideas to Friendsgiving dinner ideas. It doesn’t matter if you want to make a succulent turkey for six or a veggie side for twelve. There’s a crowd-ready recipe for everyone!

Turkey tenderloin with roasted potatoes and rosemary leaves on the side.

Snack Ideas

If you’re in need of inspiration for Friendsgiving food ideas, appetizers are an excellent (and delicious!) place to start. Get the party started with this collection of stress-free dishes that come together quickly. Whether you make a cheesy dip or tart apple bites, these Friendsgiving snacks are guaranteed to whet your appetite.

Goat Cheese dip as an example for food to bring to friendsgiving party.
  • Warm Goat Cheese Dip: No one can resist goat cheese’s rich, earthy taste. Mixed with cream cheese, Parmesan, and chives, this effortless dip will be a guaranteed hit. Check out my favorite goat cheese recipes for even more tasty snack ideas.
  • Bread Dipping Oil: This five-minute recipe explodes with garden-fresh flavor. Fresh herbs, dried spices, garlic, fresh lemon juice, and olive oil come together for a crowd-pleasing appetizer perfect for a casual Friendsgiving menu.
  • Blackberry Baked Brie: You can’t have a true potluck Friendsgiving without a baked brie. Equal parts creamy and tart, this photo-ready dish packs great flavor with spicy candied pecans, fruity compote, and pomegranate garnish.
Charcuterie board with cheese and crackers on a wooden backdrop.
  • Cheese Charcuterie Board: One quick trip to the grocery store is all that’s necessary to put this easy Friendsgiving recipe together. Savory meats, nutty cheeses, and plump fruit make this exquisite dish as tasty as it is beautiful.
  • Apple Cheese Appetizer: If you’re wondering what to bring to Friendsgiving that takes almost no time to make, look no further than this super easy recipe. Sweet apples, tangy blue cheese, and toasted walnuts give every bite an unbelievable taste.
Carrot hummus photographed with a bunch of veggies on a cutting board.
  • Carrot Hummus: When planning snacks for Friendsgiving, this festive take on Mediterranean hummus is just what you need. The caramelized roasted carrots, savory tahini, and creamy chickpeas will add a brilliant pop of color to any appetizer spread.
  • Roasted Chestnuts: Buttery, sweet, and perfectly toasted, roasted chestnuts are one of my favorite fun Friendsgiving recipes. You could even turn this recipe into a festive group activity by roasting chestnuts on an open fire!
  • Spinach Artichoke Dip: This oven-baked dip recipe uses four kinds of cheese—cream cheese, mozzarella, gruyere, and Parmesan—to give each bite an ooey-gooey flavor. This creamy side is guaranteed to please, whether you serve it with tortilla chips, veggies, or even pita bread.
  • Savory Cornbread Muffins: Flavored with rich cheddar cheese and a zesty kick of scallions, these savory muffins are not your average cornbread. Perfectly portable, they are the ideal dish to treat your friends. Bring a batch to your next Friendsgiving party and watch them disappear in no time!

Dinner Ideas

When preparing your Friendsgiving dinner menu, the last thing you want to do is waste the day laboring over an entire roast turkey. Now you can take the stress out of dinner meal prep with these tender, savory, and filling entrées! From smaller turkey portions to succulent chicken dishes, this list is full of effortless ideas for what to make for Friendsgiving.

Roasted Turkey breast with potatoes around it on a plate from the top view.
  • Roasted Turkey Tenderloin: Succulent, tender, and perfectly cooked, this oven-roasted turkey fillet will have everyone asking for seconds. To give your Friendsgiving meal extra savory flavor, you could also prepare it with my herby Turkey Loin Marinade.
  • Roasted Turkey Legs: No one can resist the crisp, juicy taste of an oven-cooked turkey leg. Not only does this recipe make perfectly roasted turkey every time, but you could also cook turkey legs in the air fryer for quicker preparation.
Roasted turkey breast drizzled with gravy as Friendsgiving dish idea.
  • Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy: This turkey breast recipe is a fantastic alternative to cooking a whole turkey and an easy Friendsgiving main dish idea that’s perfect for any crowd. To keep it classic, we’ve included a quick homemade gravy so you can serve it with all the traditional flair.
  • Crispy Baked Turkey Wings: To me, this baked wings recipe is possibly one of the best friendsgiving dishes as it delivers big results with minimal work. The secret to perfectly juicy turkey wings is cooking them low and slow. With only 10 minutes of hands-on time, you can serve this dish by itself or atop of cooked rice or mashed potatoes with a drizzle of turkey gravy that you can make using the leftover juices in the pan.
Roasted cornish hens in a casserole dish from the top view.
  • Roasted Cornish Game Hens: Looking for Friendsgiving food ideas that aren’t turkey? You can prepare these perfectly portioned birds a day in advance and skip the hassle of roasting a whole turkey. It is such a visually pleasing (and perfectly portioned main course, and it is rather easy to make. And if you want to cook an easier way to cook them, be sure to check out our Air Fryer Cornish Hens recipe. You can also find dozens of tasty pairings in my collection of sides to serve with cornish hens.
  • Roast Chicken with Potatoes: If you’re looking for turkey-alternative entrée ideas, roasted chicken is the way to go. Perfectly seasoned and paired with buttery Yukon Gold potatoes, this one-pan recipe comes together with just seven simple ingredients.
Goat cheese stuffed chicken served on a plate with mashed potatoes on the side.
  • Goat Cheese-Stuffed Chicken: Say goodbye to boring Friendsgiving meal ideas with this flavor-packed main. Not only is this juicy chicken baked to perfection, but it also comes with a creamy brown-butter sauce that will have your guests licking their plates clean.
  • Ina Garten’s Pot Roast: Planning a non-traditional Friendsgiving menu to fill everyone up? This full-bodied dish is as filling as it is appetizing, filled with savory beef, tender veggies, and a delectable red wine sauce. You could even cut your cooking time in half by making a Pressure Cooker Roast version!

Side Dishes

Out of all the things to bring to Friendsgiving, sides are a must. These Friendsgiving side dishes include everything from creamy potatoes to savory stuffing, crisp salad, roasted veggies, and beyond. Serve up any of these hassle-free classic side dishes, and your potluck spread will be party-ready in no time. 

Rosemary Mashed Potatoes in a bowl with butter on top.
  • Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes: You can’t go wrong with a classic. These fluffy, rosemary-infused creamy mashed potatoes are whipped to perfection and only take 35 minutes to make. You could even prepare this dish ahead of time to shave down on kitchen time.
  • Sweet Potato Mash Recipe: You don’t need to add dozens of ingredients to your Friendsgiving food list with this simple recipe. Made with just seven ingredients, this rich and creamy stovetop sweet potato dish comes together in less than 30 minutes, and it is easy to make even for beginning-level home cooks.
  • Vegan Mac and Cheese: Mac and cheese made healthier with homemade cashew sauce. This one pot recipe is a great side dish for your friends and family who are observing a vegan diet.
Sweet potato casserole with pecan crust from the top view.
  • Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Casserole: Topped with a brown sugar-pecan streusel and sweetened with cane sugar, this sweet potato souffle is one of the tastiest things to take to a Friendsgiving meal. Impress your guests and delight your tastebuds with this oven-baked masterpiece.
  • Vegetarian Cornbread Stuffing: Nothing says “good Friendsgiving dishes” like a fresh batch of warm stuffing. This savory recipe packs tons of fall veggies—like green beans, corn, and onions—and it even has a secret ingredient for a tiny kick of spice: Jiffy Jalapeno Cornbread.
  • Spinach Artichoke Pasta: Gooey mozzarella, baby spinach, and hearty artichoke hearts make an incomparable pair in this Friendsgiving dish idea. With all the rich flavor of spinach artichoke dip, this crowd-pleasing dish is a total win when it comes to side dishes for Friendsgiving.
  • Cauliflower Gratin: If you are looking for an alternative to potato recipes, cauliflower is your best bet. This gratin recipe features cauliflower tossed in a cheesy cream sauce that is baked in the oven until crispy and browned. It is a make-ahead dish that is worthy of your Friendsgiving dinner.
Easy sauteed green beans in a skillet with a spoon on the side.
  • Easy Green Beans: Prefer not to make a green bean casserole? This easy green bean recipe packs all the same buttery, tender taste in just 15 minutes. That is exactly why this versatile dish is one of my favorite easy dishes to bring to Friendsgiving.
  • Maple Cranberry Sauce: No one can say no to this festive sauce’s tart and luscious flavor. Naturally sweetened with maple syrup and orange juice, this Thanksgiving dinner classic is vegan and infused with toasty cinnamon. The best part, you ask? You can make it ahead. So, go ahead and make this simple cranberry recipe to add a pop of color to your holiday table.
  • Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup: The ultimate make-ahead friendly Thanksgiving dish, Green Bean Casserole, is the perfect Friendsgiving side dish that you can bring with you. The good news is that this from-scratch version uses no mushrooms and still has all the umami flavors we all love.
Butternut squash salad on a plate from the top view.
  • Butternut Squash Salad: If you love roasted butternut squash, this recipe will be one of your new favorite foods for Friendsgiving. Made with toasted walnuts, warm apple cider vinaigrette, and vibrant arugula, this colorful salad is as healthy as it is delicious.
  • Maple Baked Carrots: Few make-ahead-friendly dishes are as delectable as this oven-roasted veggie. Coated with a cinnamon brown sugar glaze, these perfectly tender carrots come together with just seven ingredients, making it one of the easiest food ideas for Friendsgiving.
  • Carrot Ginger Soup: A great starter, this carrot soup is one of the easiest soups to make. Lightly flavored with ginger, this vegetarian recipe offers the perfect combination of savory, tangy, and sweet.
  • Cottage Cheese Mac n Cheese: An easy Friendsgiving recipe idea, our Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese is irresistibly creamy, packed with cheesy flavor, and a fun twist on the classic. It’s make-ahead friendly and travels perfectly, so you can focus on enjoying the festivities!
  • Air Fryer Butternut Squash: Embrace the essence of fall flavors with air-fried butternut squash! With your oven in high demand, let the air fryer be your secret weapon. Easy to make, this side dish captures the heartwarming taste of roasted butternut squash in a fraction of the time compared to making it in the oven.
Brussels Sprout Salad in a bowl with an apple on the side.
  • Shredded Brussel Sprout Salad with Apples: Creamy goat cheese perfectly pairs with this easy side dish’s tart apple and fresh Brussels sprouts. This salad recipe even comes with a white wine vinaigrette for another layer of delicious flavor. If you can’t get enough of this autumn-ready dish, you’ll love my other potluck salads for fall.
  • Air Fried Corn on the Cob: Tender, warm, and buttery, this air-fried corn recipe comes together in just fifteen minutes. You can even give your Friendsgiving feast extra-festive flavor by turning this simple dish into Air Fryer Street Corn (made with creamy elote sauce and fresh cilantro, of course!).
  • Wild Rice Stuffing: Crisp apples, sweet cranberries, and toasted pecans are the key to giving this gluten-free stuffing recipe its signature taste. The exquisite balance of sweet, savory, and herby flavors makes this savory side dish one of my Friendsgiving must-haves.
  • Butternut Squash Mac and Cheese: Who can say no to pasta tossed in a creamy squash and cheese sauce? A great meatless main dish or impressive side, this is a delicious mac and cheese recipe to add to your Friendsgiving menu if you are entertaining a crowd.

Easy Desserts

If you’re like me, you know there’s no better way to round off your menu for Friendsgiving than with a sweet treat. Whether you want a luscious fruit pie or a warm gingerbread cookie doesn’t matter. Sweet tooths and sugar lovers won’t be able to get enough of these easy recipes for Friendsgiving.

Gingerbread cookie on a plate with a glass of milk on the side.
  • Almond Flour Gingerbread Cookies: If you love the warm, cinnamon-ginger taste of gingerbread, you’ll adore these chewy, dairy-free, and paleo-friendly cookies. Don’t worry if you don’t have a food processor, either. Almond Flour Cookies make an excellent alternative to this festive recipe.
  • Chocolate Almond Bark: Homemade dessert doesn’t get easier than this gluten-free treat. Nutty almonds, sweet maple syrup, and dried apricots come together for a dish that has “chocolate lovers” written all over it.
  • Healthier Pumpkin Pie: Who can resist a classic—especially one with a secret healthy twist? This pumpkin pie recipe is creamy, light, and naturally sweet, and it has a hint of spice that will have you licking your lips.
Almond flour apple cake sliced on a plate with a knife on the side.
  • Apple Cake with Almond Flour: Perfectly moist and refined sugar-free, this scrumptious coffee cake is one of my most popular recipes with almond flour. It only takes 15 minutes to prepare. This Friendsgiving potluck idea only needs ten ingredients, including tart apples, warm cinnamon, and sweet vanilla.
  • Maple Pecan Pie: Prepared with a homemade pie crust, this old-fashioned pecan pie adds new meaning to “Thanksgiving pie.” This delectable dish has a warm and nutty molasses filling, and it also comes with a bourbon whipped cream topping.
  • Dutch Apple Pie: If you’re a fan of apple picking, you’ll obsess over this fall favorite. This apple pie is gooey, flaky, and rich, and its crumbly streusel topping takes this classic to the next level.
Cranberry Tart sliced on a plate from the top view.
  • Vegan Cranberry Tart: Need vegan dishes to bring to Friendsgiving? This fruity recipe comes with an almond-oat crust and an almond crumb topping that are to die for. Everyone will want a bite of this sweet and crumbly goodie.
  • Mini Pecan Pies: Why not try something new and make these lightly sweetened mini pecan pies for a dessert that is guaranteed to please? Made in a muffin tin, this dessert recipe uses almond flour, coconut sugar, and maple syrup. It is a great alternative to the classic Thanksgiving pie as it can be served in individual portions.
  • Greek Yogurt Cheesecake: If you are a fan of the tangy flavors of Greek yogurt, then this lightened-up cheesecake recipe is a must-try. Lightly sweetened with honey and raspberry sauce, this dessert is a showstopper that will disappear in no time.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress when you’re planning meals for Friendsgiving. Whether you’re wondering how to make your holiday celebration a hit or how to make a Friendsgiving meal for a few besties, this user-friendly list will answer all your questions.

What do you serve at a Friendsgiving party?

Though there are no rules for what to serve at Friendsgiving, people usually serve smaller portions of traditional Thanksgiving food. Some fan favorites are turkey, stuffing, mashed potatoes, and green bean casserole, though many also opt for more accessible versions, like roasted chicken or sauteed green beans.

What to bring to Friendsgiving if you can’t cook?

If you’re at a loss for what to cook for Friendsgiving, don’t worry! Anyone who isn’t comfortable cooking something for their holiday potluck can bring other offerings instead, like flowers, wine, or even a treat picked up from their local bakery.

How do I host a small Friendsgiving?

The key to hosting a small Friendsgiving is to keep it simple. Try serving turkey parts instead of a whole turkey for a hassle-free main dish, and keep your sides to a maximum of 2-3. You can also make dessert a cinch by whipping up (or even buying!) an easy pie.

How to make Friendsgiving fun?

When it comes to making your holiday get-together fun, the options are endless. Picking a theme, having everyone bring a dish, playing party games, and even serving festive drinks are just a few ways to liven up your Friendsgiving.

If you try any of these Friendsgiving Menu Ideas, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Turkey loin sliced on a plate with vegetables from the top view.
Print

35+ Friendsgiving Food Ideas – Roasted Turkey Tenderloin and More!

Intimidated by cooking a whole turkey? Try This Turkey Tenderloin Recipe that combines simple ingredients like ground spices and olive oil for juicy, flavorful tenderloins that are guaranteed to impress. Add this easy recipe to your Friendsgiving Menu and accept compliments from all your friends.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 156kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 turkey tenderloins* – 4 oz or ~113 grams each

For the Tenderloin Rub:

  • ¼ teaspoon rubbed sage or dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika or sweet paprika would also work
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 325 degrees F.
  • Make the rub: Mix together sage, thyme, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a small bowl. Set it aside.
  • Dry the tenderloins: Pat dry turkey tenderloins with paper towels on both sides.
  • Coat with oil: Drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil and coat them on both sides.
  • Add the rub: Sprinkle them with the prepared turkey tenderloin rub on both sides.
  • Heat the oil: Heat the remaining oil in a large stainless steel skillet (or a cast iron skillet) until shimmering hot.
  • Sear: Sear turkey tenderloins for 1 minute on each side until lightly browned.
  • Bake: Place the skillet in the oven and roast tenderloins until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the tenderloin registers 155 degrees for 15 minutes.
  • Rest: Take it out of the oven and cover it with aluminum foil and let it rest for 10 minutes. As it sits, it should come to 165 degrees (the safe temperature for turkey) without drying.
  • Serve: Slice and serve.

Notes

  • While this recipe serves 4-6 people, you can easily multiply the recipe and make it for more people. 
  • Try our turkey tenderloin marinade: If you have the time to plan ahead, you can also marinade your turkey loins in our marinade.
  • The temperature of the raw meat: I cooked my turkey tenders immediately after taking them out of the fridge. However, you could also let them reach room temperature before beginning the cooking process. Whichever method you choose, just be sure to dry the breast loin before cooking. 
  • Size of the turkey tenderloin matters: When baking turkey tenderloin, remember that the size of your fillet will impact its cooking time. Each of my turkey loins was around 4 ounces and took 15 minutes to reach the desired internal temperature, which is 165 degrees F. Depending on the size of your turkey tenderloins, it might take a bit shorter or longer. If you own a meat thermometer (this is the one I own and love), be sure to use it for accurate testing.
  • Two-part cooking method: If you’ve ever cooked turkey tenderloins, you know that it can go from perfectly moist to not-so-appetizing dry in an instant. During our tests, we found that the secret to success starts with searing your meat in a stainless steel (or cast iron) skillet for one minute on each side before putting it in the oven. This extra step creates a gorgeous golden exterior while also locking in flavorful juices. However, make sure that your skillet is very hot before searing the loins, as the high temperature is key to properly seared turkey tenders.
  • Storage instructions: Let your turkey cool completely. Then, transfer the meat to an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating instructions: You have two options here: Firstly, you can place your turkey on a microwave-safe plate and microwave it on high for 30-60 seconds or until it is heated thoroughly. Secondly, you can reheat it in a 350-degree F. oven. Spray a baking dish with cooking spray, add your tenderloin, and cover it with tin foil. Then, bake the turkey for 10-15 minutes or until its center is warm.
  • Freezing instructions: To freeze, let your meat cool completely. Then, transfer the tenderloin to a Ziplock bag and remove as much air as possible. Your turkey will stay fresh in the freezer for up to 3 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight, and follow the instructions above for reheating.

Nutrition

Calories: 156kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 38mg | Sodium: 348mg | Potassium: 14mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.04g | Vitamin A: 129IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/friendsgiving-food-ideas/feed/ 0
Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/ https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/#comments Wed, 16 Nov 2022 16:47:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61895 Say hello to cranberry season. What great way to celebrate fresh (or frozen) cranberries than with a low-sugar, refined-sugar-free, vegan,…]]>

Say hello to cranberry season. What great way to celebrate fresh (or frozen) cranberries than with a low-sugar, refined-sugar-free, vegan, and homemade cranberry maple sauce recipe to call your own? 

The tart flavors of cranberries mixed in with mildly sweet maple syrup is a match made in heaven. Make it fast and flavorful, and serve it with plenty of Thanksgiving Veggie Sides like Rosemary Mashed Potatoes, Garlic Butter Green Beans, Sweet Potato Soufflé, and Maple Roasted Carrots

A sauce made from cranberries in a bowl with rosemary and orange slices.

It goes without saying – this healthier cranberry sauce is going to outperform store-bought canned cranberry sauce any day. While it is a great addition to your Thanksgiving table and Christmas dinner, you can enjoy it any time of year!

Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredient list for this maple syrup cranberry sauce recipe is simple and straightforward. Take a trip to the grocery store and gather together fresh cranberries, pure maple syrup, water, fresh orange juice, a cinnamon stick, and orange zest.

Ingredients to make a sauce with cranberries and maple syrup.

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-ins

  • Frozen cranberries: Use frozen cranberries in place of fresh – no need to thaw – and simply add a few minutes to the simmering time.
  • Honey syrup: Replace the maple syrup with an equal amount of Honey Syrup. Note: Since high heat can have negative effects on the nutritional value of honey, if going the honey route, bring the mixture up to a bare simmer under medium-low heat and then reduce it to low heat for 15-20 minutes. Cranberry Sauce with Honey is a wonderful alternative if you are living in an area where you can’t get maple syrup.
  • Ground cinnamon: Omit the cinnamon stick and add ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon at the end of cooking.
  • Additional spices: Add ⅛ teaspoon of additional warming spices, like ground ginger, allspice, cloves, cardamom, or pumpkin pie spice.
  • Liquor: Add a splash of bourbon or Cointreau, brandy, port wine, or sherry at the end of cooking.
  • With more fruit: Turn it into cranberry chutney with the addition of diced apples, pears, other berries, and raisins. 
  • Without orange: Not a fan of cranberry orange sauce? Replace orange juice with cranberry juice, apple juice, or water. I would not recommend lemon juice as it would make it even tarter. However, you can use lemon zest as a substitute for orange zest.
  • Vanilla extract: If preferred, you can add a splash of vanilla extract (about ½ teaspoon) in the end.

How to Make This Recipe?

This Refined Sugar-Free Cranberry Sauce couldn’t be any easier to make. All it takes is a quick simmer on the stove, and you have a homemade maple cranberry sauce right before your eyes. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Wash cranberries: Place cranberries in a colander and rinse with cold water. Pick the old, shriveled ones and discard them.
A person showing how to boil cranberries to make a sauce from the top view.
  1. Add ingredients to saucepan: In a medium-sized saucepan, combine cranberries, maple syrup, water, orange juice, and the cinnamon stick.
  2. Simmer: Set over medium-high heat and bring it up to a boil, give it a stir, turn the heat down to medium-low, and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally until the cranberries pop and it reaches your desired consistency.
  3. Taste test: Taste for sweetness and add more maple syrup if you’d like it a little less tart.
  4. Finish and serve: Off the heat, carefully remove the cinnamon stick. Finish with the orange zest. Enjoy your cranberry maple sauce warm, at room temperature, or chill in the fridge.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

This naturally sweetened cranberry sauce can be served warm, at room temperature, or cold. This makes it a wonderful make ahead recipe and gets you one step closer to holiday prep work.

  • Make ahead: Cook the cranberry maple syrup sauce as directed, cool it completely, and transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Storage: Whether freshly made or looking to get ahead, the cranberry sauce will keep in the fridge for up to one week.
  • Freeze: Once cool, store the cranberry sauce made with maple syrup in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen cranberry sauce overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

In addition to serving it with a plethora of Thanksgiving recipes like Thanksgiving turkey (or Roasted Turkey Drumsticks or Baked Turkey Tenderloins), leftover cranberry sauce can be used to jazz up leftovers or provide a new twist on a recipe. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Expert Tips

  • Make a double batch. Double the recipe if serving a big crowd – or freeze the rest for later use.
  • Popping is completely normal. The cranberries will pop and sputter as they cook, and this is completely normal. This means they are breaking down and releasing their natural sweetness.
  • Remove the cinnamon stick before storing. The cinnamon will become too overpowering if left to sit in the cranberry sauce. Remove just after cooking.
  • The cranberry sauce will thicken significantly as it cools. Don’t fret if the texture is a little looser than expected. The cranberry sauce will thicken as it cools – and thicken even further once chilled.

FAQs

How to sweeten cranberry sauce without sugar?

It’s easy to sweeten cranberry sauce without sugar by replacing it with a natural sugar, like maple syrup or honey.

How to make cranberry sauce less tart?

Use maple syrup to make cranberry sauce less tart, while also keeping it healthier and refined sugar free. Taste test near the end of cooking. If it is still too tart for your liking, add more maple syrup, 1 tablespoon at a time.

How do you spice up cranberry sauce?

It’s easy to spice up cranberry sauce with the addition of warm winter spices like ground cinnamon, ginger, allspice, cloves, cardamom, or pumpkin pie spice. The ground spices will intensify as they sit in the sauce, so a mere ⅛ – ¼ teaspoon goes a long way.

What can you add to cranberry sauce to thicken it?

Cranberries contain a lot of pectin (a natural thickener), so there is really no need to add a thickening agent such as cornstarch or tapioca starch. Simply simmer the cranberry sauce until most of them have split, and allow to cool. The longer it cools, the thicker it will become.

How do you get the bitter taste out of cranberry sauce?

If, at the end of cooking, you taste a spoonful and it’s bitter, you can add more maple syrup for a touch of sweetness. If you prefer not to add more sugar, try something tangy, like a splash of orange juice, apple juice, or even white wine.

Other Creative Cranberry Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this refined-sugar free easy homemade Cranberry Sauce recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade cranberry sauce with maple syrup in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup Recipe

This Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup is the perfect, satisfying balance of sweet and tart, yet it's also refined-sugar-free, vegan, and low-sugar. Serve this make-ahead friendly sauce as a light side dish for your holiday dinner, or enjoy it year-round with sandwiches, desserts, breakfast, and more!
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 17 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 489kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 12-ounce bag of fresh or frozen cranberries
  • cup maple syrup more as needed
  • cup water
  • ¼ cup orange juice
  • 1 cinnamon stick or ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon – optional
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest

Instructions

  • Rinse cranberries: Place cranberries in a colander and rinse with cold water. Pick the old, shriveled ones and discard them.
  • Add ingredients: Transfer the rest of the cranberries to a medium-sized pan and add the maple syrup, water, orange juice, and a cinnamon stick.
  • Cook: Heat over medium heat, bring it to a boil, give it a stir, turn the heat down to medium-low*, and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until it reaches your desired consistency. Be sure to stir it a few times.
  • Taste and adjust: As it simmers, cranberries will soften and pop, so don’t be alarmed. Taste for sweetness and add more maple syrup (in 1-tablespoon increments), if needed.
  • Remove from heat and serve: Off the heat, carefully remove the cinnamon stick, and stir in the orange zest. Serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold.

Notes

  • Servings: This recipe yields 1 1/2 cups of cranberry sauce. 
  • *Popping is completely normal. The cranberries will pop and sputter as they cook, which is completely normal. This means they are breaking down and releasing their natural sweetness.
  • Make ahead: Cook the cranberry sauce as directed, cool it completely, and transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Storage: Store the cooled sauce in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week.
  • Freeze: Once cool, store the cranberry sauce in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen cranberry sauce overnight in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 489kcal | Carbohydrates: 124g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 22mg | Potassium: 665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 84g | Vitamin A: 364IU | Vitamin C: 87mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/feed/ 2